Dampers Catalog

Dampers
www.ehpricesales.com
Index Date: July 2012
Submittal Sheets
Control Dampers
Description Submittal No. Date
Control Dampers
CCD-GV5-3V 5" Galvanized Steel Frame, 3V Blade 244964 (2 sheets) Jul / 12
CCD-GV5-3V-LL 5" Galvanized Steel Frame, Low Leakage 244965 (2 sheets) Jul / 12
CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD 5" Galvanized Steel Frame, Low Leakage, Heavy Duty 244966 (2 sheets) Jul / 12
CCD-GV5-IB 5" Galvanized Steel Frame, Aluminum Insulated Blade 244967 Jul / 12
CCD-RD Steel Construction, True Round 244968 Jul / 12
CCD-RD-LL Steel Construction, True Round, Low Leakage 244969 Jul / 12
CCD-GV5-AF 5" Galvanized Steel Frame Construction Formed Airfoil Blade 244970 (2 sheets) Jul / 12
CCD-AE4-4X Aluminum Construction 4" Frame, 4" Airfoil Blade 244971 (2 sheets) Jul / 12
CCD-AE5I-IB Aluminum Construction 5" Frame, 6" Airfoil Blade
Insulated Blade & Frame 244974 (2 sheets) Jul / 12
CCD-GV5-3V-MBD Manual Balancing Damper 244975 Jul / 12
CCD-RD-MBD Round Manual Balancing Damper 244976 Jul / 12
Control Damper Installation and Accessories

Face & By-Pass Mixing Damper 244977 Jul / 12
Actuator and Jackshaft Dimensions 244978 Jul / 12
Damper Enclosures & Transitions 244979 Jul / 12
Damper Operators 244980 Jul / 12
Control and Balancing Dampers Suggested Specifications Jul / 12
All Metric dimensions ( ) are soft conversion. Copyright E.H. Price Limited 2012.
Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model CCD-GV5-3V
Steel Construction
3V Blade
Commercial Control Damper - Steel
Model Standard Construction:

Commercial Control Damper Steel Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat-
CCD-GV5-3V section with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Features
The CCD-GV5-3V series Control Dampers Blades: 16-18 ga. triple-vee profile Roll-
have been designed and tested to provide formed, galvanized steel
a reliable cost effective control damper Minimum width: 41/4" (108 mm)
where tight sealing is not of primary im- Maximum width: 71/4" (184 mm)
portance. (Note: For tight sealing dampers Bearings: Bronze Oilite. Press fit into frame.
see Model: CCD-GV5-3V-LL). Axles: Square, plated steel.
The CCD-GV5-3V dampers rigid frame Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
and integrally braced corners provide are 12 ga. thick galvanized steel.
true damper alignment that greatly resists
being installed out of square or out of flat. Finish: Mill galvanized.
The CCD-GV5-3V is available in either Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" long x
parallel or opposed blade models.
1
/2" dia. (152 mm x 13 mm) plated steel
coupled to square axle.
Damper section smaller than 48"w x 12"h
(1219mm x 305mm) are furnished with a Max. Temperature: 250F
low profile top and bottom to maximize Sizes: Minimum size: 5"w x 4"h (127 mm x
free areas. 102 mm) Maximum size: Single section -48"
The CCD-GV5-3V series dampers may be w x 72"h (1219 mm x 1829 mm) Multiple
made to accommodate higher than the section - size unlimited
recommended 2.5" w.g. static pressure. Options:
If application involves pressures in excess Bearings: Nylon. Press-fit into frame.
of 2.5" w.g. or velocities greater than 2000 Seals: For pressure sensitive blade edge
fpm, contact the factory. & jamb seals, see Model CCD-GV5-3V-LL.
Factory installed electric or pneumatic Notes:
operators are available. Dampers fabricated 1/4" (6mm) under
opening size unless otherwise noted
Specify parallel or opposed blade action.
All dampers 32" (813 mm) and over
are supplied with Jackshafting. (See
Jackshafting & Enclosure submittal
drawing for details).
Specifications are correct at time of
printing. However, as part of our continuous
improvement program, we reserve the right
to make further improvements without
notice.
Jul / 12
244964
Jul / 12 244964 SHEET 1 OF 2 Rev.A Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model CCD-GV5-3V
Steel Construction
3V Blade
Model CCD-GV5-3V-LL
Steel Construction
Low Leakage Model

CCD-GV5-3V-LL section with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Features
The CCD-GV5-3V-LL series Control Blades: 16-18 ga. triple-vee profile Roll-
Dampers have been designed and formed, galvanized steel
tested to provide an extremely tight Minimum width: 41/4" (108mm)
sealing damper which is cost effective Maximum width: 71/4" (184mm)
for the majority of HVAC applications. Bearings: Bronze Oilite. Press fit into frame.
They are generally recommended for Axles: Square, plated steel.
face velocities up to 2000 fpm and static Seals: Pressure sensitive, PVC blade edge
pressures to 2.5" w.g. (Note: for systems seals and flexible metal jamb seals.
in excess of 2.5" w.g. contact the factory).
The CCD-GV5-3V-LL series dampers have Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
pressure sensitive jamb and blade edge are 12 ga. thick galvanized steel.
seals to provide the ultimate in sealing Finish: Mill galvanized.
characteristics without unduly increasing Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" long x
torque requirements. 1
/2" dia. (152 mm x 13 mm) plated steel
The CCD-GV5-3V-LL series dampers coupled to square axle.
rigid frame and integrally braced corners Max. Temperature: 250F
provide true damper alignment that
Sizes:
greatly resists being installed out of
Minimum size:
square or out of flat. This insures on site
5"w x 4"h (127mm x 102mm)
performance equal to test results.
Factory installed electric or pneumatic Maximum size:
operators are available. Single section -
48" w x 72"h (1219mm x 1829mm)
Multiple section - size unlimited.
Options:
Bearings: Nylon. Press-fit into frame.
Silicone blades edge seals.
Notes:
Dampers fabricated 1/4" (6mm) under
All dampers 32" (813mm) and over
CCD-GV5-3V-LL is available in either
CCD-GV5-3V-LL available as a face and
by-pass mixing damper.
Damper section smaller than 48"w x 12"h
(1219mm x 305mm) are furnished with
a low profile top and bottom frame to
maximize free area.
Specifications are correct at time of printing.

However, as part of our continuous
improvement program, we reserve the
right to make further improvements without
notice.
Jul / 12
244965
Model CCD-GV5-3V-LL
Steel Construction
Low Leakage Model
AT AT AT
LEAKAGE 1.0" w.g. 2.5" w.g. 4.0" w.g.
cfm/SQ. FT. 3.5 5.0 7.0
Model CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD
Steel Construction Low Leakage,
Heavy Duty Model

CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD section with staked corners with integral
bracing & roll-formed galvanized steel C
Features channel insert welded to provide equivalent
The CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD (Heavy Duty) se- of 12 ga. steel.
ries Dampers have been designed and
tested to provide rigid, robust, and yet, Blades: 16 ga. Roll-formed, galvanized steel
cost effective control dampers for special & 18 ga. formed galvanized steel continuous
applications involving high pressure up rigidizing section to provide equivalent of
to 9.0" w.g. 10 ga. steel.
The CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD series dampers Bearings: Bronze Oilite. Press fit into frame.
have pressure sensitive jamb and blade Axles: Square, plated steel.
edge seals to provide the ultimate in
sealing characteristics without unduly Seals: Pressure sensitive, PVC blade edge
increasing torque requirements. seals and flexible metal jamb seals.
The CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD series dampers Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
rigid frame and integrally braced corners are 12 ga. thick galvanized steel.
provide true damper alignment that Finish: Mill galvanized.
greatly resists being installed out of Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" long x
square or out of flat. This insures on site 1
/2" dia. (152mm x 13mm) plated steel
performance equal to test results. coupled to square axle.
CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD is available in either Max. Temperature: 250F
Sizes: Minimum size:
Factory installed electric or pneumatic 8"w x 8"h (203mm x 203mm)
operators are available.
Maximum size:
Single section - 48" w x 72"h
(1219mm x 1829 mm)
Multiple section - size unlimited.
Options:
Silicone blades edge seals.
Notes:
Dampers fabricated 1/4" (6 mm) under
Specifications are correct at time of
printing. However, as part of our continuous
improvement program, we reserve the right
notice.
Jul / 12
244966
Model CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD
Steel Construction Low Leakage,
Heavy Duty Model
Commercial Control Damper Steel
AT AT AT AT
LEAKAGE 1.0" w.g. 4.0" w.g. 8.0" w.g. 12.0" w.g.
cfm/SQ. FT. 3.5 7.0 9.8 11.2
Model CCD-GV5-IB
Steel Frame Construction
Aluminum Insulated Blade
Commercial Control Damper - Steel Frame

CCD-GV5-IB section with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Features
The CCD-GV5-IB series Control Dampers Blades: Extruded Aluminum, 6" wide
have been designed and tested to provide (152mm) Airfoil Profile, heavy gauge 6063
the ultimate in performance features for T5 extrusion. Fiberglass insulated.
sophisticated HVAC systems. Fiberglass Bearings: Bronze Oilite. Press fit into frame.
insulated blades minimize energy loss Axles: Square, plated steel.
through the closed damper and makes
the CCD-GV5-IB ideal for outside air intake Seals: Pressure sensitive PVC blade edge
and exhaust applications. Streamlined seals and flexible metal jamb seals.
(airfoil) blades provide reduced tur- Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
bulence and noise. Inflatable blade edge are 12 ga. galvanized steel.
and jamb seals allow extremely tight Finish: Mill galvanized.
sealing without unduly increasing torque
requirements. Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" long x
The CCD-GV5-IB series dampers rigid
1
frame and integrally braced corners pro- coupled to square axle.
vide true damper alignment that greatly Maximum Temperature: 250F
resists being installed out of square or out Sizes:
of flat. This insures on site performance Minimum size:
equal to test results. 8"w x 8"h (203mm x 203mm)
The CCD-GV5-IB series dampers have Maximum size:
been leakage tested to AMCA standard Single section -
500 with the following results: 48" w x 72"h (1219mm x 1829mm)
Notes:
AT AT AT Multiple section - size unlimited. Dampers fabricated 1/4" (6 mm) under
LEAKAGE 1.0" w.g. 4.0" w.g. 8.0" w.g.
cfm/SQ. FT. 3.0 5.0 7.0
Options: Not recommended with blades running
CCD-GV5-IB is available in either parallel Operators: Motor mounting - Factory
vertically.
or opposed blade models. furnished or by others. Manual quadrant All dampers 32" (813mm) and over
Factory installed electric or pneumatic operator are supplied with Jackshafting. (See
operators are available. Face & Bypass: Right angle and straight
line face and bypass drawing for details).
Jackshaft: 3 / 4 " (19 mm) Jackshaft
reinforcement However, as part of our continuous
Silicone blade edge seals.
notice.
Jul / 12
244967
Model CCD-RD
Steel Construction
True Round
Model
CCD-RD
Features
The CCD-RD series Control Dampers have
been designed and tested to provide a
reliable cost effective control damper
where tight sealing is not of primary
importance. (Note: For tight sealing
dampers see Model CCD-RD-LL).
Factory installed electric or pneumatic
operators are available when dampers
are ordered with motor standoff bracket.
Standard Construction:
Frame:
Galvanized steel, rolled reinforcement.
22 ga. for 4" - 9" (102 mm - 229 mm) dia.
20 ga. for 10" - 24" (254 mm - 610 mm) dia.
Blades: Galvanized steel with welded
channel reinforcement.
Bearings: Bronze Oilite.
Axles: 3/8" (10 mm) square, plated steel.
Finish: Mill galvanized.
Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" x 1/2" dia.
(152mm x 13mm), plated steel.
Max. Temperature: 200F
Damper Sizes: 4" to 24" (102 mm to 610
mm) diameters.
Notes:
Dampers fabricated 1/8" (3 mm) smaller
than given duct dimensions.
However, as part of our continuous improve-
ment program, we reserve the right to make
further improvements without notice.
Jul / 12
244968
Model CCD-RD-LL
Steel Construction Round,
Low Leakage Model
Model
Commercial Control Damper Steel
CCD-RD-LL
Features
The CCD-RD-LL series Control Dampers
have been designed and tested to provide
an extremely tight sealing damper which
is cost effective for the majority of HVAC
applications.
The CCD-RD-LL series Control Dampers
have pressure sensitive blade edge seals
to provide the ultimate in sealing charac-
teristics without unduly increasing torque
requirements.
The CCD-RD-LL dampers have been tested
to AMCA Standard 500-D with the follow-
ing results:
AT AT AT
LEAKAGE 1.0" w.g. 2.5" w.g. 4.0" w.g.
cfm/SQ. FT. 1.0 1.5 4.0
Factory installed electric or pneumatic
operators are available when dampers
are ordered with motor standoff bracket.
Frame:
Galvanized steel, rolled reinforcement.
22 ga. for 5" - 9" (127 mm - 229 mm) dia.
20 ga. for 10" - 24" (254 mm - 610 mm) dia.
Blades: Galvanized steel with welded
channel reinforcement.
Bearings: Bronze Oilite. Notes:
Dampers fabricated 1/8" (3 mm) smaller
than given duct dimensions.
Seals: Pressure sensitive, silicone. Air
pressure assists sealing effects.
Finish: Mill galvanized. improvement program, we reserve the
Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" x 1/2" dia. right to make further improvements without
(152mm x 13mm), plated steel. notice.
Damper Sizes: 5" to 24" (127 mm to 610
mm) diameters.
Jul / 12
244969
Model CCD-GV5-AF
Commercial Control Damper
Galvanized Airfoil Blade

Commercial Control Damper Steel Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel
CCD-GV5-AF hatsection with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Features
The CCD-GV5-AF series Control Dampers Blades: Airfoil-shaped, double skin
have been designed and tested to galvanized steel of roll-formed construction.
provide the ultimate in performance Mechanically joined to form construction
features for sophisticated HVAC systems. equivalent to 14 ga. steel. Minimum 5"w
Streamlined ("airfoil") blades provide (127 mm), maximum 7"w (178mm)
reduced turbulence and noise. Inflatable Bearings: Bronze Oilite. Press fit into frame.
blade edge and jamb seals allow Axles: Square, plated steel.
extremely tight sealing without unduly
increasing torque requirements. Seals: 450F inflatable PVC blade edge seals
The CCD-GV5-AF series damper's rigid and flexible metal jamb seals.
frame and integrally braced corners Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
provide true damper alignment that are 12ga. galvanized steel.
greatly resists being installed out of Finish: Mill galvanized.
square or out of flat. This insures on site
performance equal to test results. Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" long x 1/2
CCD-GV5-AF is available in either parallel dia. (152 mm x 13 mm) plated steel coupled
or opposed blade models. to square axle.
CCD-GV5-AF is available as face and by- Maximum Temperature: 450F (Bronze
pass mixing dampers. Oilite Bearings)
Factory installed electric or pneumatic Size: Minimum size: 8"w x 8"h (203 mm
operators are available. x 203 mm)
Maximum size: Single section - 48"w x 72"h
(1219 mm x 1829 mm)
Multiple section - size unlimited:
Options:
Notes:
Not recommended with blades running
vertically.
drawing for details)
notice.
Jul / 12
244970
Jul / 12 244970 SHEET 1 OF 2 Rev.B Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model CCD-GV5-AF
Commercial Control Damper
Galvanized Airfoil Blade

AT AT AT
LEAKAGE 1.0" w.g. 4.0" w.g. 8.0" w.g.
cfm/SQ. FT. 3.1 6.3 12.4
Jul / 12 244970 SHEET 2 OF 2 Rev.B Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model CCD-AE4-4X
Aluminum Construction
4" Frame, 4" Airfoil Blade
Commercial Control Damper - Aluminum
Model
Commercial Control Damper Aluminum
CCD-AE4-4X
Features
The CCD-AE4-4X series Control dampers
the ultimate in performance features for
sophisticated HVAC systems. Streamlined
(airfoil) blades provide reduced
turbulence and noise. Inflatable blade
edge and jamb seals allow extremely
tight seating without unduly increasing
torque requirements.
Frame: Extruded aluminum channel,
4"w x 1"h (102mm x 25mm) heavy gauge
6063-T5
Blades: Extruded aluminum 4" (102mm)
wide airfoil profile, heavy gauge 6063-T5
extrusion.
Bearings: Bronze oilite bearings.
Axles: Square plated steel.
Linkage: Galvanized steel linkage bar,
concealed in frame.
Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" long x
1
Blade Seals: Inflatable, pressure sensitive,
PVC.
Jamb Seals: Flexible metal, pressure
sensitive.
Finish: Mill aluminum. Options:
Jackshaft: 1/2" (13 mm) diameter standard Operators: Motor mounting - Factory
on multi sections. furnished or by others. Manual quadrant
Minimum Damper Size: operator
Single Blade: 6"w x 5"h (152mm x 127mm). Face & Bypass: Right angle and straight
Multi Blade: 6"w x 8"h (152mm x 203mm) line face and bypass
Maximum Damper Size: Jackshaft: 3 / 4 " (19mm) Jackshaft
Single Section: 48"w x 72"h (1219mm x reinforcement.
1829mm) Silicone blade edge seals.
Multi Section: Unlimited.
Notes:
Specify parallel or opposed
notice.
Jul / 12
244971
Model CCD-AE4-4X
Typical Model
CCD-AE4-4X Installation
The CCD-AE4-4X series is not recommended for vertical blades
installation. Always connect motors to power blade and on linkage
side.
PRICE dampers are designed to be self supporting only in single
sections. Multi-section dampers may require external bracing.
Recommended bracing minimum of 8' (2438 mm). The amount and
size will depend on unit size and system pressure.
The CCD-AE4-4X is suitable for applications with total pressures up
to 4.0" w.g. It may be used in applications exceeding 4.0" w.g. by
reducing the damper width. For correct damper sizing consult the
factory when exceeding standard design limit of 4.0" w.g.
Model CCD-AE5-4X
Model
CCD-AE5-4X
Features
Frame: Extruded aluminum hat section, 5"w
x 1"h (127mm x 25mm) heavy gauge 6063-T5
extrusion.
concealed in frame.
1
coupled to square axle. Options:
Operators: Motor mounting - Factory
Blade Seals: Inflatable, pressure sensitive, furnished or by others. Manual quadrant
PVC. operator
Jamb Seals: Flexible metal, pressure Face & Bypass: Right angle and straight
sensitive. line face and bypass
Finish: Mill aluminum. Jackshaft: 3 / 4 " (19mm) Jackshaft
Jackshaft: 1/2" (13mm) diameter standard reinforcement.
on multi section. Silicone blade edge seals.
Minimum Damper Size: Notes:
Single Blade: 6"w x 5"h (152mm x 127mm) Dampers fabricated 1/4" (6mm) under
Multi Blade: 6"w x 8"h (152mm x 203mm) opening size unless otherwise noted
Maximum Damper Size: Specify parallel or opposed blade action.
Single Section: Specifications are correct at time of
48"w x 72"h (1219mm x 1829mm), printing. However, as part of our continuous
Multi Section: Unlimited. improvement program, we reserve the right
notice.
Jul / 12
244972
Model CCD-AE5-4X
Typical Model
The CCD-AE5-4X series is not recommended for vertical blades installation.
Always connect motors to power blade and on linkage side.
The PRICE frame is designed for easy installation into duct. Simply put
sheet metal screws through the duct into the 1/2" (13 mm) wide mounting
flanges approximately 18" (457 mm) on center.
PRICE dampers are designed to be self supporting only in single sections.
Multi-section dampers may require external bracing. Recommended
bracing minimum of 8' (2438 mm). The amount and size will depend on
unit size and system pressure.
The CCD-AE5-4X is suitable for applications with total pressures up to
4.0" w.g. It may be used in applications exceeding 4.0" w.g. by reducing
the damper width. For correct damper sizing consult the factory when
exceeding standard design limit of 4.0" w.g.
Model CCD-AE5-6X
Model
CCD-AE5-6X
Features
Frame: Extruded aluminum hat section, 5"w
x 1"h (127mm x 25mm) heavy gauge 6063-T5.
extrusion.
concealed in frame.
1
Blade Seals: Inflatable, pressure sensitive,
PVC.
Jamb Seals: Flexible metal, pressure
sensitive.
Finish: Mill.
Jackshaft: 1/2" (13mm) diameter standard
on multi sections.
Notes:
Minimum Damper Size:
Single Blade 6"w x 5"h (152mm x 127mm).
Maximum Damper Size: Specify parallel or opposed blade action.
Single Section: 48"w x 72"h (1219mm x
1829mm), Multi Section: Unlimited.
Options: improvement program, we reserve the
Operators: Motor mounting - Factory
furnished or by others. Manual quadrant notice.
operator
Face & Bypass: Right angle and straight

line face and bypass
Jackshaft: 3 / 4 " (19mm) Jackshaft

reinforcement.

Jul / 12
244973
Model CCD-AE5-6X
Typical Model
The CCD-AE5-6X series is not recommended for vertical blades installa-
tion. Always connect motors to power blade and on linkage side.
The CCD-AE5-6X is suitable for applications with total pressures up to
Model CCD-AE5I-IB
Insulated Blade and Insulated Frame
Model
CCD-AE5I-IB
Features
The CCD-AE5I-IB series Control dampers
sophisticated HVAC systems. Stream-
lined (airfoil) blades provide reduced
torque requirements. Insulation around
the perimeter of the frame and in each
blade minimizes energy loss through the
closed damper.
Frame: Extruded aluminum hat section,
heavy gauge 6063-T5. 5"w x 1"h (127mm x
25mm) on 3 sides. 5"w x 1-3/4"h (127mm x
44mm) on 1 side.
extrusion.
Insulation: Lightweight non absorbing.
concealed in frame.
1
Blade Seals: Inflatable, pressure sensi- Options:
tive, PVC. Operators: Motor mounting - Factory
furnished or by others. Manual quadrant
Jamb Seals: Flexible metal, pressure operator
sensitive.
Face & Bypass: Right angle and straight
Finish: Mill. line face and bypass
Jackshaft: 1/2" (13mm) diameter standard Jackshaft: 3 / 4 " (19mm) Jackshaft
on multi sections. reinforcement.
Minimum Damper Size: Silicone blade edge seals.
Single Blade:
8"w x 10"h (203mm x 254mm) Notes:
Multi Blade: Dampers fabricated 1/4" (6mm) under
8"w x 15"h (203mm x 381mm) opening size unless otherwise noted
Specify parallel or opposed blade action.
Maximum Damper Size: Specifications are correct at time of
Single Section: 48"w x 72"h (1219mm x printing. However, as part of our continuous
1829mm) improvement program, we reserve the right
Multi Section: Unlimited. to make further improvements without
notice.
Jul / 12
244974
Model CCD-AE5I-IB
Insulated Blade and Insulated Frame
Typical Model
CCD-AE5I-IB Installation
The CCD-AE5I-IB series is not recommended for vertical blades installa-
tion. Always connect motors to power blade and on linkage side.
The CCD-AE5I-IB is suitable for applications with total pressures up to
Model CCD-GV5-3V-MBD
Manual Balancing Damper

Manual Balancing Damper Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat
CCD-GV5-3V-MBD section with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Features
The CCD-GV5-3V-MBD series Manual Blades: 16-18 ga. Roll-formed, galvanized
Balancing Dampers are designed and built steel
to provide a cost effective and reliable Minimum width: 41/4" (108 mm)
damper for reduced volume control only Maximum width: 71/4" (184 mm)
and not for positive shut off. The are not
intended for automatic operation. Bearings: Bronze Oilite or Nylon. Press-fit
The CCD-GV5-3V-MBD damper's rigid into frame.
frame and integrally braced corners Axles: Square, plated steel.
provide true damper alignment that Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
greatly resists being installed out of are 12ga. galvanized steel.
square or out of flat.
The CCD-GV5-3V-MBD is available in Finish: Mill galvanized.
single, parallel, or opposed blade models. Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" long x 1/2
(Single blade up to 11" (279 mm) in height). dia. (152 mm x 13 mm) plated steel coupled
Available with locking quadrants. to square axle.
Sizes:
Minimum Size: 5"w x 4"h (127 mm x 102
mm)
Maximum Size: Single section - 48"w x
72"h (1219 mm x 1829 mm)
Multiple Section: Size unlimited
Notes:
Dampers are furnished approximately
1
/4" (6 mm) smaller than given duct
dimensions.
vertically.
Jul / 12
244975
Model CCD-RD-MBD
Manual Balancing Damper - Round
Model
Manual Balancing Damper - Round
CCD-RD-MBD
Diameter
Features
The CCD-RD-MBD series Manual
10
Balancing Dampers are designed and
built to provide a cost effective and reliable (254) 6
damper for reduced volume control only (152)
and not for positive shutoff. They are not Ref.
intended for automatic operation.
Available with locking quadrants.
Frame: Galvanized steel, rolled reinforce-
ment.
Diameter Gauge
4" - 9" (102 mm - 229 mm) 22 ga.
10" - 24" (254 mm - 610 mm) 20 ga.
10 (254)
Blades: Galvanized steel with welded chan-
nel reinforcement.
Bearings: Bronze Oilite.
Extended Shaft: Removable, 6" x 1/2" dia.
(152mm x 13mm), plated steel.
er
Max. Temperature: 200F et
am
Sizes: 4" to 24" diameters (102 mm to 610 Di
mm)
Notes:
Dampers are furnished approximately
1
/8" (3 mm) smaller than given duct
dimensions.
Jul / 12
244976
Accessories & Options
Face & By-Pass Mixing Damper
W B
W H
H
H
B
B
EXAMPLE: To order a right-angle face and by-pass damper of Model No. CCD-GV5-3V-LL where the
vertical damper is 48" W x 36" H (1,219 mm x 914 mm) and is to be parallel blade, and the horizontal
damper is 48" W x 40" H (1,219 mm x 1,016 mm) and is to be opposed blade:
CCD-GV5-3V-LL-FBR
W = Width = 48" (1219mm)
H = Height = 36" (914mm)
B = Bypass Dimension = 40" (1016mm)
**DAMPERS ARE FURNISHED APPROXIMATELY 1/4" SMALLER THAN GIVEN OPENING DIMENSIONS
*NOTE: W DIMENSION IS PARALLEL TO BLADE AXIS (i.e. DAMPER WIDTH).
Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our continuous improvement program, we reserve the right to make
Jul / 12
244977
Actuator and Jackshaft Dimensions
NOTE: Dampers are intended to be self-

supporting only in the largest recommended
single sections. Multiple assemblies
may require additional bracing. PRICE
recommends appropriate bracing on
multiple assemblies at over 8' (2438mm)
of width and height.
JACKSHAFTING:
STANDARD CONTRUCTION
1. Bearing support bracket. Located at either
end of assembly and at each vertical mul-
lion.
2. Lever arm attached directly to blade axle
to maximize torque transfer.
3. Either 1/2" (13 mm) diameter solid steel
rod or rod + 3/4" (19 mm) diameter steel
pipe (depending on dampersize, static
pressure, etc.)
4. Pivot arm of heavy gauge steel and at-
tached to rotation bar (No. 3) with steel
bolts.
5. Operator arm for connection to motor
operator. (Required for internal motor
mount.)
6. Ball bearings.
Manufacturers Recommendations
All moving parts of the damper must be
inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
than every six months and in accordance
with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
recommended.
Jul / 12
244978
Damper Enclosures
16
(406)
MINIMUM SLEEVE / ENCLOSURE LENGTH Standard Construction:

Sleeve: 20 ga. Galvanized Steel.
PRODUCT MINIMUM LENGTH
Enclosure: 18 ga. Galvanized Steel.
CCD-GV5-3V ......................................................................................................................10"
Transition Collars: 22 ga. Galv. Steel.
CCD-GV5-3V-LL .................................................................................................................10"
*D = DIAMETER
CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD ............................................................................................................10"
*W = WIDTH (DUCT)
NOTE: B TYPE TRANSITIONS MAY BE FURNISHED ON DAMPERS LESS THAN 8" IN HEIGHT. TRANSITION USED TO
REDUCE MINIMUM DAMPER/SLEEVE HEIGHT OF 8" TO 7", 6", 5" OR 4". (MINIMUM DUCT HEIGHT).
*H = HEIGHT (DUCT)
*L = LENGTH (SEE CHART)
DAMPER FRAME SHOWN AS DASHED
LINES
Jul / 12
244979
Damper Actuators
Both electric and pneumatic damper actua- Typical Installations:

tors are available from PRICE and may be
factory installed (see methods below) with
our CCD series control dampers. Control
dampers may be shipped with factory
installed motors provided we have the fol-
lowing information: 1. damper/duct size;
2. maximum velocity; 3. maximum static
pressure; 4. application (shut-off, balanc-
ing, or modulating damper); 5. location of
operator (internal or external); 6. pneumatic
or electric system.
Suggested Specification Dampers may be furnished with-out actua- Dampers may be furnished with factory
Manufacturers Recommendations tors but with an extended shaft for on site installed mounting plate (insert type: desig-
All moving parts of the damper must be attachment to motor. nation IT) either with actuators or extended
inspected and cycled at intervals not greater shaft for on site attachment. Actuators
than every six months and in accordance mounted out of airstream.
recommended.
Dampers may be furnished with actuators Dampers may be furnished with factory in-
mounted inside duct with factory installed stalled sleeves and with actuators mounted
internal motor mount. outside or inside air stream. Minimum sleeve
depth 14" (356mm).
Jul / 12
244980
Control And Balancing Dampers
Suggested Specifications
CCD-AE4-4X CCD-GV5-3V CCD-RD

Commercial Control Damper Commercial Control Damper Steel Commercial Control Damper Steel
Aluminum Control dampers shall be Model: CCD-GV5- Round Steel Control Dampers shall be
Low leakage Control dampers shall be 3V by PRICE. Damper frames shall be of Model: CCD-RD by PRICE. Damper frame
Model: CCD-AE4-4X by PRICE. Damper the steel, roll-formed hat-section type with shall be galvanized steel with rolled
blades shall be of aluminum streamline integrally braced corners to reduce racking. reinforcement. Damper blade shall be
(airfoil) construction for minimum Damper blades shall be roll-formed 16-18 ga. galvanized steel complete with welded
pressure drop. Both blade edge and jamb galavanized steel for rigidity. Bronze oilite channel reinforcement.
seals shall be of the pressure sensitive type or Nylon bearings shall be press-fit into CCD-RD-LL
for low leakage. Dampers shall be rated frame to minimize wear. Linkage shall be of
for leakage and pressure drop to AMCA the concealed type to maximize free area. Commercial Control Damper Steel
Standard 500-D. Leakage through a 48" x Axles shall be square to prevent twisting. Round Low Leakage Control Dampers shall
48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) damper shall not CCD-GV5-3V-LL be Model: CCD-RD-LL by PRICE. Damper
exceed 3.7 cfm/sq. ft at 4.0" static pressure. frame shall be galvanized steel with rolled
Commercial Control Damper Steel reinforcement. Damper blade shall be
CCD-AE5-4X
Low Leakage Control dampers shall be galvanized steel complete with welded
Commercial Control Damper Model: CCD-GV5-3V-LL by PRICE. Damper channel reinforcement. Blade edge seals
Aluminum frames shall be of the steel, roll-formed shall be of the pressure sensitive type for low
Low leakage Control dampers shall be hat-section type with integrally braced leakage. Dampers shall be tested for leakage
Model: CCD-AE5-4X by PRICE. Damper corners to reduce racking. Damper blades to AMCA 500-D. Leakage shall not exceed
blades shall be of aluminum streamline shall be roll-formed 16-18 ga. galvanized 1.5 cfm/sq. ft. at 2.5 inches static pressure.
(airfoil) construction for minimum steel for rigidity. CCD-GV5-3V-MBD
pressure drop. Both blade edge and jamb Bronze oilite or Nylon bearings shall be
seals shall be of the pressure sensitive type Manual Balancing Dampers
press-fit into frame to minimize wear.
for low leakage. Dampers shall be rated Linkage shall be of the concealed type to Manual Balancing Dampers shall be Model:
for leakage and pressure drop to AMCA maximize free area. Axles shall be square CCD-GV5-3V-MBD by PRICE. Damper frames
Standard 500-D. Leakage through a 48" x to prevent twisting. Both blade and jamb shall be of the steel, roll-formed hat section
48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) damper shall not seals shall be of the pressure sensitive type type with integrally braced corners to reduce
exceed 3.7 cfm/sq. ft at 4.0" static pressure. for low leakage. Dampers shall be rated for racking. Damper blades shall be roll-formed
CCD-AE5-6X leakage per AMCA 500-D. Leakage shall not 16-18 ga. galvanized steel for rigidity. Bronze
exceed 5 cfm/ sq. ft. at 2.5" S.P. oilite or Nylon bearings shall be press-fit into
Commercial Control Damper frame to minimize wear. Linkage shall be of
Aluminum CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD the concealed type to maximize free area.
Low leakage Control dampers shall be Commercial Control Damper Steel Axles shall be square to prevent twisting.
Model: CCD-AE5-6X by PRICE. Damper Heavy Duty Control dampers shall be Model: CCD-RD-MBD
blades shall be of aluminum streamline CCD-GV5-3V-LLHD by PRICE. Damper
(airfoil) construction for minimum Round Manual Balancing Dampers
frames shall be two-part galvanized steel
pressure drop. Both blade edge and jamb box construction with equivalent strength of Round Manual Balancing Dampers shall
seals shall be of the pressure sensitive type 12 ga. steel. Blades shall be two-part 16 ga. be Model: CCD-RD-MBD by PRICE. Damper
for low leakage. Dampers shall be rated galvanized steel with equivalent strength of frame shall be galvanized steel complete
for leakage and pressure drop to AMCA 10 ga. steel. Both blade edge and jamb seals with rolled reinforcement. Damper blade
Standard 500-D. Leakage through a 48" x shall be of the pressure sensitive type for low shall be galvanized steel complete with
48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) damper shall not leakage. Dampers shall be rated for leakage welded channel reinforcement.
exceed 2 cfm/sq. ft. at 4.0" static pressure. per AMCA 500-D. Leakage shall not exceed CCD-GV5-AF
CCD-AE5I-IB 7.0 cfm/ sq ft. at 4.0" w.g. static pressure. Commercial Control Damper Steel
Commercial Control Damper CCD-GV5-IB Low leakage Control dampers shall be Model:
Aluminum Commercial Control Damper Steel CCD-GV5-AF by PRICE. Damper blades shall
Low leakage insulated Control dampers shall Low Leakage Control dampers shall be be of galvanized steel streamlined (airfoil)
be Model: CCD-AE5I-IB by PRICE. Damper Model: CCD-GV5-IB by PRICE. Damper construction for minimum pressure drop.
blades shall be of aluminum streamline blades shall be of aluminum streamline Both blade edge and jamb seals shall be of
(airfoil) construction for minimum (airfoil) construction for minimum the pressure sensitive type for low leakage.
pressure drop. Both blade edge and jamb pressure drop. Blades shall be insulated with Dampers shall be rated for leakage and
seals shall be of the pressure sensitive type fiberglass. Both blade edge and jambseals pressure drop to AMCA Standard 500-D.
for low leakage. Dampers shall be rated shall be of the pressure sensitive type for low Leakage shall not exceed 6.5 cfm/sq. ft at
for leakage and pressure drop to AMCA leakage. Dampers shall be rated for leakage 4.0" static pressure.
Standard 500-D. Leakage through a 48" x and pressure drop to AMCA Standard 500-
48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) damper shall not D. Leakage shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at
exceed 2 cfm/sq. ft. at 4.0" static pressure. 4.0" static pressure.
Dampers shall be shall have lightweight
non absorbing insulation in each blade and
around the perimeter of frame.
Index Date: February 2014
Submittal Sheets
Fire Damper Static
Fire Damper Static

FD-A A Style (blades in airstream) 244981 Jul / 06
FD-A-SL A Style (blades in airstream) Slim Line Frame 244982 Jul / 06
FD-A-S (sleeve) A Style (blades in airstream) c/w sleeve 244984 Jul / 06
FD-VAG Vertical Grille Application 244985 Jul / 06
FD-HAG Horizontal Grille Application 244986 Jul / 06
FD-OW Outside Wall / Partition Application 244987 Jul / 06
FD-B B Style (blades out of airstream) 244988 (2 sheets) May / 08
FD-B-SL B Style (blades out of airstream) Slim Line Frame 244989 (2 sheets) May / 08
FD-B-S (sleeve) B Style (blades out of airstream) c/w sleeve 244990 (2 sheets) May / 08
FD-C C Style (round transition) 244991 (2 sheets) Feb / 14
FD-C-S (sleeve) C Style (round transition) c/w sleeve 244992 (2 sheets) Feb / 14
FD-C-MH C Style (round transition) Medium to High Pressure 244993 Feb / 14
FD-C-HP C Style (round transition) High Pressure 244994 Feb / 14
FD-GC Garbage Chute Application 244995 Jul / 06
FD-RD True Round Damper 244996 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FD-MB-3V Multi Blade, 3V Blade 244997 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FD-MB-AF Multi Blade, Airfoil Blade 244998 (2 sheets) Oct / 12
FD-MS Fire Damper c/w Micro Switch 245000 Jul / 06
VCS4 Static Fire & Balancing Damper w/ screwdriver operator 209023 Jul / 12
Fire Damper Static Installation and Accessories

Fire Damper Installation Instructions (Static and Dynamic) 245001 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Round Fire Damper Installation Instructions (Static and Dynamic) 245002 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Out of Wall Partitions for Fire Dampers (Static and Dynamic)
and Fire Smoke Dampers Installation Instructions 245003 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Support Mullions for Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers
Fabrication and Installation Instructions 245004 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Optional sealing of Dampers in Fire & Smoke Rated Walls
or Floor Openings Installation Instructions 245005 Jul / 06
Fire Damper Sizing Chart 245006 (3 sheets) Feb / 14
Fire Damper Engineering & Performance Data 245007 (3 sheets) Oct / 12
Frame Retaining Angles 245008 Jul / 06
VCS4 Fire Damper Installation Details 222073 May / 93
Fire Damper Static Suggested Specifications Oct / 12
Model FD-A
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-A
Frame: Roll Formed Galvanized Steel with
Safety Edge.
Blades: Roll Formed Galvanized Steel,
Curtain-Type
Springs: Stainless Steel.
Fusible Link: U.L. Listed 165F.
11/2 Hr. Vertical
Min. Size: 4"w x 4"h (102 mm x 102 mm)
Single Section Max:
60"w x 60"h (1524 mm x 1524 mm)
Max. Size:
120"w x 120"h (3048 mm x 3048 mm)
11/2 Hr. Horizontal
Single Section Max:
40"w x 40"h (1016 mm x 1016 mm)
or 48"w x 48"h (1219 mm x 1219 mm)
Max. Size:
120"w x 40"h (3048 mm x 1016 mm)
or 96"w x 48"h (2438 mm x 1219 mm)
3 Hr. Vertical
Single Section Max: 40"w x 40"h (1016
mm x 1016 mm)
Max. Size:
80"w x 40"h (2032 mm x 1016 mm)
3 Hr. Horizontal
Single Section Max:
40"w x 40"h (1016 mm x 1016 mm)
Max. Size:
80"w x 40"h (2032 mm x 1016 mm) Manufacturers Recommendations
Optional Construction: inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
For factory supplied sleeve see submit- than every six months and in accordance
tal for FD-A c/w sleeve. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
3 Hour Rating local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Fuse Link 212F In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct recommended.
dimensions. Specifications are correct at time of printing.
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems However, as part of our continuous improve-
Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event ment program, we reserve the right to make
of a Fire. further improvements without notice.
Jul / 06
244981
Model FD-A-SL
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Slimline Frame
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-A-SL
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
11/2 Hr. Vertical
Min. Size:
4"w x 4"h (102mm x 102mm)
Single Section Max:
60"w x 60"h (1524mm x 1524mm)
Max. Size:
120"w x 120"h (3048mm x 3048mm)
11/2 Hr. Horizontal
Min. Size:
4"w x 4"h (102mm x 102mm)
Single Section Max:
48"w x 48"h (1219mm x 1219mm)
Max. Size:
96"w x 48"h (2438mm x 1219mm)
3 Hr. Vertical
Min. Size:
4"w x 4"h (102mm x 102mm)
Single Section Max:
40"w x 40"h (1016mm x 1016mm)
Max. Size:
80"w x 40"h (2032mm x 1016mm)
3 Hr. Horizontal
Min. Size:
4"w x 4"h (102mm x 102mm) Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- Specifications are correct at time of printing.
Single Section Max: mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct However, as part of our continuous improve-
40"w x 40"h (1016mm x 1016mm) dimensions. ment program, we reserve the right to make
Max. Size: UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems further improvements without notice.
80"w x 40"h (2032mm x 1016mm) Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event
Optional Construction: of a Fire.
Factory Supplied Sleeve Manufacturers Recommendations
20 Gauge All moving parts of the damper must be
18 Gauge inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
16 Gauge than every six months and in accordance
14 Gauge with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
10 Gauge local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Sleeve Length (Required) In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
3 Hour Rating inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Fuse Link 212F recommended.
Jul / 06
244982
Model FD-A-S c/w Sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Static Fire Damper c/w Sleeve, Horizontal and Vertical
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-A-S c/w Sleeve
Frame: Roll Formed Galvanized Steel.
Curtain-Type
11/2 Hr. Vertical
Min. Size: 4"w x 4"h (102mm x 102mm)
Single Section Max:
60"w x 60"h (1524mm x 1524mm)
Max. Size:
120"w x 120"h (3048mm x 3048mm)
11/2 Hr. Horizontal
Single Section Max:
40"w x 40"h (1016 mm x 1016 mm)
or 48"w x 48"h (1219 mm x 1219 mm)
Max. Size:
120"w x 40"h (3048 mm x 1016 mm)
or 96"w x 48"h (2438 mm x 1219 mm)
3 Hr. Vertical
Single Section Max:
40"w x 40"h (1016mm x 1016mm)
Max. Size:
80"w x 40"h (2032mm x 1016mm)
3 Hr. Horizontal
Single Section Max:
40"w x 40"h (1016mm x 1016mm)
Max. Size:
80"w x 40"h (2032mm x 1016mm)
Optional Construction:
Sleeve Gauge Manufacturers Recommendations
18 Gauge All moving parts of the damper must
16 Gauge be inspected and cycled at intervals not
14 Gauge greater than every six months and in ac-
10 Gauge cordance with the latest edition of NFPA
Sleeve Length (Required) 90A, 92A, local codes and the actuator
Fuse Link 212F manufacturer. In addition, fuse links shall
3
/4" (19) Flange (Sidewall Termination) be removed and inspected for corrosion.
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- Dry lubricants are recommended.
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct Specifications are correct at time of print-
dimensions. ing. However, as part of our continuous
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems improvement program, we reserve the
Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event right to make further improvements
of a Fire. without notice.
Jul / 06
244984
Model FD-VAG
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Grille Application
Static Fire Damper, Vertical
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-VAG
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Factory Sleeve: 12 (305mm)- 20 Ga.
Flange: 3/4 (19mm)
Max. Size: 36"w x 48h (914mm x 1219mm)
Mounting: Vertical
Gauge Sleeve
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
Sleeve Length (Required)
Damper Setback
3 Hour Rating
Round Transition (FD-VAGR)
Fuse Link 212F
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi-
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct
dimensions.
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems
Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event
of a Fire.
recommended.
Jul / 06
244985
Model FD-HAG
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Grille Application
Static Fire Damper, Horizontal
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-HAG
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Factory Sleeve: 12 (305mm) - 20 Ga.
Flange: 3/4 (19mm)
Min. Size: 4w x 4h (102 mm x 102mm)
Max. Size: 36w x 48h (914 mm x 1219 mm)
Mounting: Horizontal
Gauge Supplied Sleeve
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
Damper Setback
3 Hour Rating
Round Transition (FD-HAGR)
Fuse Link 212F
mately 1/4 (6mm) smaller than given duct
dimensions.
of a Fire.
recommended.
Jul / 06
244986
Model FD-OW
11/2 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Outside Wall Application/Partition Application
Model Typical 3 sides for vertical

Static Fire Damper FD-OW mount (shown) and typical
4 sides when mounted
Features: horizontal.
The FD-OW fire damper has been de-
signed and tested to exceed all UL, ULC,
and NFPA requirements.
They are intended for use in static design
systems where the grille and damper as-
sembly do not allow for the damper to be
mounted in the plane of the fire barrier.
The damper assembly can be installed
from one side of the wall and does not
require retaining angles.
UL 555 and ULC S112 listed and labeled as
a 11/2 hour vertical/horizontal fire damper.
The Fire damper, insulation, and sleeve
must be ordered from the factory as an
assembly. Typical 3 sides for vertical
mount (shown) and typical
Standard Construction: 4 sides when mounted
Frame: Roll Formed Galvanized Steel with horizontal.
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Sleeve: 20 Ga. Galvanized wrapped in
thermal blanket.
Heat Responsive Devices:
Fusible Links, 165F Std., 212F available.
Mounting: Vertical.
Finish: Mill galvanized Standard.
Sizes:
Minimum size:
6"w x 6"h (152mm x 152mm) Typical 3 sides for vertical
mount (shown) and typical
4 sides when mounted
Maximum size: horizontal.
42"w x 48"h (1067mm x 1219mm)
mately actual size of given duct dimen-
sions, (not including thermal blanket).
Wall opening must be over-sized by
3
/8" (10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket
thickness.
of a Fire.
Optional: Manufacturers Recommendations
Factory Supplied Sleeve All moving parts of the damper must be inspected and cycled at intervals not greater than
18 Gauge 16 Gauge every six months and in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local codes
14 Gauge 10 Gauge and the actuator manufacturer. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and inspected for
Sleeve Lengths corrosion. Dry lubricants are recommended.
Transitions on open (Non Grille) end Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our continuous im-
provement program, we reserve the right to make further improvements without notice.
Jul / 06
244987
Model FD-B
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-B
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
11/2 Hr. Vertical:
Min. Size:
4"w x 3"h (102mm x 76mm)
Single Section Max:
60"w x 55"h (1524 mm x 1397 mm)
Max. Size:
120"w x 115"h (3048mm x 2921mm)
11/2 Hr. Horizontal:
Min. Size:
4"w x 3"h (102mm x 76mm)
Single Section Max:
40"w x 36"h (1016 mm x 914 mm)
or 48"w x 42"h (1219 mm x 1067 mm)
Max. Size:
120"w x 36"h (3048 mm x 914 mm)
or 96"w x 42"h (2438 mm x 1067 mm)
3 Hr. Vertical:
Min. Size:
4"w x 3"h (102mm x 76mm)
Single Section Max.:
40"w x 36"h (1016 mm x 914 mm)
Max. Size:
80"w x 36"h (2032 mm x 914 mm)
3 Hr. Horizontal:
Min. Size:
4"w x 3"h (102mm x 76mm)
Single Section Max.:
40"w x 36"h (1016mm x 914mm)
Max. Size:
80"w x 36"h (2032mm x 914mm)
For factory supplied sleeve see submit-
tal for FD-B c/w sleeve.
3 Hour Rating
Fuse Link 212F Manufacturers Recommendations
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- All moving parts of the damper must be inspected and cycled at intervals not greater than
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct every six months and in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local codes
dimensions. and the actuator manufacturer. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and inspected for
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems corrosion. Dry lubricants are recommended.
Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our continuous im-
of a Fire. provement program, we reserve the right to make further improvements without notice.
May / 08
244988
All Metric dimensions ( ) are soft conversion.

Copyright
Copyright E.H.
E.H. Price
Price Limited
Limited 2008.
2012.
May / 08 244988 SHEET 1 OF 2 Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model FD-B
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
W = Width (Duct)
H = Height (Duct)
X=H+B
B = Blade Stack
(see chart)
For dampers one section high:

Duct Height (H) B
up to 20" (508) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32" (813) 3" (76)
33" (838) to 42 (1067) 4" (102)
43" (1092) to 55" (1397) 5" (127)
For VERTICAL dampers two sections

high:
Duct Height (H) B
up to 64" (1626) 3" (76)
65" (1651) to 84" (2134) 4" (102)
85" (2134) to 115 (2921) 5" (127)
Note: See maximum section size for

relevant hourly rating and mounting
position to determine which chart to
use.
Model FD-B-SL
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style Slimline Frame
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-B-SL
Curtain-Type
11/2 Hr. Vertical:
Min. Size: 4"w X 3h (102mm x 76mm)
Single Section Max: 60"w x 55"h (1524mm
x 1397mm)
Max. Size: 120"w X 115"h (3048mm x
2921mm)
Min. Size: 4"w X 3"h (102mm x 76mm)
Single Section Size: 40"w x 36"h (1016
mm x 914 mm)
Max. Size: 120"w X 36"h (3048mm x
914mm)
3 Hr. Vertical:
Single Section Size: 40"w x 36"h (1016mm
x 914mm)
Max. Size: 80"w X 36"h (2032mm x 914mm)
3 Hr. Horizontal:
x 914mm)
Options:
Factory Supplied Sleeve
20 Gauge
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
10 Gauge
3 Hour Rating
Fuse Link 212F Manufacturers Recommendations Specifications are correct at time of printing.
All moving parts of the damper must be However, as part of our continuous improve-
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- inspected and cycled at intervals not greater ment program, we reserve the right to make
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct than every six months and in accordance further improvements without notice.
dimensions. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Dynamic and local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Static Systems Where The Fan Shuts Down In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
in the Event of a Fire. inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
recommended.
May / 08
244989
Model FD-B-SL
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Slimline Frame
W = Width (Duct)
H = Height (Duct)
X=H+B
B = Blade Stack
(see chart)

Duct Height (H) B
up to 20" (508) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32" (813) 3" (76)
33" (838) to 42 (1067) 4" (102)
43" (1092) to 55" (1397) 5" (127)

high:
Duct Height (H) B
up to 64" (1626) 3" (76)
65" (1651) to 84" (2134) 4" (102)
85" (2134) to 115 (2921) 5" (127)

use.
Model FD-B-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
Static Fire Damper c/w sleeve, Horizontal and Vertical
Model Notes: Dampers are fur-

Static Fire Damper FD-B-S c/w sleeve nished approximately 1/ 4"
(6mm) smaller than given
Standard Construction: duct dimensions.
Frame: Roll Formed
UL/ULC Approved For Use
Galvanized Steel. in Static Systems Where The
Blades: Roll Formed Galvanized Steel, Fan Shuts Down in the Event
Curtain-Type of a Fire.
Springs: Stainless Steel. Manufacturers
Recommendations
All moving parts of the damp-
11/2 Hr. Vertical: er must be inspected and
Min. Size: 4"w x 3"h (102mm x 76mm) cycled at intervals not greater
Single Section Max: 60"w x 55"h (1524 than every six months and in
mm x 1397 mm) accordance with the latest
Max. Size: 120"w x 115"h (3048mm x edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
2921mm) local codes and the actuator
11/2 Hr. Horizontal: manufacturer. In addition,
Min. Size: 4"w x 3"h (102mm x 76mm) fuse links shall be removed
Single Section Max: 40"w x 36"h (1016mm and inspected for corrosion.
x 914 mm) or 48"w x 42"h (1219mm x Dry lubricants are recom-
1067mm) mended.
Max. Size: 120"w x 36"h (3048mm x 914mm) Specifications are correct at
or 96"w x 42"h (2438mm x 1067mm) time of printing. However,
3 Hr. Vertical: as part of our continuous
Min. Size: 4"w x 3"h (102mm x 76mm) improvement program, we
Single Section Max.: reserve the right to make
40"w x 36"h (1016 mm x 914 mm) further improvements with-
Max. Size: 80"w x 36"h (2032 mm x 914 mm) out notice.
3 Hr. Horizontal:
Single Section Max.: 40"w x 36"h (1016mm
x 914mm)
Max. Size: 80"w x 36"h (2032mm x 914mm)
Sleeve Gauge
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
10 Gauge
3 Hour Rating
Fuse Link 212F
May / 08
244990
Model FD-B-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Static Fire Damper c/w sleeve, Horizontal and Vertical
W = Width (Duct)
H = Height (Duct)
X=H+B
B = Blade Stack
(see chart)

Duct Height (H) B
up to 20" (508) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32" (813) 3" (76)
33" (838) to 42 (1067) 4" (102)
43" (1092) to 55" (1397) 5" (127)

high:
Duct Height (H) B
up to 64" (1626) 3" (76)
65" (1651) to 84" (2134) 4" (102)
85" (2134) to 115 (2921) 5" (127)

use.
Model FD-C
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-C
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
11/2 Hr. Vertical:
Min. Size: 3"w x 3"h (76mm x 76mm) or
4" (102) round
Damper Overall

x 1372mm)
Duct Size
Max. Size: 119"w x 114"h (3023mm x

2896mm)
4" (102) round
Single Section Size: 39"w x 35"h (991mm x
889mm) or 47"w x 42"h (1194mm x 1067mm)
or 95"w x 42"h (2413mm x 1067mm)
3 Hr. Vertical:
4" (102) round
Single Section Max.: 39"w x 35"h (991mm Models:
x 889mm) FD-RC - round inlet
Max. Size: 79"w x 35"h (2007mm x 889mm) FD-SRC - square/rectangular inlet
3 Hr. Horizontal: FD-OVC - oval inlet
Min. Size: 3"w x 3"h (76mm x 76mm) or Manufacturers Recommendations
4" (102) round All moving parts of the damper must be
Single Section Max.: 39"w x 35"h (991mm inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
x 889mm) than every six months and in accordance
Max. Size: 79"w x 35"h (2007mm x 889mm) with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Optional Construction: local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Factory Supplied Sleeve see submittal for In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
FD-C c/w sleeve. inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
3 Hour Rating recommended.
Fuse Link 212F Specifications are correct at time of printing.
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- However, as part of our continuous improve-
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct ment program, we reserve the right to make
dimensions. further improvements without notice.
of a Fire.
Feb / 14
244991
Feb / 14 244991 SHEET 1 OF 2 REV.A Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model FD-C
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
Model FD-C-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style

Model
Static Fire Damper FD-C-S c/w sleeve
Curtain-Type
Damper Overall
11/2 Hr. Vertical:
Duct Size
4" (102) round
x 1372mm)
Max. Size: 119"w x 114"h (3023mm x
2896mm)
4" (102) round
x 889mm) or 47 x 42 (1174mm x 1067mm)
or 95 x 42 (2413mm x 1067mm)
3 Hr. Vertical:
4" (102) round
Single Section Max.: 39"w x 35"h (991mm Damper Overall
x 889mm)
3 Hr. Horizontal:
4" (102) round
x 889mm)
Sleeve Gauge
18 ga.
16 ga.
14 ga.
10 ga.
3 Hour Rating
Fuse Link 212F
Models: Manufacturers Recommendations
FD-RC - round inlet All moving parts of the damper must be
FD-SRC - square/rectangular inlet inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
FD-OVC - oval inlet than every six months and in accordance
recommended.
Feb / 14
244992
Model FD-C-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
Model FD-C-MH
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
Medium to High Pressure
(non-welded, up to 10" static pressure systems)
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-C-MH
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
11/2 Hr. Vertical:
Damper Overall
Duct Size
4" (102) round

x 1372mm)
Max. Size: 119"w x 114"h (3023mm x
2896mm)
4" (102) round
889mm) or 47"w x 42"h (1194mm x 1067mm)
or 95"w x 42"h (2413mm x 1067mm)
3 Hr. Vertical:
4" (102) round
Single Section Max.: 39"w x 35"h (991mm Models:
x 889mm)
FD-RC-MH - round inlet
FD-SRC-MH - square/rectangular inlet
3 Hr. Horizontal:
FD-OVC-MH - oval inlet
4" (102) round
x 889mm)
Options:
Available with round, oval or square/
rectangular transitions; with or without
collars. Round and oval transitions nor-
mally supplied with collars as standard
construction. Square/rectangular collars
supplied upon request.
Other fusible links 212F
11/2hr. rating standard, 3hr. optional.
Sleeve lengths - 12" (305), 14" (356) or 16" Manufacturers Recommendations inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
(406). All moving parts of the damper must be recommended.
Dampers are rated for duct pressure static inspected and cycled at intervals not greater Specifications are correct at time of printing.
leakage. Leakage through damper is not than every six months and in accordance However, as part of our continuous improve-
rated. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, ment program, we reserve the right to make
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems local codes and the actuator manufacturer. further improvements without notice.
Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
of a Fire.
Feb / 14
244993
Model FD-C-HP
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
High Pressure
(welded, over 10" static pressure systems)
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-C-HP
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
11/2 Hr. Vertical:
Min. Size: 3"w x 3"h (76mm x 76mm) or 4"
(102) round
Damper Overall
x 1372mm)
Duct Size

(102) round
889mm) or 47"w x 42"h (1194mm x 1067mm)
or 95"w x 42"h (2413mm x 1067mm)
3 Hr. Vertical:
(102) round
x 889mm)
3 Hr. Horizontal:
(102) round
x 889mm)
Options:
Available with round, oval or square/rect-
angular transitions; with or without collars.
Round and oval transitions normally sup-
plied with collars as standard construction.
Square/rectangular collars supplied upon
request.
Other fusible links 212F.
11/2 hr. rating standard, 3 hr. optional.
Sleeve lengths - 12" (305), 14" (356) or 16"
(406).
Dampers are rated for duct pressure static
leakage. Leakage through damper is not rated.
Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event of
a Fire.
than every six months and in accordance with
the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local codes
and the actuator manufacturer. In addition, Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our continuous improvement program, we reserve
fuse links shall be removed and inspected for the right to make further improvements without notice.
corrosion. Dry lubricants are recommended.
Feb / 14
244994
Model FD-GC
Garbage Chute Application
Garbage Chute Static Fire Damper, Horizontal
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-GC
OPTIONS:
of a Fire.
NOTE:
This is a specially designed, spring loaded
horizontal fire damper complete with over-
sized housing & round collar for garbage
chute applications. The damper has 100%
free area.
recommended.
notice.
Jul / 06
244995
Jul / 06 244995 SHEET 1 OF 1 Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model FD-RD
11/2 Hour Rated
True Round
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-RD
Features
Model FD-RD is listed for use in Static
type systems where the fan shuts down
in the event of an alarm.
Model FD-RD has been designed and
tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C., and NFPA
requirements for fire dampers. They are
UL 555 and ULC S112 listed and labeled
as an 11/2 hour fire damper.
UL and ULC listed for vertical and hori-
zontal mountings.
The jackshaft permits operation by any
standard locking quadrant, electric or
pneumatic actuator.
Frame: Roll-formed 20 gauge galvanized
steel, 16 (406mm) long, integral sleeve.
Blades: Double thickness galvanized steel,
14 ga. equivalent with welded channel re-
inforcement.
Bearings: Bronze Oilite press-fit into frame.
Axles: 3/8 (10mm) square plated steel.
Jackshaft: 1/2 (13mm) diameter plated
steel.
Linkage: Jackshaft to blade.
Fusible Link: 165F standard, 212F avail-
able.
Spring: Stainless steel.
Sizes: 8 - 24 (203mm - 610mm) dia.
Retaining Plates: 2-20 ga. galvanized steel
complete with angle clips.
Options: All moving parts of the damper must be
Sleeve Length inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
20" (508mm) than every six months and in accordance
24" (610mm) with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Note: Retaining Plate on operator side of local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
damper is installed at the factory. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Dampers are furnished approximately inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
1
/8 (3mm) smaller than given duct dimen- recommended.
sions. Specifications are correct at time of printing.
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems However, as part of our continuous
Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event improvement program, we reserve the
of a Fire. right to make further improvements without
notice.
Jul / 06
244996
Model FD-RD
11/2 Hour Rated
True Round
Model FD-MB-3V
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Multi-Blade Fire Damper
3V Blade Style
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-MB-3V
Features
The FD-MB-3V Series Static Fire Dampers
have been designed and tested to exceed
all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements
for fire dampers.
The FD-MB-3V dampers rigid frame and
integrally braced corners provide true
damper alignment that generally resists
being installed out of square or out of flat.
This insures onsite performance equal to
test results.
Multi Section units can be ordered with
a fusible link and locking hand quadrant.
Also available are options EFL (Electric
Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
Valve). These options provide quick
and economical ways to check damper
operations and also provide a Systematic
Closure Control. Option PFV allows
damper operation without the need/cost
for an EP valve and electrical connection
at the damper.
Frame: 5 Roll Formed Galvanized Steel
hat-section with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Blades: 16 ga. Roll Formed Galvanized Steel.
Minimum width: 41/4 (108mm)
Maximum width: 71/4 (184mm) 3 Hr.Vertical/Horizontal Max: 72w X of a Fire.
Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame 96h (1829mm x 2438mm) Specifications are correct at time of printing.
Axles: Square, plated steel Optional Construction: However, as part of our continuous
Factory Supplied Sleeve improvement program, we reserve the
Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars 20 ga.
are 12ga. Galvanized steel. right to make further improvements without
18 ga. notice.
Fusible Link: U.L. Listed 165F 16 ga.
14 ga. Manufacturers Recommendations
Sizes: All moving parts of the damper must be
Minimum Size: 10 ga.
Sleeve Length (Required) inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
6w X 6h (152mm x 152mm) than every six months and in accordance
16 (406) Minimum
Maximum UL Listed Size: 3 Hour Rating withthe latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Single Section: 36w X 48h (914mm x Manual Locking Quadrant local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
1219mm) Fuse Link 212F In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Multiple Assembly inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Notes: Dampers are furnished recommended.
11/2 Hr. Vertical Max: 108w X 96h approximately 1/4 (6mm) smaller than
(2743mm x 2438mm) given duct dimensions.
11/2 Hr. Horizontal Max: 72w X 96h UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems
(1829mm x 2438mm) Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event
Jul / 06
244997
Model FD-MB-3V
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Model FD-MB-AF
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Airfoil Blade
Model 3 Hr. Vertical Max:

Static Fire Damper FD-MB-AF Multiple Assembly-72w x 48h
(1829mm x 1219mm)
Features
The FD-MB-AF series Static Fire Damp- 3 Hr. Horizontal Max:
ers have been designed and tested to Multiple Assembly-36w x 48h
provide a complete range of performance (914 mm x 1219 mm)
features. Optional Construction:
Multi-Section units can be ordered with a Factory Supplied Sleeve
fusible link and locking hand quadrants. 20 ga.
Also available are options EFL (Electric 18 ga.
Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fus- 16 ga.
ible Valve). These options provide quick 14 ga.
and economical ways to check damper 10 ga.
operations and also provide a System- Sleeve Length (Required)
atic Closure Control. Option PFV allows 16 Minimum
damper operation without the need/cost 3 Hour Rating
for an E-P valve and electrical connection Manual Locking Quadrant
at the damper. These options require an Fuse Link 212F
actuator to be ordered with the damper. Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi-
Standard Construction: mately 1/4 (6mm) smaller than given duct
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat- dimensions.
section with staked corners with integral UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static Systems
bracing. Where The Fan Shuts Down in the Event
Blades: Airfoil-shaped, double skin gal- of a Fire.
vanized steel of roll-formed construction. Specifications are correct at time of printing.
Mechanically joined to form construction However, as part of our continuous im-
equivalent to 14 ga. steel. provement program, we reserve the right to
Minimum width 5" (127mm) make further improvements without notice.
Maximum width 7" (178mm) Manufacturers Recommendations
Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame. inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Axles: Square, plated steel. than every six months and in accordance
Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars withthe latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
are 12ga. Galvanized steel. local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Fusible Link: UL Listed 165F. inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Spring: Stainless steel. recommended.
Sizes:
Minimum Size:
8"w x 8"h
(203mm x 203mm)
Maximum UL/ULC Listed Size:
Single Section: 36"w x 48"h
(914 mm x 1219mm)
11/2 Hr. Vertical Max:
Multiple Assembly-108"w x 96"h
(2743mm x 2438mm)
11/2 Hr. Horizontal Max:
Multiple Assembly-36w x 48h
(914mm x 1219mm)
Oct / 12
244998
Oct / 12 244998 SHEET 1 OF 2 REV.A Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model FD-MB-AF
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Airfoil Blade
Model FD-MS
Vertical and Horizontal
(for status control or fan shut off)
Fire Damper c/w Micro Switch
Model
Static Fire Damper FD-MS
Features:
Narrow 23/16" (56mm) or 11/2" (38mm) Galv. Steel
Interlocking Blades
frame
11/2 hr. rating standard. Fusible Link
(Replaceable)
3 hr. optional vertical only. 165F Standard
Max. size: 48"w x 48"h (1219mm x Galvanized Steel
1219mm) Frame
of a Fire.
Requirements vary for each job. Please
specify type of switch required. 15 amp. Vertically Mounted
single pole double throw switch shown. Unit Shown
(Type C Shown
All moving parts of the damper must be Also Available
inspected and cycled at intervals not greater As A or B)
recommended.
MICROSWITCH
MOUNTING
BRACKET
311/16"
(94 mm)
Jul / 06
245000
Fire Dampers (Static & Dynamic)
Installation Instructions
Important General Notes:

When UL is referred to in this document, it represents UL/ULC. This installation instruction applies to Fire Dampers (static,
dynamic, curtain, single and multi-blade types) mounted in the plane of an UL approved fire partition. The dampers are designed for
operation in the vertical or horizontal position with blades running horizontal. The dampers are to be installed square and free from
twisting or racking.
The dampers shall not be compressed or stretched into the opening. Transportation and installation of the dampers shall be handled
with the sleeve or frame. Do not lift the damper with the blades or actuator. Special care shall be given to the damper before instal-
lation and after to insure it is protected against dirt, weather, mortar and drywall dust, wall texture and paint. Any of these conditions
could cause the damper not to operate correctly and void the warranty. Suitable access to inside duct is to be provided for inspection
and replacement of parts such as heat response devices and actuators per NFPA 90A and local authority having jurisdiction. As with all
joints, contractor must seal duct-collar connections in the field after installation. PRICE Model numbers which are UL approved to utilize
this installation are FD, FD-SL, FD-USL, FD-MB-3V, FD-MB-AF, FD-SB, FDD, FDD-SL, FDD-MB-3V, FDD-MB-AF.
1. Opening Preparation/Clearances:
The fire barrier opening shall be larger than the damper to allow for thermal expansion and ease of installation. When steel stud/gypsum
or wood stud/gypsum partitions are being used then refer to Fig. 1-3 for additional information and details.
A. Dampers Assemblies Using 2 Angles Methods (see note 4a) shall be a minimum of 1/8"(3mm) per linear foot (305mm) of height
and width of sleeved assembly up to a maximum of 11/2(38mm) and a minimum of 1/4 (6mm). For Static Systems the maximum
single section curtain damper is 60"x60" (1524mm x 1524mm) for vertical mounting and 40" x 40" (1016mm x 1016mm) for horizontal
mountings, based on type A dampers. The maximum single section multi-blade damper is 36" x 48" (914mm x1219mm) in vertical
or horizontal mountings For Dynamic Systems the maximum single section curtain damper is 36" x 36" (914mm x 914mm) in verti-
cal mountings and 18" x 18" (457mm x 457mm) in horizontal mountings, based on type A dampers. The maximum single section
multi-blade damper is 36"x48" (914mm x 1219mm) in vertical or horizontal mountings. This method is acceptable for 11/2 and 3 hour fire
dampers. See Underwriters Laboratories Listings for maximum multiple assembly sizes.
B. Dampers Assemblies Using 1 Angle Methods (see note 4b) shall be a minimum of 1/8" (3mm) per linear foot (305mm) of height
and width of sleeved assembly up to a maximum of 11/2 (38mm) and a minimum of 1/4 (6mm). The maximum single section is the
same as in A above. The maximum multi-section is 108"w and 108"h (2743mm x 2743mm) up to 36 square feet (3.345 sq. meters). This
method is acceptable for 11/2 hour fire dampers mounted in a masonry/concrete or steel stud/ gypsum wall only.
C. Dampers Assemblies Using No Angles Methods (see note 4c) shall be a minimum of 1/4" (6mm) and a maximum of 1/2 (13mm).
The maximum single section is the same as in A above. The maximum multi-section is 42"w x 48"h (1067mm x 1219mm). This method
is acceptable for 11/2 hour fire dampers mounted in a masonry/concrete or steel stud/gypsum wall only.
2. Damper Sleeves and Breakaway Connections:
Sleeves shall be of the SAME GAUGE or heavier as the duct to which it is attached, if one of the breakaway connection is used as de-
fined in the SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Guide for HVAC Systems (Fig. 4-6) and in NFPA 90A. Gauges shall conform
to SMACNA or ASHRAE duct standards. Sleeves shall not extend beyond the fire barrier more than 6" (152mm) unless an actuator or
factory installed access door is supplied, then the sleeve may extend up to 16" (406mm). Sleeve shall terminate at both sides of wall
within dimensions shown. If a rigid connection is used, then the sleeve shall be a minimum of 16 gage for dampers up to 36" (914mm)
wide by 24" (610mm) high and 14 gage for dampers exceeding 36"(914mm) wide by 24" (610mm) high.
Round and oval breakaway connections must use either a 4" (102mm) wide draw band or #10 (M5) sheet metal screws spaced equally
around the circumference of the duct as follows: 3 screws for duct sizes 22" (559mm) and smaller; 5 screws for duct sizes greater than
22" (559mm) and up to and including 36" (914mm): 8 screws for duct sizes greater than 36" (914mm). Refer to SMACNA Fire, Smoke
and Radiation Damper Guide for HVAC Systems for information on Ductmate, Nexus, Ward, TDC and TDF systems and any additional
information (Fig. 5-6). A sleeve may not be required if the damper frame is of sufficient size and shape so the mounting angles can be
directly fastened to it.
3. Multi-Section and Damper to Sleeve Connections:
Damper shall be secured to the sleeve and to each other (when joined to make multiple damper assemblies) with #10 sheet metal
screws, 1/4(6mm) nut and bolts, 1/4(6mm) tack welds, 3/16(5mm) steel rivets, spot welds, or clinching (toggle) on 6" (152mm) centers.
Jul / 06 245001 SHEET 1 OF 4
4. Methods of Securing Damper in

Opening:
a. Two Angle (Two Sided) Method: This
method is the oldest and most commonly
used.This method is approved for use in UL
approved concrete/masonry partitions, steel
stud/gypsum walls, and wood stud/gypsum
walls. In this method 2 sets of angles are
used to secure the damper in the opening,
one on each side of the partition (See Fig. 7).
Two Angle Method is approved for 1 1/2 and 3
hour dampers, vertical or horizontal orienta-
tion, and any maximum size multi-section
UL approved damper (see Underwriters
Laboratories Listings for maximum assem-
bly sizes). Angles shall be a minimum of
1 1/2 x 1 1/2 (38mm x 38mm) x 16 gauge.
Angles are to be fastened to the sleeve on
6" (152mm) centers with #10 (M5) sheet
metal screws, 3/16" (5mm) steel pop rivets,
1
/2 (13mm) tack welds, or 1/4 (6mm) di-
ameter nut and bolts with not more than
2" (51mm) from each end with a minimum
of two connections per side/leg. The angles
are to overlap the partition a minimum of
1" (25mm). These angles may be of a unit
type construction and may or may not be
fastened to each other at the corners. When
the duct work terminates at the damper or centers and must engage the fire partition cal and horizontal (flange on top side only)
installation prohibits angles from turning out/ a minimum of 11/2 (38mm); in steel stud/ orientations, and the maximum size shall be
away from the wall, the retaining angle shall gypsum partitions secure the angles to the 42 (1067mm) wide by 48 (1219mm) high up
be reversed (leg turned into the opening) partition with #10 (M5) screws long enough to the maximum multi-section UL approved
providing the size of the opening is increased to penetrate the J-Runners and E-Stud by a damper size (see Underwriters Laboratories
by an amount equal to twice the combined minimum of 3/8 (10mm). Use a minimum Listings for maximum assembly sizes). The
thickness of the angle and the height of the of two fasteners per side. The angles are sleeve flange shall be a minimum of 3/4
screw or bolthead to maintain expansion to overlap the partition a minimum of 1 (19mm) high by 20 gauge steel. If a flange/
clearances. See note 1A for information on (25mm). These angles may be of a unit type angle is added, it shall be a minimum of
clearances. See Fig. 7 for detailed drawings construction and may or may not be fastened 1 x 1 (25mm x 25mm) by 18 gauge steel
of installations. to each other at the corners. When the duct and fastened with #10 (M5) bolts or screws,
b. One Angle (Single Sided) Method: work terminates at the damper or installa- 1
/2 (13mm) welds, or 3/16 (5mm) rivets to
In this method 1 set of angles are used tion prohibits angles from turning out/away the sleeve, at a maximum spacing of 6
to secure the damper in the opening. This from the wall, the retaining angle shall be (152mm) o.c., not more than 2 (51mm) from
method is approved for use in UL approved reversed (leg turned into the opening) pro- each end with a minimum of two fasteners
concrete/masonry partitions and steel stud/ viding the size of the opening is increased per side. The sleeve is to be fastened to
gypsum walls. Only one side of the fire parti- by an amount equal to twice the combined the fire partition with: in concrete/masonry
tion will have the angles installed (see Fig. thickness of the angle and the height of the partitions with #10 self-tapping concrete
8). One Angle Method is approved for 11/2 screw or bolt head to maintain expansion anchors or concrete screws on 6 (152mm)
hour dampers only, vertical and horizontal clearances. Angles can be placed in front of centers and must engage the fire partition
(angles on top side only) orientations, and the or behind the drywall attaching directly to a minimum of 11/2 (38mm); in steel stud/
maximum size shall be 108 (2743mm) wide the steel studs or masonry. PRICEs Frame gypsum partitions secure the angles to the
or 108 (2743mm) high up to 36 square feet Retaining Angles (FRA) can be used in place partition with #10 (M5) screws long enough
(3.345 sq. meters) and up to the maximum of the angle mentioned above. See note 1B to penetrate the J-Runners and E-Stud by a
multi-section. UL approved damper size for information on clearances. See Fig. 8 for minimum of 3/8 (10mm). Use a minimum
(see Underwriters Laboratories Listings for detailed drawings of installations. of two fasteners per side. The sleeve flange
maximum assembly sizes). Angle shall be a c. No Angle Method: In this method No can be placed in front of or behind the dry-
minimum of 11/2 x 11/2 (38mm x 38mm) by angles are used to secure the damper in the wall attaching directly to the steel studs or
16 gauge. Angles are to be fastened to the opening.This method is approved for use in masonry. Be sure to not stretch the damper
sleeve on 6 (152mm) centers with #10 (M5) UL approved concrete/masonry partitions when securing it into the partition. Stretch-
sheet metal screws, 3/16 (5mm) steel pop and steel stud/gypsum walls. This method ing the damper can cause it to bind up and
rivets, 1/2 (13mm) tack welds, or 1/4 (6mm) uses a minimum 3/4 (19mm) flange is on prevent it from operating properly. PRICEs
diameter nut and bolts with not more than one end of the sleeve. The damper/sleeve Frame Retaining Angles (FRA) can be used
2 (51mm) from each end with a minimum assembly is placed in the opening so that the in place of the angle mentioned above. See
of two connections on each side/leg top and flange rest flush up to the partition, then the note 1C for information on clearances. See
bottom.The angles are also to be fastened to fasteners are placed through the sleeve into Fig. 9 for detailed drawings of installations.
the fire partition with: in concrete/masonry the partition (see Fig. 9). No Angle Method is
partitions with #10 (M5) self-tapping concrete approved for 11/2 hour dampers only, verti-
anchors or concrete screws on 6 (152mm)
Breakaway Connections
Figure 4 - Traditional Breakaway Style

Transverse Joints
Transverse joints illustrated at right have
always been approved as breakaway
connections. SMACNA testing has also
approved the following variations as
breakaway connections.
Standing S joints can be applied with no.
10 sheetmetal screws (through joint and
duct) subject to the following limitations:
Maximum 2 screws in each side and in
bottom joint.
Transverse joints illustrated can be
applied as top and bottom joints with
Drive Slip - side joints in duct heights up
to 20 inches. (508 mm)
Round and Oval Duct Breakaway Connections

Round or flat oval ducts connected to Type R, CR or OC damper collars may use #10 sheetmetal screws as follows:
Ducts to 22" (559 mm) wide (or dia.) and smaller may use 3 screws.
Ducts larger than 22" (559 mm) wide (or dia.) and up to 36" (914 mm) dia. may use 5 screws.
Ducts larger than 36" (914 mm) wide (or dia.) may use 8 screws.
NOTE: All breakaway connections described may have duct sealant applied in accordance with SMACNA reccomendations.
Figure 5 - Manufactured Flanged

System Breakway Connections
Flanged connection systems manufactured
by Ductmate,Ward, and Nexus are approved
as breakaway connections when installed
as illustrated.
Figure 6 - Proprietary Flange System

TDC and TDF systems are approved as
breakaway connections when installed as
described in the TDC or TDF addendum to
the SMACNA Duct Construction Standards
except the corners may not be bolted.
Standard 6" (152 mm) metal clip may be
used with spacing as shown in diagram.
Jul / 06 245001 SHEET 3 OF 4
Manufacturer's Recommendations
All moving parts of the damper must be inspected and cycled at intervals not greater than every six months and in accordance with the
latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local codes and the actuator manufacturer. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and inspected for
corrosion. Dry lubricants are recommended. When UL is referred to in this document, it represents UL/ULC.
FD-RD and FDD-RD Fire Dampers
1. 20 gauge galvanized steel integral sleeve

shall be of the SAME GAUGE or heavier
as the duct to which it is attached. Gauges
shall conform to SMACNA or ASHRAE duct
standards. The length of the sleeve extend-
ing beyond the wall opening shall not exceed
16 (406 mm) on the operator side or 6 (152
mm) on the opposite side.
2. The connecting duct shall terminate at
the integral sleeve and is connected by
using either:
(a) a minimum of 3 - #10 sheet metal screws
spaced equidistant around the sleeve for
22 (559mm)and smaller duct.
(b) a minimum of 5 - #10 sheet metal screws
greater than 22 (559mm) duct.
(c) a 4 (102mm) drawband.
3. Clearance between the damper sleeve and
the round or square wall opening shall be a
minimum of 1/2 (13 mm) and a maximum
of 1 (25 mm).
4. Damper will be factory supplied with one
retaining plate secured to the damper sleeve
on the operator side of the damper.
5. A minimum of 4 equally spaced 20 gauge
galvanized steel clip angles shall be attached
to both the integral sleeve and the retaining
plate. The clip angles shall be attached with
1
/8 (3mm) rivets, #10 x 1/2 (13mm) sheet-
metal screws, bolts or welds. In metal stud/
gypsum applications, the retaining plate
may be in front of or behind the gypsum,
directly against the metal studs.
6A. Option 1: The damper may be installed
in a wood/gypsum, steel stud/gypsum, or
masonry fire partitition in the vertical or
horizontal position (blade shaft running hori-
zontal) with a retaining plate flush against
each side of the fire partition. Installation:
with the factory installed retaining plate flush
to the fire partition, place another retaining
plate on the opposite side of the damper
sleeve and slide it forward until it becomes
flush with the opposite side of the partition.
Place the Splice Clip over the cut portion
of the retaining plate. Secure it with 4 - #10
sheet metal screws or rivets. Secure the clip
angles to the retaining plate and damper
sleeve as illustrated.
Jul / 06 245002 SHEET 1 OF 2
6B. Option 2: The damper may also be

installed in a steel stud/gypsum, or masonry
wall, in a vertical position (blade running
horizontal), with a retaining plate on one
side of the wall. Installation: with the
factory installed retaining plate flush to the
fire wall, place 8 screws (#10 sheet metal for
steel studs long enough to penetrate the
metal stud by 1/2 (13mm) minimum or #10
x 11/4 (32mm) masonry screws) equidistant
around the perimeter of the retaining plate.
Screws are placed in each corner and halfway
between the corners as shown.
7. Electrical and/or pneumatic connections
to damper actuators (if applicable) should
be made in accordance with wiring and
piping diagrams developed in compliance
with applicable codes, ordinances and
regulations.
8. Refer to the installation instruction for
Drywall Type Construction for the material
and opening framing details.
recommended.
This Installation sheet has been reviewed and accepted by Underwriters Laboratories.
When UL is referred to in this document, it represents UL/ULC.
Out of Wall Partitions for
and Fire Smoke Dampers
FD-OW, FDD-OW, FSD-3V-OW, FSD-AF-OW, FSD-3V-FA, FSD-AF-FA

When UL is referred to in this document, it represents UL/ULC. This installation instruction applies to Fire Dampers and Com-
bination Fire/Smoke Dampers mounted outside the plane of an UL approved fire partition. Combination Fire /Smoke Dampers are
approved for use in Static or Dynamic Systems. The dampers are designed for operation in the vertical or horizontal position with blades
running horizontal. The dampers are to be installed square and free from twisting or racking. The dampers shall not be compressed
or stretched into the opening. Transportation and installation of the dampers shall be handled with the sleeve or frame. Do not lift the
damper with the blades or actuator. Special care shall be given to the damper before installation and after to insure it is protected
against dirt, weather, mortar and drywall dust, wall texture and paint. Any of these conditions could cause the damper not to operate
correctly and void the warranty. Suitable access to inside duct is to be provided for inspection and replacement of parts such as heat
response devices and actuators per NFPA 90A and local authority having jurisdiction. The need to seal the damper in the penetration is
not required by Underwriters Laboratories. PRICE dampers have been tested and approved to be mounted without the use of sealants
around the perimeter space between the damper and the penetration. As with all joints, contractor must seal duct-collar connections in
the field after installation. These dampers must be ordered as an assembly from the factory with the proper PRICE insulation applied to
the dampers. PRICE Model numbers which are UL approved to utilize this installation are FD-OW, FDD-OW, FSD-3V-OW-211, -212,
FSD-AF-OW-211, -212, FSD-3V-FA-211, -212, FSD-AF-FA-211, -212.
The fire barrier opening shall be larger than the damper to allow for thermal expansion and ease of installation. When a steel stud/
gypsum partition is being used then refer to Figs. 1 and 2 for additional information and details. The opening shall be a minimum of
1/4 (6mm) and a maximum of 1/2 (13mm). The maximum multi-section is 42w x 48h (1067mm x 1219mm). This method is acceptable
for 11/2 hour fire dampers mounted in a masonry/concrete or steel stud/gypsum wall only.
Sleeves shall be of the SAME GAUGE or heavier as the duct to which it is attached, if one of the breakaway connections is used as defined
in the SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Guide for HVAC Systems (Figs. 3, 4, and 5) and in NFPA 90A. Gauges shall conform
to SMACNA or ASHRAE duct standards. Sleeves shall not extend beyond the fire barrier more than 6(152mm) unless an actuator or
factory installed access door is supplied, then the sleeve may extend up to 16(406mm). Sleeve shall terminate at both sides of wall
within dimensions shown. If a rigid connection is used, then the sleeve shall be a minimum of 16 gage for dampers up to 36(914mm)
wide by 24(610mm) high and 14 gage for dampers exceeding 36(914mm) wide by 24(610mm) high. Round and oval breakaway
connections must use either a 4(102mm) wide draw band or #10 (M5) sheet metal screws spaced equally around the circumference
of the duct as follows: 3 screws for duct sizes 22(559mm) and smaller; 5 screws for duct sizes greater than 22(559mm) and up to and
including 36(914mm): 8 screws for duct sizes greater than 36(914mm). Refer to SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Guide
for HVAC Systems for information on Ductmate, Nexus, Ward, TDC and TDF systems and any additional information (Figs. 4 and 5).
A sleeve may not be required if the damper frame is of sufficient size and shape so the mounting angles can be directly fastened to it.
Jul / 06 245003 SHEET 1 OF 4
Out of wall partitions / Breakaway connections
Note: Gypsum panels screwed to all studs

and runner flanges, 12 (305mm) oc maxi-
mum surrounding opening. All fasteners are
to be UL approved per UL design.
3. Methods of Securing Damper in Opening:

a. Grille Mount Method: In this method No angles are used to secure the damper in the opening. This method is approved for
use in UL approved concrete/masonry partitions and steel stud/gypsum walls. This method uses a minimum 3/4 (19mm) flange is
on one end of the sleeve. The damper/sleeve assembly is placed in the opening so that the flange rests flush up to the partition,
then the fasteners are placed through the sleeve into the partition (see Fig. 6). No Angle Method is approved for 11/2 hour damp-
ers only, vertical and horizontal (flange on top side only) orientations, and the maximum size shall be 42 (1067mm) wide by 48
(1219mm) high up to the maximum multi-section UL approved damper size (see Underwriters Laboratories Listings for maximum
assembly sizes). The sleeve flange shall be a minimum of 3/4 (19mm) high by 20 gauge steel. If a flange/angle is added, it shall
be a minimum of 1 x 1 (25mm x 25mm) by 18 gauge steel and fastened with #10 (M5) bolts or screws, 1/2 (13mm) welds, or
3
/16 (5mm) rivets to the sleeve, at a maximum spacing of 6 (152mm) o.c., not more than 2 (51mm) from each end with a minimum of
two fasteners per side. The sleeve is to be fastened to the fire partition with: in concrete/ masonry partitions with #10 self-tapping
concrete anchors or concrete screws on 6 (152mm) centers and must engage the fire partition a minimum of 11/2 (38mm); in steel
stud/gypsum partitions secure the angles to the partition with #10 (M5) screws long enough to penetrate the J-Runners and E-Stud by
a minimum of 3/8 (10mm). Use a minimum of two fasteners per side. The sleeve flange can be placed in front of or behind the drywall
attaching directly to the steel studs or masonry. Be sure to not stretch the damper when securing it into the partition. Stretching the
damper can cause it to bind up and prevent it from operating properly. PRICEs Frame Retaining Angles (FRA) can be used in place of
the angle mentioned above. See note 1 for information on clearances. See Fig. 6 for detailed drawings of installations.
b. Continuous Duct Method: In this method 1 set of angles are used to secure the damper in the opening. This method is approved
for use in UL approved concrete/masonry partitions and steel stud/gypsum walls. Only one side of the fire partition will have the angles
installed (see Fig. 7). One Angle Method is approved for 11/2 hour dampers only, vertical and horizontal (angles on top side only) orien-
tations, and the maximum size shall be 42 wide x 48 high (1067mm x 1219mm) and up to the maximum multi-section UL approved
damper size (see Underwriters Laboratories Listings for maximum assembly sizes). Angle shall be a minimum of 11/2 x 11/2 (38mm x
38mm) by 16 gauge. Angles are to be fastened to the sleeve on 6 (152mm) centers with #10 (M5) sheet metal screws, 3/16 (5mm) steel
pop rivets, 1/2 (13mm) tack welds, or 1/4 (6mm) diameter nut and bolts with not more than 2 (51mm) from each end with a minimum
of two connections on each side/leg top and bottom. The angles are also to be fastened to the fire partition with: in concrete/masonry
partitions with #10 (M5) self-tapping concrete anchors or concrete screws on 6 (152mm) centers and must engage the fire partition
a minimum of 11/2 (38mm); in steel stud/gypsum partitions secure the angles to the partition with #10 (M5) screws long enough to
penetrate the J-Runners and E-Stud by a minimum of 3/8 (10mm). Use a minimum of two fasteners per side. The angles are to overlap
the partition a minimum of 1 (25mm). These angles may be of a unit type construction and may or may not be fastened to each other
at the corners. When the duct work terminates at the damper or installation prohibits angles from turning out away from the wall, the
retaining angle shall be reversed (leg turned into the opening) providing the size of the opening is increased by an amount equal to
twice the combined thickness of the angle and the height of the screw or bolt head to maintain expansion clearances. Angles can be
placed in front of or behind the drywall attaching directly to the steel studs or masonry. PRICEs Frame Retaining Angles (FRA) can be
used in place of the angle mentioned above. See note 1 for information on clearances. See Fig. 7 for detailed drawings of installations.
4. Actuator Connections (if applicable):
Electrical and/or pneumatic connections to damper actuators (if provided) should be made in accordance with wiring and piping diagrams
developed in compliance with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. Be sure to check actuator for proper voltage and current
draw. Tampering with the actuators installation or connecting the actuator to an improper voltage and current may void the warranty.

Transverse Joints
Transverse joints illustrated at right have al-
ways been approved as breakaway connec-
tions. SMACNA testing has also approved
the following variations as breakaway
connections.
Standing S joints can be applied with #
bottom joint.
to 20 inches. (508mm)

Round or flat oval ducts connected to Type R, CR or CO damper collars may use
(152)#10 sheetmetal
(2) screws as follows:
Ducts to 22" (559mm) wide (or dia.) and smaller may use 3 screws.
Ducts larger than 22" (559mm) wide (or dia.) and up to 36" (914mm) dia. may use 5 screws.
Ducts larger than 36" (914mm) wide (or dia.) may use 8 screws.
Figure 4 - Manufactured Flanged (152) (2)

(152) (2)
as illustrated.
(152)

Breakaway Connections (152)
TDC and TDF systems are approved as (152)
Jul / 06 245003 SHEET 3 OF 4
Fig. 6 - Grille Mount (No Angle) Method

With "-OW" or "-FA" Damper Steel/Gypsum
UL Approved
UL Approved Wall Design Gypsum
3/4" (19) Flange Wall Design Factory Installed
Thermal Insulation
(Typ. 4 Sides) Factory Supplied
Insulation
20 Ga. St. (Typ. 3 Sides)*
(Typ. 3 Sides)* Steel/Gypsum
UL Approved
Wall Design Gypsum
Factory Installed 3/4" ( 1 9 ) Flange
Metal Studs
Insulation (Typ. 4 Sides)
#10 Sheet Metal
(Typ. 3 Sides)* 20 Ga. St.
Screws, 8" oc.
Masonry Walls
Fire/Smoke #10 Sheet Metal
#10 Self-Tapping Screws, 6" (152) oc.
Concrete Anchors Or Curtain
6" (152) oc Fire Damper 3/4" ( 1 9 ) Flange
Grille (Typ. 4 Sides)
Fire/Smoke Damper
20 Ga. St. Masonry or Curtain Fire Damper
#10 Sheet Metal
Screws, 6" (152) oc. UL Approved
Masonry Wall Design
Factory Installed
tor
Insulation
tua
Fire/Smoke Damper (Typ. 3 Sides)*

or Curtain Fire Damper
Ac
Steel Sleeve 3/4" ( 1 9 ) Flange

(Typ. 4 Sides)
20 Ga. St.
6" (152) Masonry Walls
Max #10 Self-Tapping
Concrete Anchors,
6" (152) oc.
Fig. 7 - Continuous Duct (One Angle) Method Fire/Smoke Damper
Steel/Gypsum or Masonry
As Found in the UL File
Resistance Directory
Fire Wall
Retaining Factory Installed
Angle Insulation Fire Rated Partition
(Typ. 3 sides)* Typ.
Sides
3.5
5" Max.
Fasteners
Factory Installed 2"
Retaining Insulation
Angle (Typ. 3 Sides)*
Sleeve
Fire/Smoke
Damper Sleeve Fasteners
Fasteners
Sleeve
tor
ator
tua
Fire/Smoke Damper
Actu
Ac

Steel/Gypsum
Wall Retaining Angle
Min. 1" Overlap
Fasteners UL Approved
Wall Design Factory Installed
Masonry
Steel/Gypsum Wall
Wall
Sleeve Fasteners Factory Installed
UL Approved Retaining Insulation
Fasteners Wall Design Factory Installed Angle (Typ. 3 Sides)*
Damper
Sleeve
Sleeve
*Typical 3 sides when mounted vertically as shown,
or typical 4 sides when mounted horizontally.
Fire/Smoke Damper
Damper or Curtain Fire Damper
This instruction sheet has been reviewed and accepted by Underwriters Laboratories.
Support Mullions for
Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers
Fabrication and Installation Instructions
These installation instructions apply to the

fabrication and construction of generic sup-
port mullions. Support mullions are neces-
sary whenever fire dampers are installed
into an opening that is larger than the largest
UL rated size for that damper. The mullions
allow construction of a fire barrier that is
larger than the maximum available size.
The opening must not exceed 120" (3048mm)
high, but can be any width provided a verti-
cal support mullion is used a maximum of
every 120" (3048mm).
To properly use support mullions they must
be fabricated and installed according to
these instructions.
Horz. to Vert.
This generic support mullion is permitted Mullion Cap
by UL to only be used in static systems. A C-C (Typical)
static system is one in which the fan shuts
down in the event of a fire or smoke alarm.
Application
Generic steel mullions can be used to sepa-
rate vertically mounted galvanized steel fire
dampers in wall openings larger
than the UL permitted multiple damper
assembly size. Mullions can either be used
vertically, horizontally or both to split up
a vertical wall opening requiring use of a
damper having a 11/2 hour fire resistance
rating. Maximum mullion span is 120"
(3048mm) plus expansion allowance when
used either horizontally or vertically.
Sleeves are to be around each damper as-
sembly. Mullions are not intended to be in
the airstream, (i.e. exposed to flow) or to be
a part of the ductwork.
Wall Opening
Steel mullions are intended for use in a
concrete block or solid concrete wall. Hollow
concrete blocks are to be filled with concrete
(minimum 3500 psi) to permit proper mul-
lion anchoring.
Wall thickness is to be 7" (178mm) minimum,
12" (305mm) maximum.
Jul / 06 245004 SHEET 1 OF 4
36 (914) 33-3/8 (848) 3-1/2 (89
48 (1219) 47-1/4 (1200) 3-5/8 (92)
Support Mullions for 60 (1524) 59-1/8 (1502) 3-3/4 (95)
Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers 72 (1829)
84 (2134)
71 (1803)
82-7/8 (2105)
3-7/8 (98)
4 (102)
Fabrication and Installation Instructions 96 (2438) 94-3/4 (2407) 4-1/8(105)
108 (2749) 106-3/4 (2711) 4-1/4 (108)
120 (3048) 118-3/4 (3016) 4-3/8 (111)
(13)
(6)
(51) (46) (51)

Support mullion assemblies consist of three basic parts: the wall mullion cap, the
horizontal to vertical mullion cap and the mullion sections. Determine the number of
each piece required to complete the installation.
Fabrication of Wall Mullion Caps (Fig. A-A)
Wall mullion caps must be constructed from 12 ga. steel with a minimum yield strength (83)
of 42,000 psi. 12 (305) 11-1/2 (292) 3-1/4 (83)
1. Fabricate the formed section as shown below. 24 (610) 23-1/2 (597) 3-3/8 (86)
2. Shear the cap end plate to required dimensions. 36 (914) 33-3/8 (848) 3-1/2 (89
3. Weld the cap end plates to the formed section with 1/8" (3mm) fillet welds completely 48 (1219) 47-1/4 (1200) 3-5/8 (92)
around the top edges of the formed section.
60 (1524) 59-1/8 (1502) 3-3/4 (95)
4. Drill and countersink 8 holes (4 on each side for 1/4" -20 flat head machine screws.
72 (1829) 71 (1803) 3-7/8 (98)
Fabrication of Mullion12 (305) (Fig.
Sections 11-1/2
B-B) (292) 3-1/4 (83)
Mullions must be constructed from 1623-1/2
ga. steel with a3-3/8
minimum 84 (2134) 82-7/8 (2105) 4 (102)
24 (610) (597) (86) yield strength of
42,000 psi. 96 (2438) 94-3/4 (2407) 4-1/8(105)
36 (914) 33-3/8 (848) 3-1/2 (89
Important: The D dimension shown has been calculated to include the necessary 108 (2749) 106-3/4 (2711) 4-1/4 (108)
48 (1219) 47-1/4 (1200) 3-5/8 (92)
clearances required for thermal expansion in the mullions. The values can be found 120 (3048) 118-3/4 (3016) 4-3/8 (111)
60 (1524) and59-1/8
using the wall opening dimensions (1502)
tables on 3-3/4 (95)
this page.
72 of
1. Form two identical pieces (1829)
mullion71 (1803)
section as shown. 3-7/8 (98) (13)
(6) )
2. Connect the two mullion84sections
(2134) together.
82-7/8Use(2105)
3 4 (102)steel bind rivets or 3/4"
/16" (5mm) (83
(19mm) long stitch welds
96 12" (305mm)
(2438) on center
94-3/4 (2407)and4-1/8(105)
a 6" (152m) maximum from
both ends.
108 (2749) 106-3/4 (2711) 4-1/4 (108) (51) (46) (51)
Important: Both sides of the mullion piece should be fastened using the method de-
scribed above.
120 (3048) 118-3/4 (3016) 4-3/8 (111)
(13)
(6)
(83)
(83)
(51) (46) (51)
(19) (22)
(51) (51)
(83)
(89)
)
(83
3/16 (5) blind rivet (std.) or 3/4

(19) long intermittent welds 12
)
(83 (305) on center, 6 (152) max. (5)
from both ends, both sides of
assembly(83)
(19) (22)
(51) (51)
(83)
(19) (22)
(89)
(51) (51)
Fabrication and Installation and Instructions
Fabrication of Mullion Sections (Fig. C-C)

Horizontal to vertical mullion caps must be constructed from 12 ga. steel with a mini-
mum yield strength of 42,000 psi. Important: The H, E and F dimensions shown have
been calculated to provide the correct performance. The values can be found by using
the wall opening dimensions and the tables on page 2.
1. Form the horizontal mullion channel as shown.
2. Drill 12, 3/16" (5mm) dia. holes into the horizontal mullion channel using the dimen-
sions shown.
3. Form the center channel as shown.
NOTE:
If the center channel is to be made from two pieces, weld them together with an 1/8"
(3mm) fillet weld.
4. Shear the end plates to the dimensions required.
5. Weld the end plates to the center channel with 1/8" (3mm) fillet welds completely
around the top edges of the center section.
Jul / 06 245004 SHEET 3 OF 4
Mullion Installation
Before the fire dampers are installed into the wall the anchored into the wall. The fire dampers
may then be installed into the mullion assembly.
To correctly attach the mullions to the wall follow these steps:
1. Anchor wall mullion caps to wall using 1/4"-20 x 5/16" long flat head steel bolts and 3/8" (10mm)
diameter by 1" (25mm) long concrete expansion anchors (Hilti). If steel lintels are present, use
two 1" (25mm) long welds on each side of mullion caps. Note: End caps must be inserted into
the ends of the mullions before they are anchored to the wall.
2. Anchor horizontal mullion caps to vertical mullion caps with 3/16" (5mm) diameter steel blind
rivets in 12 places. Note: Mullion caps must be inserted into the ends of the mullions before
they are anchored to the vertical mullions or wall.
Fire Damper Installation
Galvanized steel fire dampers must be UL classified for 11/2 hour fire resistance. They must be
installed in galvanized steel sleeves and be retained by minimum 11/2" x 11/2" 1" (38mm x 38mm),
16 ga. retaining angles on each side of the wall. Retaining angles must overlap mullions or wall
by 1" minimum. Fasten to sleeve using 1/4" 1" (6mm) dia. bolts, 3/16" (5mm) steel rivets, welding,
or #10 sheet metal screws. All must be attached 6" 1" (152mm) on centers, 2" (51mm) maximum
from corners. Do not fasten retaining angles to the wall or mullions. Mullions must be free to
float. Total expansion clearance between sleeve and wall/mullion of 1/8" per foot of wall opening
or mullion span should be allowed. Maximum clearance is 11/4" 1" (32mm).
Optional Sealing of Dampers in Fire &
Smoke Rated Walls or Floor Openings
Only if required by the authority having jurisdiction
Application:
The need to seal the damper in the penetration is not required by Underwriters Laboratories.
PRICE dampers have been tested and approved to be mounted without the use of sealants around the perimeter space between the
damper and the penetration. In certain cases, local codes request that this space be sealed to try and keep the integrity of the smoke
barrier. These instructions have been produced to give direction where to apply caulk, if required by local codes. Suggested brands of
caulk to use are Dow Corning 999, Dow Corning Silastic 732, Nuflex 302 and GE RTV 108 Sealant. Read and follow the sealant manu-
facturers directions. Apply a continuous bead of caulk in the areas shown below. Do Not Apply sealant within the required expansion
gap between the damper and the fire rated wall or floor. Allow the sealant to set up and become tack-free before operating the damper.
See PRICEs standard installation instructions for the basic installation of the damper. These instructions are for use following damper
installation. Permission from the local codes inspector should be acquired before use of these instructions, to insure
conformity with the local codes.
Procedure:
1. Follow PRICEs standard/general installation instructions for proper installation of the damper in the wall / floor.
2. Clean all areas where the sealant is going to be applied. Remove dirt, oil, grease, or moisture from surface to be sealed. Allow to dry
thoroughly.
3. Using G.E. RTV 108, Dow Corning Silastic 732 RTV, Nuflex 302 or Dow Corning 999 Silicone Caulk, apply a continuous bead around
the outside perimeter of the retaining angle, sealing them to the fire wall/floor (6). Do not apply caulk between angle and wall/floor.
Also apply a continuous bead between the retaining angle and the damper sleeve(7). Be sure to seal the joints/corners of the retain-
ing angles.
4. Be sure not to apply or get sealant within the required expansion gap between the sleeve and the fire wall/floor penetration. This gap
is necessary for thermal expansion in the event of a fire.
5. After sealant is applied and before it sets-up, press the surface of the sealant in place to dispel any air. Do not operate the damper
until the sealant has become tack-free.
This instruction sheet has been reviewed and accepted by Underwriters Laboratories due to test performed by PRICE.
Jul / 06 245005 SHEET 1 OF 1
Fire Dampers
Curtain Fire Damper Sizing Chart - TYPE B
TYPE B
Single Section W = Width (Duct)
W + 1 (25)
H = Height (Duct)
X =WH++1B(25)
B = Blade Stack
(see
W +chart)
1 (25) X
X
For dampers one section

X high:
Duct Height (H) B
TYPE B
Multi-Section High Vertical up to 20" (508)
W + 1 (25) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32"
W (813)
+ 1 (25) 3" (76)
33" (838) to 42 (1067) 4" (102)
43" (1092) to W
55"
+ 1(1397)
(25) X 5" (127)
X
For VERTICAL dampers two sections high:

X
Duct Height (H) B
up to 64" (1626) 3" (76)
65" (1651) to 84"W(2134)
+ 1 (25) 4" (102)
85" (2134) to 115W(2921)
+ 1 (25) 5" (127)
W + 1 (25) X
TYPE B For HORIZONTAL dampers two
X sections high:
Multi-Section High Horizontal Duct Height (H) B
up to 32" (813) X 4" (102)
Note: See maximum section size for relevant

hourly rating and mounting position to
determine which chart to use.
Feb / 14 245006 SHEET 1 OF 3 REV.B Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Fire Dampers
Curtain Fire Damper Sizing Chart - TYPE C
TYPE C w/Square Inlet
W + 1 (25)
X
H = Height (Duct)
W + 1 (25) X=H+C
C = Blade Stack
(see chart)
X
W + 1 (25)
W + 1 (25)
TYPE C w/Round Inlet For dampers one section high:

X
X Duct Height (H) C
W + 1 (25) up to 20" (508) 3" (76)
21" (533) to 31" (787) 4" (102)
32" (813) to 42 (1067) 5" (127)
X 43" (1092) to 54" (1372) 6" (152)
W + 1 (25) 55" (1397) to 64" (1626) 4" (102)
W + 1 (25) 65" (1651) to 84" (2134) 5" (127)
85" (2159) to 114" (2896) 6" (152)
X
X
W + 1 (25)
TYPE C w/Oval Inlet
X
W + 1 (25)
Fire Dampers
Curtain Fire Damper Sizing Chart - Examples
Type A:
Width (W) = same as duct
Height (H) = same as duct
e.g. Duct = 40 x 36 (1016 x 914)
Damper* = 40 x 36 (1016 x 914)
Opening** = 401/2 x 363/8 (1029 x 924)
Type B:
Damper Height (X) = H + B (see chart on page 1)
e.g. FD-B-V, 1 hour
Duct = 40 x 36 (1016 x 914)
Maximum single section height is 55 (1397) for FD-B-V, 1 hour
From chart for single section high damper, B = 4 (102)
Damper* = 40 x 40 (1016 x 1016)
Opening** = 40 x 40 (1029 x 1029)
e.g. FDD-B-H, 3 hour
Duct = 24 x 24 (610 x 610)
Maximum single section height is 21 (533) for FDD-B-H
From chart for horizontal 2 section high damper, B = 4 (102)
Damper* = 24 x 28 (610 x 711)
Opening** = 24 x 283/8 (616 x 721)
Type C (square or oval inlet):
Damper Width = W + 1 (25)
Damper Height (X) = H + C (see chart on page 2)
e.g. Duct = 15 x 6 (381 x 152)
From chart, for 6 (152) height, C = 3 (76)
Damper* = 16 x 9 (406 x 229)
Opening** = 16 x 9 (413 x 235)
Type C (round inlet):
Diameter (D) = same as duct
Damper Width = D + 1 (25)
Damper Height (X) = D + C (see chart on page 2)
e.g. Duct = 12 dia. (305)
Damper* = 13 x 15 (330 x 381)
Opening** = 13 x 15 (337 x 387)
Notes:
*- Dampers are ordered by nominal duct size. Actual damper dimension will be
(6) undersized on both height and width.
** - For exact opening sizes applicable see installation instructions.
*** - Damper sizing may vary slightly by model. See charts on submittal drawing
for each model.
Fire Dampers
Engineering & Performance Data
Curtain Style Fire Dampers
Although the primary purpose of a fire damper is to maintain the fire resistance of a fire separation, its inclusion in the HVAC system
of a building necessarily affects the air handling characteristics of the system during the normal operating mode. Fire dampers impose
some resistance to air flow and therefore must be considered by the designer in determining the required flow rate (cfm) to each space.
The main design considerations are: Free Area, Flow and Pressure Drop.
FREE AREA:
The total minimum area of the openings in the air outlet or inlet through which air can pass.
Type A
Free Area is expressed in sq. ft.
Duct Width (in.)
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
4 .05 .11 .15 .2 .2 .3 .4 .5 .5 .6 .6 .7 .7 .8 .9
8 .11 .33 .45 .7 .8 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.5
12 .15 .55 .76 .95 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.6 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.6 3.8 3.9
16 .2 .7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.3 4.7 5.1 5.4
20 .2
Duct Height (in.)
.8 1.3 1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.7 4.2 4.7 5.2 5.6 6.1 6.6 7.0
24 .3 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.5 4.9 5.6 6.2 6.8 7.3 7.9 8.5
28 .4 1.2 1.9 2.6 3.2 3.9 4.8 5.4 5.9 6.7 7.3 8.1 8.8 9.4 10.0
32 .5 1.4 2.2 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.8 6.6 7.3 8.1 8.8 9.8 10.4 11.1 11.5
36 .5 1.5 2.4 3.3 4.4 5.3 6.1 7.2 7.8 8.8 9.7 10.8 11.8 12.6 13.1
40 .6 1.7 2.7 3.8 4.8 5.9 6.9 8.0 8.8 9.7 10.7 11.8 12.7 13.8 14.6
44 .6 1.9 2.9 4.0 5.1 6.3 7.3 8.4 9.6 10.8 11.9 12.9 13.9 15.3 16.2
48 .7 2.0 3.2 4.4 5.6 6.9 8.0 9.3 10.5 11.9 13.3 14.1 15.6 16.6 17.7
52 .7 2.2 3.6 4.8 6.1 7.5 8.8 10.2 11.6 12.7 13.9 15.2 16.7 17.9 19.2
56 .8 2.3 3.8 5.3 6.6 8.0 9.5 10.9 12.3 13.6 15.2 16.6 17.9 19.3 20.8
60 .9 2.5 4.0 5.5 7.1 8.6 10.1 11.6 13.2 14.7 16.3 17.8 19.3 20.9 22.5
Type B
Duct Width (in.)
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
4 .06 .15 .2 .3 .4 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3
8 .15 .45 .60 .8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0
12 .2 .70 .88 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.8 3.0 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.3 4.6
16 .3 .8 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.4 5.9 6.3
20 .4
Duct Height (in.)
.9 1.4 2.0 2.7 3.3 3.6 4.1 4.7 5.2 5.7 6.3 6.8 7.4 7.9
24 .4 1.1 1.7 2.3 3.1 3.8 4.3 5.2 5.7 6.3 6.9 7.6 8.2 9.0 9.6
28 .5 1.3 2.2 2.9 3.6 4.4 5.3 5.8 6.6 7.2 8.1 8.8 9.6 10.3 11.0
32 .6 1.4 2.3 3.1 4.2 5.3 5.9 6.9 7.6 8.5 9.4 10.1 11.0 11.8 12.8
36 .7 1.5 2.6 3.5 4.7 5.7 6.6 7.7 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 12.3 13.3 14.3
40 .7 1.9 3.0 3.9 5.2 6.4 7.4 8.6 9.5 10.8 11.2 12.9 13.9 14.9 16.1
44 .7 1.9 3.1 4.3 5.7 6.9 8.2 9.5 10.5 11.7 13.0 14.1 15.3 16.5 17.7
48 .8 2.1 3.4 4.8 6.2 7.6 8.8 10.2 11.4 12.7 14.1 15.5 16.7 18.0 19.4
52 .9 2.3 3.7 5.2 6.7 8.2 9.5 11.1 12.6 13.9 15.3 16.8 18.4 19.7 21.0
56 1.0 2.4 4.0 5.6 7.2 8.8 10.3 11.9 13.5 15.1 16.6 18.2 19.5 21.3 22.6
60 1.2 2.6 4.3 6.0 7.8 9.5 11.1 12.7 14.5 16.0 17.6 19.4 21.0 22.8 24.4
Type C: All 100% Free Area
Note: Above data applies to single section dampers only.
All Metric dimensions ( ) are soft conversion.

Copyright
Copyright E.H.
E.H. Price
Price Limited
Limited 2008.
2012.
Oct / 12 245007 SHEET 1 OF 3 REV.B Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Fire Dampers
Performance Characteristics
PRESSURE DROP: A dynamic loss of static pressure as a result of damper obstructions. This is expressed as a
measure of the Free Area X Free Area Velocity versus Static Pressure Drop (inches W.G.).
*cfm = Free Area (sq. ft.) x Free Area Velocity (fpm or cfm/sq. ft.)
cfm* cfm* cfm*

Fire Dampers
Type A vs. Type B
The Controversy By offering two frame styles, A and B, to accommodate low and medium velocity duct systems, respectively,
the fire damper industry has attempted to serve the needs of the HVAC designer. However, this accommodation
has inadvertently caused some conflict of interest. To explain, most contractors prefer to use Type A fire dampers
whenever possible because of their low cost and ease of installation (a further cost savings versus Type B). Engi-
neers, on the other hand, prefer the more expensive Type B fire dampers because of their superior air handling
characteristics.
Rule of Thumb As a natural result of these different interests, an industry Rule of Thumb developed:
For low and medium velocity duct up to 12" (305mm) height, use Type B.
For low and medium velocity ducts over 13" (330mm) height, use Type A.
For high velocity duct systems, use Type C.
Third Generation PRICEs third generation fire damper permits improvement in this guideline. By virtue of our narrow blade profile,
we are able to offer greater free area than ordinary Type As. We are also able to offer a less costly fire damper
than the wide blade As which use more material. In summary, our third generation Type A offers the least costly
fire damper with the greatest free area.
Static Pressure Drop (In. W.G.)
SI Units To convert cubic feet per minute (cfm) to cubic meters per second (m3/s) multiply by 0.000 471 947.
To convert feet per minute (fpm) to meters per second (m/s) multiply by 0.005 080.
To convert inches of water to pascals (Pa) or newtons per square meter (N/m2), multiply by 249.082.
To convert square inches to square meters, multiply by 0.000 645 16.
To convert inches to meters, multiply by 0.0254.
Frame Retaining Angles
Model FRA
Model
Frame Retaining Angles FRA
16 ga. 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" (38 mm x 38 mm) Formed
Galvanized Steel with staked corners.
Sizes: Maximum and minimum sizes cor-
respond to the individual damper model.
Check the appropriate submittal sheet or
size chart.
Installation:
1. Install damper within fire separation as
detailed in the appropriate damper instal-
lation instruction sheet. Omit the normal
perimeter angles.
2. Place the model FRA angle around the
damper sleeve on both sides of the fire
separation as shown below.
3. The FRA angles must be attached to the
sleeve with #10 sheet metal screws, tack
or spot welds, 1/4" (6 mm) bolts and nuts,
or 3/16" (5 mm) steel pop rivets.
The fasteners must be spaced 6" (152mm)
on centers and be a maximum of 2" (51
mm) from the corners.
A minimum of two fasteners is required
on each top, bottom or side of the damper
sleeve.
Application:
PRICE Model FRA Framed Retaining Angles
may be used instead of the normal mount-
ing angles being used at present.The model
FRA retaining angles can be installed on
PRICE curtain fire dampers, multi-bladed
fire dampers and combination fire/smoke
dampers with 11/2 hr. or 3 hr. vertical or
horizontal fire ratings. FRA angles are fac-
tory supplied two per damper.
recommended.
Jul / 06
245008
Fire Dampers Static
FD-A / FD-A-S FD-B / FD-B-S FD-RD

Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-A by Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-B Round Static Fire Dampers shall be
PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain-blade by PRICE. Dampers shall be of the curtain model FD-RD by PRICE. Damper blade
type for high free area. Dampers shall be type with type B transitions for increased shall be double thickness galvanized steel
rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear free area. Dampers shall be rated to UL555 with welded channel reinforcement. The
the Underwriters Laboratories label for / ULC S.112, and shall bear the Underwriters frame shall be constructed of roll-formed
Static Fire Dampers. Laboratories label for Static Fire Dampers. galvanized steel. Dampers shall be rated
FD-A-SL FD-B-SL as to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratories label for Static
Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-A- Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-B- Fire Dampers.
SL by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain- SL by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain
blade type for high free area. Frames type with type B transitions for increased FD-MB-3V
shall be constructed of galvanized steel free area. Frames shall be constructed of Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-MB-
with U-channel profile for narrow profile. galvanized steel with U-channel profile 3V by PRICE. Damper blades shall be of
Dampers shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, for narrow profile. Dampers shall be rated galvanized steel triple-vee construction.
and shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the Dampers shall be rated to UL555 / ULC
label for Static Fire Dampers. Underwriters Laboratories label for Static S.112, and shall bear the Underwriters
FD-VAG Fire Dampers. Laboratories label for Static Fire Dampers.
FD-C / FD-C-S Linkage shall be of the concealed type for
Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-VAG maximum free area.
by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain-blade Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-C
type for high free area, and shall be mounted by PRICE. Dampers shall be curtain type FD-MB-AF
in a galvanized steel sleeve with a mounting dampers with type C transitions for 100% Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-
flange on one end. Dampers shall be rated free area. Dampers shall be rated to UL555 / MB-AF by PRICE. Damper blades shall be
to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the ULC S.112, and shall bear the Underwriters of double-skinned streamlined (airfoil)
Underwriters Laboratories label for Static Laboratories label for Static Fire Dampers. construction for minimum pressure drop.
Fire Dampers. FD-C-MH Dampers shall be rated to UL555 / ULC
FD-HAG S.112, and shall bear the Underwriters
Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-C-MH Laboratories label for Static Fire Dampers.
Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-HAG by PRICE. Dampers shall be curtain-type, Linkage shall be of the concealed type for
by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain-blade with type C transitions for 100% free area. maximum free area.
type for high free area, and shall be mounted Dampers shall be applicable for systems
in a galvanized steel sleeve with a mounting up to 10 static pressure. Dampers shall VCS4
flange on one end. Dampers shall be rated be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall Static Fire Dampers shall be model VCS4 by
to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the bear the Underwriters Laboratories label PRICE. Dampers shall be fire rated to ULC
Underwriters Laboratories label for Static for Static Fire Dampers. S.112, and bear the Warnock-Hersey label.
Fire Dampers. FD-C-HP Dampers shall also function as balancing
FD-OW dampers, with (lever/screwdriver) operator
Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-C-HP for easy volume adjustment. Finish shall
Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-OW by PRICE. Dampers shall be curtain-type, be B17 black.
by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain-blade with type C transitions for 100% free area.
type, and shall be mounted in galvanized Dampers shall be supplied in a fully welded
steel sleeves with thermal blanket wrap. housing, for systems with over 10 static
Dampers shall be UL/ULC qualified for pressure. Dampers shall be rated to UL555
mounting outside of the plane of the wall to / ULC S.112, and shall bear the Underwriters
allow through the grille access. Dampers Laboratories label for Static Fire Dampers.
shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, and FD-GC
shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories
label for Static Fire Dampers. Static Fire Dampers shall be model FD-
GC by PRICE. Dampers shall include a
mounting collar on one side for garbage
chute application. The dampers shall have
100% free area through the mounting collar.
Dampers shall be rated as to UL555 / ULC
S.112, and shall bear the Underwriters
Laboratories label for Static Fire Dampers.
Index Date: February 2014
Submittal Sheets
Fire Damper Dynamic
Fire Damper Dynamic

FDD-A A Style (blades in airstream) 245009 Jul / 06
FDD-A-SL A Style (blades in airstream) Slim Line Frame 245010 Jul / 06
FDS-A-S (sleeve) A Style (blades in airstream) c/w sleeve 245011 Jul / 06
FDD-VAG Vertical Grille Application 245012 Jul / 06
FDD-HAG Horizontal Grille Application 245013 Jul / 06
FDD-OW Outside Wall / Partition Application 245014 Jul / 06
FDD-B B Style (blades out of airstream) 245015 (2 sheets) May / 08
FDD-B-SL B Style (blades out of airstream) Slim Line Frame 245016 (2 sheets) May / 08
FDD-B-S (sleeve) B Style (blades out of airstream) c/w sleeve 245017 (2 sheets) May / 08
FDD-C C Style (round transition) 245018 (2 sheets) Feb / 14
FDD-C-S (sleeve) C Style (round transition) c/w sleeve 245019 (2 sheets) Feb / 14
FDD-RD True Round Damper 245020 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FDD-MB-3V Multi Blade, 3V Blade 245021 (2 sheets) Apr / 09
FDD-MB-AF Multi Blade, Airfoil Blade 245022 (2 sheets) Oct / 12
Fire Damper Installation and Accessories

Fire Damper Installation Instructions (Static and Dynamic) 245023 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Round Fire Damper Installation Instructions (Static and Dynamic) 245024 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Out of Wall Partitions for Fire Dampers (Static and Dynamic)
Optional sealing of Dampers in Fire & Smoke Rated Walls
or Floor Openings Installation Instructions 245027 Jul / 06
Fire Damper Sizing Chart 245028 (3 sheets) Feb / 14
Fire Damper Engineering & Performance Data 245029 (3 sheets) Oct / 12
Fire Damper Dynamic Suggested Specifications Jul / 06
Model FDD-A
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Dynamic Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-A
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
11/2 & 3 Hr. Vertical Mount:
Max. Single Section: 36"w x 36"h (914
mm x 914 mm)
Max. Size: 72"w x 36h (1829 mm x 914 mm)
11/2 & 3 Hr. Horizontal Mount:
Min. Size: 6"w x 6"h (152 mm x 152mm)
Max. Single Section: 24"w x 24"h (610
mm x 610 mm)
Max. Size: 36"w x 36"h (914 mm x 914 mm)
For factory supplied sleeve see submittal
for FDD-A c/w sleeve
212F fusible link (vertical only, 24"x24"
(610mm x 610mm) max size)
mately 1/4"(6mm) smaller than given duct
dimensions.
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Dynamic and
Static Systems.
recommended.
Jul / 06
245009
Model FDD-A-SL
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Slimline Frame
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-A-SL
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
11/2 & 3 Hr. Vertical:
Max.Single Sect.: 36"w X 36"h (914mm
x 914mm)
11/2 & 3 Hr. Horizontal:
Max. Single Sect.: 24"w X 24"h (610mm
x 610mm)
Max.Size: 36"w X 36"h (914mm x 914mm
20 Gauge Sleeve
18 Gauge Sleeve
16 Gauge Sleeve
14 Gauge Sleeve
10 Gauge Sleeve
3 Hour Rating
dimensions.
Static Systems..
recommended.
Jul / 06
245010
Model FDD-A-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
c/w Sleeve
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-A-S c/w
Sleeve
Curtain-Type
Factory Sleeve: 12"(305mm) - 20/22ga.
11/2 & 3 Hr. Vertical Mount:
Max. Single Section: 36"w X 36h (914mm
x 914mm)
11/2 & 3 Hr. Horizontal Mount:
Max. Single Section: 24"w X 24"h (610mm
x 610mm)
Sleeve Gauge
18 ga. Sleeve
16 ga. Sleeve
14 ga. Sleeve
10 ga. Sleeve
dimensions.
UL/ULC Approved for Use in Dynamic and
Static Systems.
recommended.
Jul / 06
245011
Model FDD-VAG
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Grille Application
Dynamic Fire Damper, Vertical
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-VAG
Frame: Roll Formed Galvanized
Steel with Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Flange: 3/4 (19mm)
Min. Size: 6"w X 6"h (152 mm x 152mm)
Max. Size: 36"w X 36h (914 mm x 914 mm)
Mounting: Vertical
Sleeve Gauge
18 Gauge Sleeve
16 Gauge Sleeve
14 Gauge Sleeve
10 Gauge Sleeve
Damper Setback
3 Hour Rating
Round Transition (FDD-VAGR)
dimensions.
Static Systems.
recommended.
Jul / 06
245012
Model FDD-HAG
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Grille Application
Dynamic Fire Damper, Horizontal
Model
Static Fire Damper FDD-HAG
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Flange: 3/4 (19mm)
Min. Size: 6w X 6h (152mm x 152mm)
x 610mm)
Max. Size: 36w X 36h (914mm x 914mm)
Mounting: Horizontal
Sleeve Gauge
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
10 Gauge
Damper Setback
3 Hour Rating
Round Transition (FDD-HAGR)
Static Systems.
recommended.
Jul / 06
245013
Model FDD-OW
11/2 Hour Rated
"A" Style
Outside Wall Application
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-OW
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Sleeve: 20 Ga. Galvanized wrapped in
thermal blanket.
Heat Responsive Devices: Fusible Links,
165F Std.
Finish: Mill galvanized Standard.
Vertical Mount:
Max. Single Section: 36"w x 36h (914
mm x 914 mm)
Max. Size: 42"w x 36h (1067 mm x 914 mm)
Horizontal Mount:
Min. Size: 6"w x 6"h (152 mm x 152mm)
Max. Single Sect.: 24"w x 24"h (610 mm
x 610 mm)
Max. Size: 36"w x 36"h (914mm x 914 mm)
mately actual size of given duct dimen-
sions, (not including thermal blanket). Wall
opening must be over-sized by 3/8" (10mm)
to accomodate thermal blanket thickness.
Sleeve Gauge
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
10 Gauge
Features:
The FDD-OW fire damper has been de-
signed and tested to exceed all UL, ULC,
and NFPA requirements.
They are intended for use in dynamic de-
sign systems where the grille and damper
assembly do not allow for the damper to
be mounted in the plane of the fire barrier.
as a 11/2 hour vertical or horizontal fire
damper.
The Fire damper, insulation, and sleeve
must be ordered from the factory as an
assembly.
Damper approved for up to 2000 FPM at
4.0"SP.
Jul / 06
245014
Model FDD-B
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-B
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Damper Height (See Page 2)

x 813mm)
x 533mm)
for FDD-B c/w sleeve
3 Hour Rating
dimensions.
UL/ULC Approved for Use in Static and
Dynamic Systems.
inspected and cycled at intervals not greater Damper Height (See Page 2)
recommended.
May / 08
245015
Model FDD-B
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
W = Width (Duct)
H = Height (Duct)
X=H+B
B = Blade Stack
(see chart)
Duct Height (H) B
up to 20" (508) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32" (813) 3" (76)
For HORIZONTAL dampers two

sections high:
Duct Height (H) B
up to 32" (813) 4" (102)
use.
Model FDD-B-SL
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
Slimline Frame
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-B-SL
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
x 813mm)
x 533mm)
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
10 Gauge
3 Hour Rating
dimensions.
Static Systems.
recommended.
May / 08
245016
Model FDD-B-SL
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
W = Width (Duct)
H = Height (Duct)
X=H+B
B = Blade Stack
(see chart)
Duct Height (H) B
up to 20" (508) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32" (813) 3" (76)

sections high:
Duct Height (H) B
up to 32" (813) 4" (102)
use.
Model FDD-B-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper
FDD-B-S c/w Sleeve
Frame: 12 Roll Formed Galvanized Steel.
Curtain-Type
Factory Sleeve: 12 (305mm) - 20/22ga.
Min. Size:
6w X 4h (152mm x 102mm)
Max. Single Section:
36w X 32h (914mm x 813mm)
Max. Size:
72w X 32h (1829mm x 813mm)
Min. Size:
6w X 4h (152mm x 102mm)
Max. Single Section:
24w X 21h (610mm x 533mm)
Max. Size: 36w X 32h (914mm x 813mm)
Sleeve Gauge
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge
10 Gauge
mately 1/4 (6) smaller than given duct
dimensions.
Static Systems.
recommended.
May / 08
245017
Model FDD-B-SL
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"B" Style
W = Width (Duct)
H = Height (Duct)
X=H+B
B = Blade Stack
(see chart)
Duct Height (H) B
up to 20" (508) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32" (813) 3" (76)

sections high:
Duct Height (H) B
up to 32" (813) 4" (102)
use.
Model FDD-C
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-C
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Min. Size: 5"w x 3h (127mm x 76mm) or
5" (127) round
Max. Single Section: 35"w x 32"h (889mm
Duct Size
x 813mm)
Max. Size:
71w X 32h (1803mm x 813mm)
5" (127) round
Max. Single Sect.: 23"w x 20"h (584mm
x 508mm)
for FDD-C c/w sleeve.
3 Hour Rating
(584mm x 508mm) max size) Duct Size
dimensions.
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static and
Dynamic Systems.
Models:
FDD-RC - round inlet
FDD-SRC - square/rectangular inlet
FDD-OVC - oval inlet
recommended.
Feb / 14
245018
Model FDD-C
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
FDD-SRC
FDD-OVC
Model FDD-C-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper
FDD-C-S c/w sleeve
Safety Edge.
Curtain-Type
Factory Sleeve: 12 (305mm) - 20/22ga.
Damper Overall
Duct Size
Min. Size: 5"w x 3h (127mm x 76mm) or
5" (127) round
x 813mm)
Max. Size:
71w X 32h (1803mm x 813mm)
5" (127) round
x 508mm)
Sleeve Gauge
18 Gauge
16 Gauge
14 Gauge Damper Overall
10 Gauge
dimensions.
Models:
FDD-RC - round inlet
FDD-SRC - square/rectangular inlet
FDD-OVC - oval inlet
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Static and
Dynamic Systems.
local codes and the actuator manufacturer. inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are recommended.
In addition, fuse links shall be removed and Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our continuous
improvement program, we reserve the right to make further improvements without notice.
Feb / 14
245019
Model FDD-C-S c/w sleeve
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
"C" Style

FDD-RC
FDD-SRC
FDD-OVC
Model FDD-RD
11/2 Hour Rated
True Round
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-RD
Features
Model FDD-RD is listed for use in a
Dynamic type system where the fan
continues to run in the event of a fire for
smoke evacuation.This damper has been
tested to close at minimum airflows of
2000 fpm at 4 s.p.
Model FDD-RD have been designed and
tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C., and NFPA
requirements for fire dampers. They are
as an 11/2 hour fire damper.
UL and ULC listed for vertical and
horizontal mountings.
The jackshaft permits operation by any
standard locking quadrant, electric or
pneumatic actuator.
Frame: Roll-formed 20 gauge galvanized
steel, 16 (406mm) long, integral sleeve.
inforcement.
Axles: 3/8 (10mm) square plated steel.
Jackshaft: 1/2 (13mm) diameter plated
steel.
Fusible Link: 165F standard, 212F
available.
Sizes: 8 - 24 (203 mm - 610 mm) dia. Manufacturers Recommendations
Retaining Plates: 2-20 ga. galvanized steel All moving parts of the damper must be
complete with angle clips. inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Options: with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Sleeve Length local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
20 (508mm) In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
24 (610mm) inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Note: Retaining Plate on operator side of recommended
damper is installed at the factory. Specifications are correct at time of printing.
Dampers are furnished approximately However, as part of our continuous
1
/ 8 (3mm) smaller than given duct improvement program, we reserve the
dimensions. right to make further improvements without
notice.
Jul / 06
245020
Model FDD-RD
11/2 Hour Rated
True Round
Model FDD-MB-3V
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Multi-Blade
Dynamic Fire Damper
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-MB-3V
Features:
The FDD-MB-3V series Dynamic Fire
Dampers have been designed and tested
to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A.
requirements for fire dampers.
The FDD-MB-3V dampers rigid frame and
test results.
Multi Section units must be ordered with
an actuator and a single heat responsive
device, except as noted.
Single Section units can be ordered with
a fusible link and locking hand quadrant.
Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible Factory Supplied Sleeve
Valve). These options provide quick 20 Gauge
and economical ways to check damper 18 Gauge
operations and also provide a Systematic 16 Gauge
Closure Control. Option PFV allows 14 Gauge
damper operation without the need/cost 10 Gauge
for an EP valve and electrical connection Sleeve Length (Required)
at the damper. 16 Minimum
3 Hour Rating
Construction: Manual Locking Quadrant
Frame: 5 Roll Formed Galvanized Steel Fuse Link 212F
hat-section with staked corners with integral 250F - 350F (Actuators Required)
bracing.
Notes: Dampers are furnished
Blades: 16 ga. Roll Formed Galvanized Steel. approximately 1/4 (6mm) smaller than
Minimum width: 41/4 (108mm) given duct dimensions.
Maximum width: 71/4 (184mm) (1829mm x 1219mm) with fusible link UL/ULC Approved For Use in Dynamic and
Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame - 108w X 96h Static Systems.
Axles: Square, plated steel (2743mm x 2438mm) with actuators Manufacturers Recommendations
11/2 Hr. Horizontal: Multiple Assembly All moving parts of the damper must be
Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
are 12ga. galvanized steel. - 72w X 96h
(1829mm x 2438mm) with actuators than every six months and in accordance
Fusible Link: U.L. Listed 165F with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
3 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Sizes: Minimum Size: 6w X 6h - 72w X 48h
(152mm x 152mm) In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
(1829mm x 1219mm) with fusible link inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Maximum UL Listed Size: - 72w X 96h recommended.
Single Section: 36w X 48h (1829mm x 2438mm) with actuators
(914mm x 1219mm) Specifications are correct at time of printing.
3 Hr. Horizontal: Multiple Assembly However, as part of our continuous
11/2 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly
- 72w X 96h improvement program, we reserve the
- 72w X 48h
(1829mm x 2438mm) with actuators right to make further improvements without
Optional Construction: notice.
Apr / 09
245021
Apr / 09 245021 SHEET 1 OF 2 Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model FDD-MB-3V
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Multi-Blade
Dynamic Fire Damper
Apr / 09 245021 SHEET 2 OF 2 Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Model FDD-MB-AF
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Multi-Blade Damper
Airfoil Blade
Dynamic Fire Damper
Model
Dynamic Fire Damper FDD-MB-AF
Features Minimum Size: 8"w x 8"h
The FDD-MB-AF series Dynamic Fire (203mm x 203mm)
Dampers have been designed and Maximum UL/ULC Listed Size:
tested to provide a complete range of
performance features. Single Section: 36"w x 48"h
Multi-Section units must be ordered with (914mm x 1219mm)
an actuator and a single heat responsive 11/2 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly
device, except as noted. - 72w X 48h
Single-Section units can be ordered with (1829mm x 1219mm) with fusible link
a fusible link and locking hand quadrant. - 108w X 96h
Also available are options EFL (Electric (2743mm x 2438mm) with actuators
Valve). These options provide quick 11/2 Hr. Horizontal: Multiple Assembly
and economical ways to check damper - 36w X 48h
operations and also provide a Systematic (914mm x 1219mm) with actuators
Closure Control. Option PFV allows 3 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly
damper operation without the need/cost - 72w X 48h
for an E-P valve and electrical connection (1829mm x 1219mm) with fusible link
at the damper. These options require an - 72w X 48h
actuator to be ordered with the damper. (1829mm x 1219mm) with actuators
Standard Construction: 3 Hr. Horizontal: Multiple Assembly
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat - 36w X 48h
section with staked corners with integral (914mm x 1219mm) with actuators
bracing. Optional Construction:
Blades: Airfoil-shaped, double skin Factory Supplied Sleeve
galvanized steel of roll-formed construction. 20 Gauge
Mechanically joined to form construction 18 Gauge
equivalent to 14 ga. steel. 16 Gauge
Minimum width 5" (127mm) 14 Gauge
10 Gauge
Maximum width 7" (178mm) Sleeve Length (Required)
Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame. 16 (406mm) Minimum
Axles: Square, plated steel. 3 Hour Rating
Manual Locking Quadrant
Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars Fuse Link 212F
are 12ga. galvanized steel. 250F - 350F (Actuators Required)
Fusible Link: UL Listed 165F.
Notes: Dampers are furnished approximately 1/4 (6mm) smaller than given duct
Sizes: dimensions.
UL/ULC Approved For Use in Dynamic and Static Systems.
All moving parts of the damper must be inspected and cycled at intervals not greater than
every six months and in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local codes
and the actuator manufacturer. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and inspected for
Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our continuous
improvement program, we reserve the right to make further improvements without notice.
Oct / 12
245022
Model FDD-MB-AF
11/2, 3 Hour Rated
Multi-Blade Damper
Airfoil Blade
Dynamic Fire Damper

When UL is referred to in this document, it represents UL/ULC. This installation instruction applies to Fire Dampers (static,
dynamic, curtain, single and multi-blade types) mounted in the plane of an UL approved fire partition. The dampers are designed for
operation in the vertical or horizontal position with blades running horizontal. The dampers are to be installed square and free from
twisting or racking.
The dampers shall not be compressed or stretched into the opening. Transportation and installation of the dampers shall be handled
with the sleeve or frame. Do not lift the damper with the blades or actuator. Special care shall be given to the damper before instal-
lation and after to insure it is protected against dirt, weather, mortar and drywall dust, wall texture and paint. Any of these conditions
could cause the damper not to operate correctly and void the warranty. Suitable access to inside duct is to be provided for inspection
and replacement of parts such as heat response devices and actuators per NFPA 90A and local authority having jurisdiction. As with all
joints, contractor must seal duct-collar connections in the field after installation. PRICE Model numbers which are UL approved to utilize
this installation are FD, FD-SL, FD-USL, FD-MB-3V, FD-MB-AF, FD-SB, FDD, FDD-SL, FDD-MB-3V, FDD-MB-AF.
The fire barrier opening shall be larger than the damper to allow for thermal expansion and ease of installation. When steel stud/gypsum
or wood stud/gypsum partitions are being used then refer to Fig. 1-3 for additional information and details.
A. Dampers Assemblies Using 2 Angles Methods (see note 4a) shall be a minimum of 1/8"(3mm) per linear foot (305mm) of height
and width of sleeved assembly up to a maximum of 11/2(38mm) and a minimum of 1/4 (6mm). For Static Systems the maximum
single section curtain damper is 60"x60" (1524mm x 1524mm) for vertical mounting and 40" x 40" (1016mm x 1016mm) for horizontal
mountings, based on type A dampers. The maximum single section multi-blade damper is 36" x 48" (914mm x1219mm) in vertical or
horizontal mountings For Dynamic Systems the maximum single section curtain damper is 36" x 36" (914mm x 914mm) in vertical
mountings and 24" x 24" (610mm x 610mm) in horizontal mountings, based on type A dampers.The maximum single section multi-blade
damper is 36"x48" (914mm x 1219mm) in vertical or horizontal mountings. This method is acceptable for 11/2 and 3 hour fire dampers.
See Underwriters Laboratories Listings for maximum multiple assembly sizes.
B. Dampers Assemblies Using 1 Angle Methods (see note 4b) shall be a minimum of 1/8" (3mm) per linear foot (305mm) of height
and width of sleeved assembly up to a maximum of 11/2 (38mm) and a minimum of 1/4 (6mm). The maximum single section is the
same as in A above. The maximum multi-section is 108"w and 108"h (2743mm x 2743mm) up to 36 square feet (3.345 sq. meters). This
method is acceptable for 11/2 hour fire dampers mounted in a masonry/concrete or steel stud/ gypsum wall only.
C. Dampers Assemblies Using No Angles Methods (see note 4c) shall be a minimum of 1/4" (6mm) and a maximum of 1/2 (13mm).
The maximum single section is the same as in A above. The maximum multi-section is 42"w x 48"h (1067mm x 1219mm). This method
is acceptable for 11/2 hour fire dampers mounted in a masonry/concrete or steel stud/gypsum wall only.
Sleeves shall be of the SAME GAUGE or heavier as the duct to which it is attached, if one of the breakaway connection is used as de-
fined in the SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Guide for HVAC Systems (Fig. 4-6) and in NFPA 90A. Gauges shall conform
to SMACNA or ASHRAE duct standards. Sleeves shall not extend beyond the fire barrier more than 6" (152mm) unless an actuator or
factory installed access door is supplied, then the sleeve may extend up to 16" (406mm). Sleeve shall terminate at both sides of wall
within dimensions shown. If a rigid connection is used, then the sleeve shall be a minimum of 16 gage for dampers up to 36" (914mm)
wide by 24" (610mm) high and 14 gage for dampers exceeding 36"(914mm) wide by 24" (610mm) high.
Round and oval breakaway connections must use either a 4" (102mm) wide draw band or #10 (M5) sheet metal screws spaced equally
around the circumference of the duct as follows: 3 screws for duct sizes 22" (559mm) and smaller; 5 screws for duct sizes greater than
22" (559mm) and up to and including 36" (914mm): 8 screws for duct sizes greater than 36" (914mm). Refer to SMACNA Fire, Smoke
and Radiation Damper Guide for HVAC Systems for information on Ductmate, Nexus, Ward, TDC and TDF systems and any additional
information (Fig. 5-6). A sleeve may not be required if the damper frame is of sufficient size and shape so the mounting angles can be
directly fastened to it.
3. Multi-Section and Damper to Sleeve Connections:
Damper shall be secured to the sleeve and to each other (when joined to make multiple damper assemblies) with #10 sheet metal
screws, 1/4(6mm) nut and bolts, 1/4(6mm) tack welds, 3/16(5mm) steel rivets, spot welds, or clinching (toggle) on 6" (152mm) centers.

Opening:
used.This method is approved for use in UL
approved concrete/masonry partitions, steel
stud/gypsum walls, and wood stud/gypsum
walls. In this method 2 sets of angles are
used to secure the damper in the opening,
one on each side of the partition (See Fig. 7).
Two Angle Method is approved for 1 1/2 and 3
hour dampers, vertical or horizontal orienta-
tion, and any maximum size multi-section
UL approved damper (see Underwriters
Laboratories Listings for maximum assem-
bly sizes). Angles shall be a minimum of
1 1/2 x 1 1/2 (38mm x 38mm) x 16 gauge.
Angles are to be fastened to the sleeve on
6" (152mm) centers with #10 (M5) sheet
metal screws, 3/16" (5mm) steel pop rivets,
1
/2 (13mm) tack welds, or 1/4 (6mm) di-
ameter nut and bolts with not more than
the duct work terminates at the damper or centers and must engage the fire partition cal and horizontal (flange on top side only)
installation prohibits angles from turning out/ a minimum of 11/2 (38mm); in steel stud/ orientations, and the maximum size shall be
away from the wall, the retaining angle shall gypsum partitions secure the angles to the 42 (1067mm) wide by 48 (1219mm) high up
be reversed (leg turned into the opening) partition with #10 (M5) screws long enough to the maximum multi-section UL approved
providing the size of the opening is increased to penetrate the J-Runners and E-Stud by a damper size (see Underwriters Laboratories
by an amount equal to twice the combined minimum of 3/8 (10mm). Use a minimum Listings for maximum assembly sizes). The
thickness of the angle and the height of the of two fasteners per side. The angles are sleeve flange shall be a minimum of 3/4
screw or bolthead to maintain expansion to overlap the partition a minimum of 1 (19mm) high by 20 gauge steel. If a flange/
clearances. See note 1A for information on (25mm). These angles may be of a unit type angle is added, it shall be a minimum of
clearances. See Fig. 7 for detailed drawings construction and may or may not be fastened 1 x 1 (25mm x 25mm) by 18 gauge steel
of installations. to each other at the corners. When the duct and fastened with #10 (M5) bolts or screws,
b. One Angle (Single Sided) Method: work terminates at the damper or installa- 1
/2 (13mm) welds, or 3/16 (5mm) rivets to
In this method 1 set of angles are used tion prohibits angles from turning out/away the sleeve, at a maximum spacing of 6
to secure the damper in the opening. This from the wall, the retaining angle shall be (152mm) o.c., not more than 2 (51mm) from
method is approved for use in UL approved reversed (leg turned into the opening) pro- each end with a minimum of two fasteners
concrete/masonry partitions and steel stud/ viding the size of the opening is increased per side. The sleeve is to be fastened to
gypsum walls. Only one side of the fire parti- by an amount equal to twice the combined the fire partition with: in concrete/masonry
tion will have the angles installed (see Fig. thickness of the angle and the height of the partitions with #10 self-tapping concrete
8). One Angle Method is approved for 11/2 screw or bolt head to maintain expansion anchors or concrete screws on 6 (152mm)
hour dampers only, vertical and horizontal clearances. Angles can be placed in front of centers and must engage the fire partition
(angles on top side only) orientations, and the or behind the drywall attaching directly to a minimum of 11/2 (38mm); in steel stud/
maximum size shall be 108 (2743mm) wide the steel studs or masonry. PRICEs Frame gypsum partitions secure the angles to the
or 108 (2743mm) high up to 36 square feet Retaining Angles (FRA) can be used in place partition with #10 (M5) screws long enough
(3.345 sq. meters) and up to the maximum of the angle mentioned above. See note 1B to penetrate the J-Runners and E-Stud by a
multi-section. UL approved damper size for information on clearances. See Fig. 8 for minimum of 3/8 (10mm). Use a minimum
(see Underwriters Laboratories Listings for detailed drawings of installations. of two fasteners per side. The sleeve flange
maximum assembly sizes). Angle shall be a c. No Angle Method: In this method No can be placed in front of or behind the dry-
minimum of 11/2 x 11/2 (38mm x 38mm) by angles are used to secure the damper in the wall attaching directly to the steel studs or
16 gauge. Angles are to be fastened to the opening.This method is approved for use in masonry. Be sure to not stretch the damper
sleeve on 6 (152mm) centers with #10 (M5) UL approved concrete/masonry partitions when securing it into the partition. Stretch-
sheet metal screws, 3/16 (5mm) steel pop and steel stud/gypsum walls. This method ing the damper can cause it to bind up and
rivets, 1/2 (13mm) tack welds, or 1/4 (6mm) uses a minimum 3/4 (19mm) flange is on prevent it from operating properly. PRICEs
diameter nut and bolts with not more than one end of the sleeve. The damper/sleeve Frame Retaining Angles (FRA) can be used
2 (51mm) from each end with a minimum assembly is placed in the opening so that the in place of the angle mentioned above. See
of two connections on each side/leg top and flange rest flush up to the partition, then the note 1C for information on clearances. See
bottom.The angles are also to be fastened to fasteners are placed through the sleeve into Fig. 9 for detailed drawings of installations.
the fire partition with: in concrete/masonry the partition (see Fig. 9). No Angle Method is
partitions with #10 (M5) self-tapping concrete approved for 11/2 hour dampers only, verti-
anchors or concrete screws on 6 (152mm)
Jul / 06 245023 SHEET 2 OF 4

Transverse Joints
bottom joint.

Round or flat oval ducts connected to Type R, CR or OC damper collars may use #10 sheetmetal screws as follows:

as illustrated.

Jul / 06 245023 SHEET 4 OF 4

using either:
22 (559mm)and smaller duct.
of 1 (25 mm).
plate. The clip angles shall be attached with
1
/8 (3mm) rivets, #10 x 1/2 (13mm) sheet-

regulations.
recommended.
This Installation sheet has been reviewed and accepted by Underwriters Laboratories.
Jul / 06 245024 SHEET 2 OF 2
FD-OW, FDD-OW, FSD-3V-OW, FSD-AF-OW, FSD-3V-FA, FSD-AF-FA

the dampers. PRICE Model numbers which are UL approved to utilize this installation are FD-OW, FDD-OW, FSD-3V-OW-211, FSD-
3V-OW-212, FSD-AF-OW-211, FSD-AF-OW-212, FSD-3V-FA-211, FSD-3V-FA-212, FSD-AF-FA-211, FSD-AF-FA-212.


3
Jul / 06 245025 SHEET 2 OF 4

Transverse Joints
connections.
bottom joint.

Round or flat oval ducts connected to Type R, CR or CO damper collars may use #10 sheetmetal screws as follows:

as illustrated.


UL Approved
3/4" Flange Wall Design Factory Installed
Thermal Insulation
Insulation
UL Approved
Wall Design Gypsum
Factory Installed 3/4" Flange
Metal Studs
#10 Sheet Metal
Screws, 8" oc.
Masonry Walls
#10 Self-Tapping Screws, 6" oc.
6" oc Fire Damper 3/4" Flange
Fire/Smoke Damper
#10 Sheet Metal
Screws, 6" oc. UL Approved
Masonry Wall Design
Factory Installed
tor
Insulation
tua

Ac
Steel Sleeve 3/4" Flange

(Typ. 4 Sides)
20 Ga. St.
6" Max Masonry Walls
#10 Self-Tapping
Concrete Anchors,
6" oc.
Fire Wall
Sides
3.5
5" Max.
Fasteners
Sleeve
Fire/Smoke
Fasteners
Sleeve
tor
ator
tua
Fire/Smoke Damper
Actu
Ac

Steel/Gypsum
Min. 1" Overlap
Masonry
Steel/Gypsum Wall
Wall
Damper
Sleeve
Sleeve
Fire/Smoke Damper
The curtain and airfoil blade type fire damper installation is the same as the 3-V blade type fire damper shown.
Jul / 06 245025 SHEET 4 OF 4
Application:
Procedure:
thoroughly.
ing angles.
Fire Dampers
Curtain Fire Damper Sizing Chart - TYPE B
TYPE B
Single Section W = Width (Duct)
W + 1 (25)
H = Height (Duct)
X =WH++1B(25)
B = Blade Stack
(see
W +chart)
1 (25) X
X
For dampers one section

X high:
Duct Height (H) B
TYPE B
Multi-Section High Vertical up to 20" (508)
W + 1 (25) 2" (51)
21" (533) to 32"
W (813)
+ 1 (25) 3" (76)
33" (838) to 42 (1067) 4" (102)
43" (1092) to W
55"
+ 1(1397)
(25) X 5" (127)
X
For VERTICAL dampers two sections high:

X
Duct Height (H) B
up to 64" (1626) 3" (76)
65" (1651) to 84"W(2134)
+ 1 (25) 4" (102)
85" (2134) to 115W(2921)
+ 1 (25) 5" (127)
W + 1 (25) X
TYPE B For HORIZONTAL dampers two
X sections high:
Multi-Section High Horizontal Duct Height (H) B
up to 32" (813) X 4" (102)

position to determine which chart to use.
Curtain Fire Damper Sizing Chart - TYPE C
TYPE C w/Square Inlet
W + 1 (25)
X
H = Height (Duct)
W + 1 (25) X=H+C
C = Blade Stack
(see chart)
X
W + 1 (25)
W + 1 (25)
TYPE C w/Round Inlet For dampers one section high:

X
X Duct Height (H) C
W + 1 (25) up to 20" (508) 3" (76)
21" (533) to 31" (787) 4" (102)
32" (813) to 42 (1067) 5" (127)
X 43" (1092) to 54" (1372) 6" (152)
W + 1 (25) 55" (1397) to 64" (1626) 4" (102)
W + 1 (25) 65" (1651) to 84" (2134) 5" (127)
85" (2159) to 114" (2896) 6" (152)
X
X
W + 1 (25)
TYPE C w/Oval Inlet
X
W + 1 (25)
Fire Dampers
Curtain Fire Damper Sizing Chart - Examples
Type A:
e.g. Duct = 40 x 36 (1016 x 914)
Damper* = 40 x 36 (1016 x 914)
Opening** = 40 x 363/8 (1029 x 924)
Type B:
Damper Height (X) = H + B (see chart on page 1)
e.g. FD-B-V, 1 hour
Duct = 40 x 36 (1016 x 914)
Maximum single section height is 55 (1397) for FDD-B-V, 1 hour
From chart for single section high damper, B = 4 (102)
Damper* = 40 x 40 (1016 x 1016)
Opening** = 40 x 40 (1029 x 1029)
e.g. FDD-B-H, 3 hour
Duct = 24 x 24 (610 x 610)
Maximum single section height is 21 (533) for FDD-B-H
From chart for horizontal 2 section high damper, B = 4 (102)
Damper* = 24 x 28 (610 x 711)
Opening** = 24 x 283/8 (616 x 721)
Type C (square or oval inlet):
Damper Width = W + 1 (25)
Damper Height (X) = H + C (see chart on page 2)
e.g. Duct = 15 x 6 (381 x 152)
Damper* = 16 x 9 (406 x 229)
Dpening** = 16 x 9 (413 x 235)
Type C (round inlet):
Diameter (D) = same as duct
Damper Width = D + 1 (25)
Damper Height (X) = D + C (see chart on page 2)
e.g. Duct = 12 dia. (305)
Damper* = 13 x 15 (330 x 381)
Opening** = 13 x 15 (337 x 387)
Notes:
*- Dampers are ordered by nominal duct size. Actual damper dimension will be
(6) undersized on both height and width.
** - For exact opening sizes applicable see installation instructions.
*** - Damper sizing may vary slightly by model. See charts on submittal drawing
for each model.
Fire Dampers
Although the primary purpose of a fire damper is to maintain the fire resistance of a fire separation, its inclusion in the HVAC system
of a building necessarily affects the air handling characteristics of the system during the normal operating mode. Fire dampers impose
some resistance to air flow and therefore must be considered by the designer in determining the required flow rate (cfm) to each space.
The main design considerations are: Free Area, Flow and Pressure Drop.
FREE AREA:
The total minimum area of the openings in the air outlet or inlet through which air can pass.
Type A
Free Area is expressed in sq. ft.
Duct Width (in.)
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
4 .05 .11 .15 .2 .2 .3 .4 .5 .5 .6 .6 .7 .7 .8 .9
8 .11 .33 .45 .7 .8 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.5
12 .15 .55 .76 .95 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.6 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.6 3.8 3.9
16 .2 .7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.3 4.7 5.1 5.4
20 .2
Duct Height (in.)
.8 1.3 1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.7 4.2 4.7 5.2 5.6 6.1 6.6 7.0
24 .3 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.5 4.9 5.6 6.2 6.8 7.3 7.9 8.5
28 .4 1.2 1.9 2.6 3.2 3.9 4.8 5.4 5.9 6.7 7.3 8.1 8.8 9.4 10.0
32 .5 1.4 2.2 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.8 6.6 7.3 8.1 8.8 9.8 10.4 11.1 11.5
36 .5 1.5 2.4 3.3 4.4 5.3 6.1 7.2 7.8 8.8 9.7 10.8 11.8 12.6 13.1
40 .6 1.7 2.7 3.8 4.8 5.9 6.9 8.0 8.8 9.7 10.7 11.8 12.7 13.8 14.6
44 .6 1.9 2.9 4.0 5.1 6.3 7.3 8.4 9.6 10.8 11.9 12.9 13.9 15.3 16.2
48 .7 2.0 3.2 4.4 5.6 6.9 8.0 9.3 10.5 11.9 13.3 14.1 15.6 16.6 17.7
52 .7 2.2 3.6 4.8 6.1 7.5 8.8 10.2 11.6 12.7 13.9 15.2 16.7 17.9 19.2
56 .8 2.3 3.8 5.3 6.6 8.0 9.5 10.9 12.3 13.6 15.2 16.6 17.9 19.3 20.8
60 .9 2.5 4.0 5.5 7.1 8.6 10.1 11.6 13.2 14.7 16.3 17.8 19.3 20.9 22.5
Type B
Duct Width (in.)
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
4 .06 .15 .2 .3 .4 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3
8 .15 .45 .60 .8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0
12 .2 .70 .88 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.8 3.0 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.3 4.6
16 .3 .8 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.4 5.9 6.3
20 .4
Duct Height (in.)
.9 1.4 2.0 2.7 3.3 3.6 4.1 4.7 5.2 5.7 6.3 6.8 7.4 7.9
24 .4 1.1 1.7 2.3 3.1 3.8 4.3 5.2 5.7 6.3 6.9 7.6 8.2 9.0 9.6
28 .5 1.3 2.2 2.9 3.6 4.4 5.3 5.8 6.6 7.2 8.1 8.8 9.6 10.3 11.0
32 .6 1.4 2.3 3.1 4.2 5.3 5.9 6.9 7.6 8.5 9.4 10.1 11.0 11.8 12.8
36 .7 1.5 2.6 3.5 4.7 5.7 6.6 7.7 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 12.3 13.3 14.3
40 .7 1.9 3.0 3.9 5.2 6.4 7.4 8.6 9.5 10.8 11.2 12.9 13.9 14.9 16.1
44 .7 1.9 3.1 4.3 5.7 6.9 8.2 9.5 10.5 11.7 13.0 14.1 15.3 16.5 17.7
48 .8 2.1 3.4 4.8 6.2 7.6 8.8 10.2 11.4 12.7 14.1 15.5 16.7 18.0 19.4
52 .9 2.3 3.7 5.2 6.7 8.2 9.5 11.1 12.6 13.9 15.3 16.8 18.4 19.7 21.0
56 1.0 2.4 4.0 5.6 7.2 8.8 10.3 11.9 13.5 15.1 16.6 18.2 19.5 21.3 22.6
60 1.2 2.6 4.3 6.0 7.8 9.5 11.1 12.7 14.5 16.0 17.6 19.4 21.0 22.8 24.4
Type C: All 100% Free Area
Note: Above data applies to single section dampers only.
Fire Dampers
Performance Characteristics
FLOW: A dynamic loss of static pressure as a result of damper obstructions. This is expressed as a
measure of the Free Area X Free Area Velocity versus Static Pressure Drop (inches W.G.).
*cfm = Free Area (sq. ft.) x Free Area Velocity (fpm or cfm/sq. ft.)
cfm* cfm* cfm*

Fire Dampers
Type A vs. Type B
The Controversy By offering two frame styles, A and B, to accommodate low and medium velocity duct systems, respectively,
the fire damper industry has attempted to serve the needs of the HVAC designer. However, this accommodation
has inadvertently caused some conflict of interest. To explain, most contractors prefer to use Type A fire dampers
whenever possible because of their low cost and ease of installation (a further cost savings versus Type B). Engi-
neers, on the other hand, prefer the more expensive Type B fire dampers because of their superior air handling
characteristics.
Rule of Thumb As a natural result of these different interests, an industry Rule of Thumb developed:
For low and medium velocity duct up to 12" (305mm) height, use Type B.
For low and medium velocity ducts over 13" (330mm) height, use Type A.
For high velocity duct systems, use Type C.
Third Generation PRICEs third generation fire damper permits improvement in this guideline. By virtue of our narrow blade profile,
we are able to offer greater free area than ordinary Type As. We are also able to offer a less costly fire damper
than the wide blade As which use more material. In summary, our third generation Type A offers the least costly
fire damper with the greatest free area.
Static Pressure Drop (In. W.G.)
SI Units To convert cubic feet per minute (cfm) to cubic meters per second (m3/s) multiply by 0.000 471 947.
To convert feet per minute (fpm) to meters per second (m/s) multiply by 0.005 080.
To convert inches of water to pascals (Pa) or newtons per square meter (N/m2), multiply by 249.082.
To convert square inches to square meters, multiply by 0.000 645 16.
To convert inches to meters, multiply by 0.0254.
Model FRA
Model
16 ga. 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" (38 mm x 38 mm) Formed
size chart.
Installation:
perimeter angles.
sleeve.
Application:
recommended.
Jul / 06
245030
Fire Dampers Dynamic
FDD-A / FDD-A-S Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD-

Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD-A B-SL by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain
by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain-blade type with type B transitions for increased
type for high free area. Dampers shall be free area. Frames shall be constructed of
rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear galvanized steel with U-channel profile
the Underwriters Laboratories label for for narrow profile. Dampers shall be rated
Dynamic Fire Dampers. to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratories label for Dynamic
FDD-A-SL Fire Dampers.
Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD-C / FDD-C-S
FDD-A-SL by PRICE. Dampers shall be of
curtain-blade type for high free area. Frames Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model
shall be constructed of galvanized steel FDD-C by PRICE. Dampers shall be curtain
with U-channel profile for narrow profile. type dampers with type C transitions for
Dampers shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, 100% free area. Dampers shall be rated
and shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the
label for Dynamic Fire Dampers. Underwriters Laboratories label for Dynamic
Fire Dampers.
FDD-VAG
FDD-RD
Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD-
VAG by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain- Round Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be
blade type for high free area, and shall be model FDD-RD by PRICE. Damper blade
mounted in a galvanized steel sleeve with shall be double thickness galvanized steel
a mounting flange on one end. Dampers with welded channel reinforcement. The
shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, and frame shall be constructed of roll-formed
shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories galvanized steel. Dampers shall be rated
label for Dynamic Fire Dampers. as to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the
FDD-HAG Fire Dampers.
Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD- FDD-MB-3V
HAG by PRICE. Dampers shall be of curtain-
blade type for high free area, and shall be Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD-
mounted in a galvanized steel sleeve with MB-3V by PRICE. Damper blades shall be of
a mounting flange on one end. Dampers galvanized steel triple-vee construction.
shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, and Dampers shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112,
shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories
label for Dynamic Fire Dampers. label for Dynamic Fire Dampers. Linkage
shall be of the concealed type for maximum
FDD-OW free area.
Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD-MB-AF
FDD-OW by PRICE. Dampers shall be of
curtain-blade type, and shall be mounted in Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model FDD-
galvanized steel sleeves with thermal blanket MB-AF by PRICE. Damper blades shall be
wrap. Dampers shall be UL/ULC qualified for of double-skinned streamlined (airfoil)
mounting outside of the plane of the wall to construction for minimum pressure drop.
allow through the grille access. Dampers Dampers shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112,
shall be rated to UL555 / ULC S.112, and and shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories
shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories label for Dynamic Fire Dampers. Linkage
label for Dynamic Fire Dampers. shall be of the concealed type for maximum
free area.
FDD-B / FDD-B-S
Dynamic Fire Dampers shall be model
FDD-B by PRICE. Dampers shall be of the
curtain type with type B transitions for
increased free area. Dampers shall be rated
to UL555 / ULC S.112, and shall bear the
Fire Dampers.
FDD-B-SL
Index Date: Dec 2016
Submittal Sheets
Ceiling Damper
Ceiling Damper
CD-RD Butterfly Style, Round 245031 Jul / 06
CD-RD-A Butterfly Style, Round, Adjustable 245031 Jul / 06
CD-S/R-O Butterfly Style, Square or Rectangular "Over diffuser style" 245033 Jul / 06
CD-S/R-OA Butterfly Style, Square or Rectangular "Over diffuser style", Adjustable 245033 Jul / 06
CD-S/R-I Butterfly Style, Square or Rectangular "Inside diffuser style" 245033 Jul / 06
CD-S/R-IA Butterfly Style, Square or Rectangular "Inside diffuser style", Adjustable 245033 Jul / 06
CFS Curtain Style, Square and Rectangular 245034 Jul / 06

CFSB Curtain Style, Square and Rectangular, Oversized "B" style channel transition 245034 Jul / 06
CFSX Curtain Style, Square and Rectangular, c/w thermal blanket skirt 245034 Jul / 06
CFSR-1 Curtain Style, Square or Rectangular, c/w 1 round transition 245035 Jul / 06
CFSR-2 Curtain Style, Square or Rectangular, c/w 2 round transitions 245035 Jul / 06
CFS-2F Curtain Style, Square to Round 245036 Jul / 06
CK-2000-1 1/8" (3mm) thermal blanket 245037 Jul / 06

CK-2000-1-B 11/4" (32mm) thermal blanket 245037 Jul / 06
Ceiling Damper Installation and Accessories

Ceiling Radiation Damper Installation Instructions (Curtain & Butterfly) 245038 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Ceiling Damper Product Summary 245039 Dec / 16
Ceiling Damper Suggested Specifications Dec / 16
Model CD-RD
Round
Ceiling Damper, Butterfly Style
Model
Round, butterfly-type (non-asbestos)
CD-RD
Same as above with adjustable volume
controller. CD-RD-A
Frame: 24 ga. galv. steel.
Blades: 22 ga. galv. steel.
Thermal Blanket: Non-asbestos, ceramic
blanket.
Spring: Corrosion resistant steel spring.
Fusible Link: Replaceable 212F standard.
Others available.
Finish: Mill.
Sizes: 5" minimum (127 mm)
18" maximum (457 mm).
(For sizes 19" (483 mm) and
20" (508 mm) CFSR-2
will be supplied).
UL/ULC Listing: 3-4 hours.
than every 2 years in accordance with the
latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local and
national codes. In addition, the fuse link shall
be removed and inspected for corrosion. Dry
lubricants are recommended.
Jul / 06
245031
Model CD-S/R
Square or Rectangular
Ceiling Damper, Butterfly Style
Model
Square or rectangular butterfly-type (non-
asbestos) for over diffuser neck installa-
tion. CD-S/R-O
controller. CD-S/R-OA
Square or rectangular butterfly-type (non-
asbestos) for inside duct installation.
CD-S/R-I
controller. CD-S/R-IA
Frame: Roll formed, 22 ga. galv. steel.
Blades: 22 ga. galv. steel.
Thermal Blanket: Non-asbestos, ceramic
blanket.
Spring: Corrosion resistant steel spring.
Others available.
Sizes:
Minimum 4"w x 6"h
(102 mm x 152 mm)
Maximum 22"w x 22"h
(559 mm x 559 mm)
Note: Dampers not specified Actual Size
will be sized 1/4" (6 mm) under nominal.
Jul / 06
245033
Model CFS
Square and Rectangular
Ceiling Damper Curtain
Model
Square or rectangular non-asbestos.
CFS
Oversized damper with B channel
transitions. CFSB
Damper with thermal blanket skirt for non-
ducted return air penetrations. CFSX
Blades: Roll formed, 22 ga. galv. steel.
Springs: Stainless steel negator.
Blanket: Non-asbestos, ceramic blanket.
Others available.
Sizes:
Minimum 4"w x 4"h
(102 mm) x (102 mm)
Maximum 24"w x 24"h
(610 mm) x (610 mm)
(Maximum 24"w x 23"h
(610 mm x 584 mm) for CFSB)
Jul / 06
245034
Model CFSR-1 / CFSR-2
c/w Round Transition
Ceiling Damper, Curtain Style
Model
Square or rectangular, non-asbestos damper
with one round transition.
CFSR-1
Same as above with two round transi-
tions. CFSR-2
Blanket: Non-asbestos, ceramic blanket.
Others available.
Sizes:
Minimum 6"w x 6"h
(152 mm) x (152 mm)
Maximum 24"w x 24"h
(610 mm) x (610 mm)
UL/ULC Listing: 4 hours.
Jul / 06
245035
Model CFS-2F
Slimline Frame
Slimline Ceiling Damper, Curtain Style
Model
Square or rectangular, non-asbestos.
CFS-2F
Others available.
Sizes:
Minimum 4"w x 4"h (102mm x 102mm)
Maximum 24"w x 24"h (610mm x 610mm)
UL/ULC Listing: 3 - 4 hours.
Application:
PRICE model CFS-2F ceiling radiation
dampers have been tested, approved, and
classified by Underwriters Laboratories in
an UL Fire Resistance Directory showing a
penetration incorporating a hinge door type
damper. The low profile height of the CFS-
2F damper makes it ideal for small cavity
areas.This damper may be subsitituted into
any UL design which incorporates a hinge
door type damper as outlined in the Fire
Resistance Directory. With the approval of
the local inspector, the damper provides the
appropriate protection along with its low
profile height is the perfect combination
with a ceiling exhaust fan.
Jul / 06
245036
Models CK-2000-1
CK-2000-1-B
Thermal Blankets
Model
Thickness:
1
/8" (3 mm) CK-2000-1
11/4" (32 mm CK-2000-1-B
Features:
Listed and labelled by UL/ULC for open-
ings up to 576 sq. in., (14,630 sq. mm)
rated 4 hrs. or less.
Lightweight, non-asbestos fabric can be
easily installed in the field.
Allows for ceiling openings larger than
duct size. (e.g. lay-in diffusers)
Tested up to 2000F at 4 hours.
Jul / 06
245037
Ceiling Radiation Damper
(Curtain & Butterfly)
Models CD-RD, CD-S/R and CFS

These installation instructions apply to ceiling radiation dampers mounted in 3 hour rated ceiling with supports from (1) a ceiling grid system,
(2) ductwork above, or (3) structure above. Each type of damper support system is described with damper being mounted in conjunction
with various air devices.
Ceiling Radiation Damper Application:
Underwriters Laboratories (UL/ULC) labeled ceiling radiation dampers are designed to function as
a heat barrier in air handling duct outlets penetrating fire resistive membrane ceilings.They provide
the necessary protection for air inlet and outlet penetrations in assembles up to 3 hours, which
are designed incorporating a hinged door damper. They are intended to restore and maintain
the fire resistive integrity of the assembly and are for use in lieu of hinged door type dampers.
Our UL/ULC labeled ceiling radiation dampers may be substituted for hinged door type dampers
in individual ceiling designs as defined in ULs Fire Resistance Directory. For ceiling construction,
refer to the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
General Notes:
All assembly components such as hanger wires, diffuser pans, duct drops, sleeves, and ducts shall
be constructed of steel. The instructions shown in these details are of a general nature. Actual
installation must also conform to the UL Design as listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
Ceiling penetrations should be located within ceiling tiles or panels without necessitating cuts in
the ceiling suspension main runners or cross tees. If required, a maximum of one cross runner
or cross tee may be cut to enable proper damper location and installation. Each cut end shall be
supported by a min. 12 SWG vertical hanger wire. Hanger wires shall not be sprayed. A 1/2" (13mm)
clearance must be maintained between the opening and the cut end of the runner or cross tee. In
installations where the ceiling opening is greater than 1" (25mm) larger (in any direction) than the
ceiling damper, a thermal blanket (CK-2000) shall be used to cover the exposed steel pan of the
grille. If flex duct is used, it must be Class O or I type, bearing the UL listing mark. All butterfly type
dampers are shipped from the factory with the blades closed. Even though one type of damper is
shown in each drawing, all dampers mount in the same manner as the one shown, see Detail A.
Connection Notes:
Attachment at locations, such as grille/damper and damper/duct, shall be min. #8 sheet metal screws,
3
/16" (5mm) steel rivets, 1/4" (6mm) tack welds, or 1/4" (6mm) nut and bolts. Fasteners for square/rectangular3
/16 "connections
(5mm) steel rivets,
shall be1a/4minimum
" (6mm) tackof
one per side spaced on a maximum of 6" (152mm) centers. Fasteners for round connections shall be a minimum of 3 evenly spaced around
the diameter up to a maximum of 6" (152mm) on center. The connection of the damper and grille can be such that the damper slides over
the neck of the grille or inside the throat of the grille. While installing fasteners, take special care so they do not interfere with the operation
of the damper blades. When hanger wires are used, they must hang vertically and not be splayed, they are to be perpendicular to ceiling.
Thermal Blanket:
In those installations where the opening in the ceiling membrane is larger than the ceiling damper (more than 1" (25mm) in any dimension),
a Thermal Insulating Blanket CK-2000-1 or CK-2000-1-B must be installed by laying over the exposed surface of the air inlet or outlet device.
The Thermal Blanket rests upon and protects exposed portions of the air device and may fit inside adjacent Tee Bars (if any), or overhang the
tee bar as with model CFS-X, the blanket may be scored to lay flat on the diffuser, although this is not required. It is important that the blanket
cover the projected area of the opening to prevent radiant heat transfer, but close fit between the blanket and ceiling is not needed.
Special Applications
NOTE: When it is necessary to install the ceiling damper more than 33/4" (95mm)from the
finished ceiling, an additional application of CK-2000-1-B Thermal Blanket is recommended.
A strip of CK-2000-1-B Thermal Blanket should be wrapped around the duct drop or damper
frame (overlapping 1" (25mm) minimum) to completely insulate the additional exposed metal
surface. This additional CK-2000-1-B material must be held in place with suitable steel clamp
or 16 SWG steel wire.
Fusible Link:
All CDB models (Butterfly Type) are shipped from the factory with the blades closed. The fusible
link must be installed at time of installation such that the blades are held open as shown at the
right, Detail B.
Adjustable Control Volume Damper Option (-A)
When the adjustable volume control damper options is added as an accessory to the damper
(Butterfly Models Only), then special consideration needs to be given to the distance between
the damper lower frame and the grille it is being mounted to. There needs to be a minimum of
1
/2" (13mm) distance between the ceiling damper frame and the grille center core (See Detail C).
Before installing damper in ceiling, check for clearances and freedom of movement of adjustable
feature when damper is placed on grille. Also check to see that when the link melts, that the
sides are free to fall to the side and allow the damper blades to close.
Dampers Supported by a Ceiling Grid System
Exposed Tee Bar ceiling grid systems often use Lay In supply and return grilles. With attention to the following requirements, the ceiling
grid system provides all required support for installation of Lay In style ceiling dampers and the grilles.
Ceiling openings up to a 24" x 24" (610mm x 610mm) (576 sq. in.) maximum are allowable. Maximum size limits of each individual ceiling
damper model must be observed.
The four corners of the tee bar containing the air device (or the midpoint of the adjacent cross-tees) shall be directly supported from the
structural members of the floor or roof above it by 12 SWG minimum vertical hanger wires. When the duct extends over the intersections of
the grid members, 16 ga. x 11/2" (38mm) steel channels with 9/16" (14mm) minimum flanges shall be used to ensure that the grid is supported
from structural members by 12 SWG minimum hanger wires. All UL Classified ceiling assemblies require lay-in ceiling panels be cut to fill
the remainder of hole openings larger than 24" x 24" (610mm x 610mm) and shall provide a minimum of 3/8" (10mm) bearing on the ceiling
grid members.
Lay-In Diffuser Non-Ducted or Flex Duct

Application
Lay-In diffuser installs directly into exposed
Tee bar grid system. Ceiling damper attaches
to diffuser neck (See Figure 1)Thermal Blan-
ket may be required (SeeThermal Blanket on
page 1) If flexible duct is used (See General
Notes on page 1) it shall be fastened to the
diffuser neck with a steel clamp or #16 SWG
minimum wire.
(1) The flexible air duct shall not rest on the
back surface of the ceiling grid or panels (pro-
vide a minimum of 4" (102mm) clearance).
(2) The flexible air duct shall not interfere
with the closing of the ceiling damper.
For Models CFS-X (See Fig. 1)

Damper is supported directly by the grid system and may lay on top of perforated metal
(or similar) grille core material Skirt material must overhang theTee bars around perimeter
of the damper.
Lay-In Diffuser With Steel Duct Drop (Figure 2)
Lay-In Diffuser with steel duct drop installs directly into exposed Tee bar grid system.
Thermal Blanket is required (See Thermal Blanket Page 1) Connection of ceiling radiation
damper, diffuser neck, and steel duct drop (See Connection Note Page 1) may be satisifed
in two ways.:
(1) Ceiling radiation damper and diffuser neck may be connected directly to the duct drop
(See Detail D)
OR
(2) Ceiling radiation damper may be connected directly to the diffuser neck and then the
duct drop connected to the damper (See Detail E)
ITEM DESCRIPTION (Figures 2 - 5)

1. Grille Frame (Steel)
2. Diffuser or Grille Core (Metallic or Non-Metallic)
3. Sheet Metal Duct
4. #8 Sheet Metal Screw
5. Ceiling Radiation Damper
6. 16 MSG X 11/2" (38mm) Channel
7. Ceiling Grid (ULClassified)
8. Duct Drop
9. 12 SWG Steel Wire
10. Acoustical Lay-In Panels (UL Classified)
11. Rigid Gypsum/Drywall Wall Board Ceiling (UL Classified)
12. Thermal Blanket, CK-2000
Dampers Supported by Ductwork Above

Note: When main ducts are supported by 16 ga. x 11/2" (38mm) steel channels (with 9/16"
(14mm) minimum flanges) located 1" to 3" (25mm to 76mm) from and on both sides of a
steel duct drop and these channels are suspended by #12 SWG wire from structure above,
the steel duct drop provides all required support for ceiling damper and grilles. Air device
flange must overlap the ceiling membrane by a minimum of 1" (25mm).
Follow guidelines on Page 1 when preparing opening in the ceiling membrane and mak-
ing connections.
Jul / 06 245038 SHEET 2 OF 4
Surface Mounted Grilles (Figure 3)

Maximum size of permitted opening equals maximum size of available listed
ceiling radiation dampers. Opening in ceiling membrane (See Page 1) may be
up to 1" (25mm) larger than the nominal size of the ceiling radiation damper
(i.e. a 12" x 12" (305mm x 305mm) (nominal) ceiling radiation damper could
have a maximum ceiling membrane opening of 13" x 13" (330mm x 330mm)).
Connection of ceiling radiaton damper, grille, and steel duct drop may be
satisfied in two ways.:
(1) Ceiling radiation damper and grille may be connected directly to the duct
drop (See Detail D)
OR
(2) Ceiling radiation damper may be connected directly to the grille and then
the duct drop connected to the damper (See Detail E)
Recess Mounted Grilles (Figure 4)

Opening in ceiling membrane is more than 1" (25mm) larger than nominal size
of ceiling damper (i.e. if the radiation damper is 12" x 12" (305mm x 305mm)
(nominal), the ceiling membrane opening is larger than 13" x 13" (330mm x
330mm)). A Thermal blanket is required.:
Connection of ceiling radiation damper, grille, and steel duct drop may be
satisfied in two ways.
(1) Ceiling radiation damper and grille may be connected directly to the duct
drop (See Detail D)
OR
(2) Ceiling radiation damper may be connected directly to the grille and then
the duct drop connected to the damper (See Detail E)
Dampers Supported Directly From Structure Above
Note: Ceiling radiation dampers and grilles may also be supported directly
from the structure above using one or more of the methods described in Figures
5, and 6. When channels are to be used as support, they must be 16 ga. x 11/2"
(38mm) steel channels with 9/16" (14mm) minimum flanges (2 required per
damper on opposite sides). Grille flange must overlap the ceiling membrane
by a minimum of 1" (25mm).
Refer to guidelines on Page 1 when preparing opening in the ceiling membrane
and making connections.
Ducted and Ductless Surface Mounted Grilles (Figure 5)

Maximum size of permitted opening equals maximum size of available listed
ceiling radiation dampers. Opening in ceiling membrane may be up to 1"
(25mm) larger than the nominal size of the ceiling radiation damper (i.e. a 12"
x 12" (305mm x 305mm) (nominal) ceiling damper could have a maximum
ceiling membrane opening of 13" x 13" (330mm x 330mm) )
Connection of ceiling radiation damper and grille may be satisfied in three ways:
(1) Ceiling radiation damper may be connected directly to the grille and sup-
ported by steel channel (See Detail H)
OR
ported by hanger straps (See Detail F)
OR
ported by direct suspension with wires looped around screws through holes
in the damper frame before tying (See Detail G)
Ducted and Ductless Recess Mounted Grilles (Figure 6)
Opening in ceiling membrane is more than 1" (25mm) larger than nominal
size of ceiling damper (i.e. if the ceiling radiation damper is 12" x 12" (305mm
x 305mm) (nominal) the ceiling membrane opening is larger than 13" x 13"
(330mm x 330mm) ) Maximum size of opening is 24" x 24" (610mm x 610mm)
(576 sq. in.)
Thermal blanket is required (See Thermal Blanket Page 1)
Connection of ceiling radiation damper and air device neck may be satisified
in three ways:
ported by steel channel (See Detail H)
OR
ported by hanger snaps (See Detail F)
OR
ported by direct suspension with wires looped through holes in
the damper frame before tying (See Detail G)
Jul / 06 245038 SHEET 4 OF 4
Ceiling Dampers
Complete Range of 1-4 hour rated Fire/Heat Insulation Devices

& Accessories for Penetrations in Fire-Rated Ceiling Assemblies
MODEL NO. RATING SIZE RANGE APPLICATION
CFS 3-4 Hrs. 4" x 4" (102mm x 102mm) to Square or rectangular steel ducts and/or steel grilles or diffusers
24" x 24" (102mm x 102mm) of the surface mount type.
CFSB 3-4 Hrs. 4" x 4" (102mm x 102mm) to Same as above. Damper with B type transition.
24" x 23" (610mm x 584mm)
CFSX 3-4 Hrs. 4" x 4" (102mm x 102mm) to Square or rectangular openings for non-ducted, plenum return
24" x 24" (610mm x 610mm) air systems.
CD-RD 3-4 Hrs. 5" - 18" (127mm - 457mm) Round neck diffusers with either flex or steel duct connections.
Diameters
CD-RD-A 3-4 Hrs. 5" - 18" (127mm - 457mm) Same as above with adjustable volume controller on damper.
Diameters
CD-S/R 3-4 Hrs. 4 x 6 (102mm x 152mm) to Square or rectangular steel ducts and/or steel grilles or diffusers.
22 x 22 (559mm x 559mm)
CD-S/R-A 3-4 Hrs. 4 x 6 (102mm x 152mm) to Same as above with adjustable volume controller on damper.
22 x 22 (559mm x 559mm)
CFSR-1 4 Hrs. 4" - 22" (102mm - 559mm) Square neck diffusers. 100% free area Damper.
Diameters
6" x 6" (152mm x 152mm) to
24" x 24" (610mm x 610mm)
Dampers
CFSR-2 4 Hrs. 4" - 22" (102mm - 559mm) Round neck diffusers. 100% free area Damper.
Diameters
CK-2000 4 Hrs. 50 Ft./Rolls (15.24m) Thermal Blanket (non-asbestos) for protection of the unexposed
side of lay-in type, steel air diffusers. Cut into four strips on site.
CK-2000-1 4 Hrs. Max. 24x24 (610mm x 610mm) Thermal Blank et (non-asbestos) for protection of the
Diffuser unexposed side of lay-in type steel air diffusers. Die cut single
pieces.
All moving parts of the damper must be inspected and cycled at intervals not greater than every 2 years in accordance with the latest
edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local and national codes. In addition, the fuse link shall be removed and inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants
are recommended.
Dec / 16 245039 SHEET 1 OF 1 Rev.A Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Ceiling Dampers
CD-RD / CD-RD-A CFSR-1 / CFSR-2

Round, butterfly-type Square or rectangular, with round
Round ceiling dampers shall be Model CD- transition(s).
RD or CD-RD-A by PRICE. Ceiling dampers Square to round ceiling dampers shall be
shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories Model CFSR-1 or CFSR-2 by PRICE. Ceiling
label and be rated for both steel duct and dampers shall bear the Underwriters Labo-
flex duct installations. No external damper ratories label and be rated for both steel duct
supports shall be required for ceiling and flex duct installations. Ceiling dampers
dampers up to and including 18" (457 mm) shall be of the non-asbestos, curtain-type
diameter. Ceiling dampers shall be of the for maximum free area.
non-asbestos type and be furnished with a CFS-2F
fusible link volume controller where shown
(Model CD-RD-A). Square or rectangular, slimline frame.
CD-S/R, CD-S/R-A Square and rectangular ceiling curtain
dampers shall be Model CFS-2F by PRICE.
Square or rectangular butterfly-type Ceiling dampers shall bear the Underwrit-
Square and rectangular butterfly ceiling ers Laboratories label and be rated for both
dampers shall be by PRICE. Ceiling dampers ducted or non-ducted air systems. Ceiling
shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories dampers shall be of the non-asbestos,
label and be rated for both steel duct and curtain-type for maximum free area.
flex duct installations. Ceiling dampers shall CK-2000
have been investigated by Underwriters
Laboratories for use in lieu of a hinged door Thermal Blanket
type damper as defined in UL 555C. Note Thermal blanket diffuser protection shall be
that ceiling dampers covered by this scheme Model CK-2000 by PRICE. Thermal blanket
are only intended for use in those UL fire shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories
resistive designs that indicate the use of a label and be rated for the back of diffusers
hinge door type damper in the design. No when used in conjunction with square, rect-
external damper supports shall be required angular, round or square-to-round ceiling
for ceiling dampers. Ceiling dampers shall be dampers as manufactured by PRICE.
of the non-asbestos type and be furnished
with a fusible link, 165F or 212F (74C or
100C) (specifier select one). Curtain fire
dampers are not permitted.
CFS / CFS-B / CFS-X
Square or rectangular, curtain type
Square and rectangular ceiling curtain
dampers shall be Model CFS by PRICE.
Ceiling dampers shall bear the Underwrit-
ers Laboratories label and be rated for both
ducted (CFS and CFS-B ) or non-ducted
(CFS-X) air systems. Ceiling dampers shall
be of the non-asbestos, curtain-type for
maximum free area.
Index Date: October 2012
Submittal Sheets
Fire Smoke Damper
Fire Smoke Damper

FSD-3V-S-211 3V Blade, 1.5hr Rating, Class I 245053 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-3V-S-231 3V Blade, 3hr Rating, Class I 245053 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-3V-S-212 3V Blade, 1.5hr Rating, Class II 245054 (2 sheets) Jul / 06

FSD-3V-S-232 3V Blade, 3hr Rating, Class II 245054 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-3V-FA-211 3V Blade, Front Access Partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class I 245055 (2 sheets) Oct / 12
FSD-3V-FA-212 3V Blade, Front Access Partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class II 245056 (2 sheets) Oct / 12
FSD-3V-OW-211 3V Blade, Out of wall partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class I 245057 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-3V-OW-212 3V Blade, Out of wall partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class II 245058 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-RD-211 True Round, 1.5hr Rating, Class I 245059 (2 sheets) Jul / 06

FSD-RD-212 True Round, 1.5hr Rating, Class II 245060 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-AF-S-211 3V Blade, 1.5hr Rating, Class I 245063 (2 sheets) Jul / 06

FSD-AF-S-231 3V Blade, 3hr Rating, Class I 245063 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-AF-S-212 Airfoil Blade, 1.5hr Rating, Class II 245064 (2 sheets) Jul / 06

FSD-AF-S-232 Airfoil Blade, 3hr Rating, Class II 245064 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-AF-OW-211 Airfoil Blade, Out of wall partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class I 245065 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-AF-OW-212 Airfoil Blade, Out of wall partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class II 245066 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
FSD-AF-FA-211 Airfoil Blade, Front Access Partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class I 245067 (2 sheets) Oct / 12
FSD-AF-FA-212 Airfoil Blade, Front Access Partition, 1.5hr Rating, Class II 245068 (2 sheets) Oct / 12
Submittal Sheets
Fire Smoke Damper
Fire Smoke Damper Installation and Accessories

Fire Smoke Damper Installation Instructions 245069 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Round Fire Smoke Damper Installation Instructions 245070 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Out of Wall Partitions for Fire Dampers (Static & Dynamic)
Support Mullions for Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers
Fabrication and Installation Instructions 245073 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Optional Sealing of Dampers in Fire & Smoke Rated Walls or Floor Openings
Installation Instructions 245074 Jul / 06
Actuator and Jackshaft Dimensions 245075 Oct / 12
Damper Enclosures & Transitions 245076 Oct / 12
Damper Operators 245078 Oct / 12
Duct Mounted Smoke Detector - Mounting Detail 245079 Jul / 06
Single Thermostat Operator Release (O/R) 245081 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Single Thermostat Operator Release (STO/R) 245082 (4 sheets) Jul / 06
Double Thermostat Operator Release (DTO/R) 245083 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Pneumatic Fuse Valve (PFV) and Electric Fusible Link (EFL) 245084 Jul / 06
Micro Switch Package 245085 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Duct Smoke Detector 245087 (4 sheets) May / 11
Micro Switch Package - Shaft Mounted 245091 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Fire Smoke Damper Suggested Specifications Oct / 12
Model FSD-3V-S-211/231
c/w sleeve
U.L. 555S Classified
Leakage Class 1
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper,
U.L. 555 Classified 11/2, 3 Hours
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper
FSD-3V-S-211/231 c/w sleeve
Features
The FSD-3V-S-211/231 c/w sleeve series
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers have
been designed and tested to exceed all
U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements for
fire dampers as well as smoke dampers.
They are intended for use where building
codes call for the fire damper to also
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat-
operate as a smoke damper.
section with staked corners with integral
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and bracing.
labeled as a 11/2 (FSD-3V-S-211) or 3 (FSD-
3V-S-231) hour fire damper. Blades: 16 ga. Roll-formed galvanized steel.
U.L.and U.L.C. listed for both vertical and Minimum width: 41/4" (108mm)
horizontal mountings. Maximum width: 71/4" (184mm)
U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 listed and
Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
labelled as a Leakage Class I rated Smoke
Damper with airflow in both directions. Axles: Square, plated steel.
Class I provides for a maximum leakage Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static blade edge seals and flexible metal jamb
pressure. As we are constantly expanding seals.
our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you
Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
contact the factory for current information.
are 12ga galvanized steel.
Fusible link/actuator (DLT-1) provides
an automatic override system to close Heat Responsive Devices:
and latch damper in the fire mode. Also Fusible Links, 165 F and 212 F
available with automatic resettable/ Snap Disc, 250 F and 350 F
override release options: Model STO/R
(single thermostat) to provide the fire Finish: Mill galvanized.
fighter with complete discretionary Spring: Stainless steel.
control of smoke functions during a fire/ Sizes: Not recommended with blades running
smoke emergency. (See STO/R and DTO/R Minimum Size: vertically.
submittal drawings for complete details). 8"w x 6"h (203mm x 152mm)
Spring return type damper motor Manufacturers Recommendations
controlled by a smoke detector is Maximum UL Listed Size: All moving parts of the damper must be
recommended to provide proper Single Section: inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
operation in the smoke mode. 36"w x 48"h (914mm x 1219mm) than every six months and in accordance
Also available are options EFL (Electric 11/2 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible 108"w x 96"h (2743mm x 2438mm) local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Valve). These options provide quick In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
11/2 Hr. Horizontal: Multiple Assembly inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
and economical ways to check damper 72"w x 96"h (1829mm x 2438mm)
operations and also provide a Systematic recommended.
3 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly Specifications are correct at time of printing.
Closure Control. Option PFV allows
72"w x 96"h (1829mm x 2438mm) However, as part of our continuous improve-
damper operation without the need/cost
for an E-P valve and electrical connection 3 Hr. Horizontal: ment program, we reserve the right to make
at the damper. Maximum UL Listed Size: further improvements without notice.
Available optional 3/4" (19mm) flanged 72"w X 96"h (1829mm x 2438mm)
sleeve for grille mounting (see fig.9 of Notes:
installation instructions). Dampers are furnished approximately
1
/ 4" (6mm) smaller than given duct
dimensions.
Jul / 06
245053
Model FSD-3V-S-211/231 c/w sleeve
Leakage Class 1

Jul / 06 245053 SHEET 2 OF 2
c/w sleeve
Leakage Class 2
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper
FSD-3V-S-212/232 c/w sleeve
Features
The FSD-3V-S-212/232 c/w sleeve series
been designed and tested to exceed all
U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements for
fire dampers as well as smoke dampers.
They are intended for use where building
codes call for the fire damper to also
operate as a smoke damper.
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and
labeled as a 11/2 (FSD-3V-S-212) or 3 (FSD- Standard Construction:
3V-S-232) hour fire damper. Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat-
U.L.and U.L.C. listed for both vertical and section with staked corners with integral
horizontal mountings. bracing.
U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Blades:
labelled as a Leakage Class II rated Smoke 16 ga. Roll-formed galvanized steel.
Damper with airflow in both directions. Minimum width: 41/4" (108mm)
Class II provides for a maximum leakage Maximum width: 71/4" (184mm)
of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
pressure. As we are constantly expanding
our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you Axles: Square, plated steel.
contact the factory for current information. Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
Fusible link/actuator (DLT-1) provides blade edge seals & flexible metal jamb seals.
an automatic override system to close Linkage: Concealed in frame. Dampers are furnished approximately
and latch damper in the fire mode. Also Linkage bars are 12ga galvanized steel.
1
available with automatic resettable/ dimensions.
Heat Responsive Devices: 165 F and
override release options: Model STO/R Not recommended with blades running
212 F.
(single thermostat) to provide the fire vertically.
Snap Disc, 250 F and 350 F
fighter with complete discretionary Manufacturers Recommendations
control of smoke functions during a Finish: Mill galvanized.
fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R and Spring: Stainless steel. inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
DTO/R submittal drawings for complete than every six months and in accordance
Sizes: Minimum Size: 6"w x 6"h
details). Spring return type damper with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
(152mm x 152mm)
motor controlled by a smoke detector local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
is recommended to provide proper Maximum UL Listed Size:
operation in the smoke mode. Single Section: 36"w x 48"h
Also available are options EFL (Electric (914mm x 1219mm)
recommended.
Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible Multiple Assembly:
Valve). These options provide quick Specifications are correct at time of printing.
11/2 Hr. Vertical Maximum 108w X 96h
and economical ways to check damper However, as part of our continuous
(2743mm x 2438mm)
operations and also provide a Systematic improvement program, we reserve the
11/2 Hr. Horizontal Maximum 72w X 96h right to make further improvements without
Closure Control. Option PFV allows (1829mm x 2438mm)
damper operation without the need/cost notice.
for an E-P valve and electrical connection 3 Hr. Vertical Maximum 72w x 96h
at the damper. (1829mm x 2438mm)
Available optional 3/4 (19mm) flanged 3 Hr. Horizontal Maximum 72w X 96h
sleeve for grille mounting (see Fig.9 of (1829mm x 2438mm)
installation instructions). If actuator is to
be externally mounted, it is suggested to
order flange to be field installed. Notes:
Jul / 06
245054
c/w sleeve
Leakage Class 2
Jul / 06 245054 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-3V-FA-211
Leakage Class 1
3V Blade
Front Access and Out of Wall/Partition Application
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper, U.L. 555 Classified 11/2 Hours
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-3V-FA-211
bracing.
Blades: 16 ga. Roll-formed galvanized steel.
Minimum width: 41/4" (108mm)
Maximum width: 71/4" (184mm)
Axles: Square, plated steel.
Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
blade edge seals and flexible metal jamb
seals.
Sleeve: Galvanized, wrapped in thermal
blanket. (Typ. 3 sides)
Fusible Links, 165 F and 212 F
Sizes: Minimum Size: 14"w x 10"h (356mm U.L. and U.L.C. listed for vertical mounting. Also available are options EFL (Electric
x 254mm) U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
Maximum Size: 42"w x 48"h labelled as a Leakage Class I rated Smoke Valve). These options provide quick
(1067mm x 1219mm) Damper with airflow in both directions. and economical ways to check damper
Notes: Dampers are furnished Class I provides for a maximum leakage operations and also provide a Systematic
approximately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static Closure Control. Option PFV allows
given duct dimensions, (not including pressure. As we are constantly expanding damper operation without the need/cost
thermal blanket). our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you for an E-P valve and electrical connection
Wall opening must be oversized by 3/8" contact the factory for current information. at the damper.
(10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket Fusible link/actuator (DLT-1) provides Manufacturers Recommendations
thickness. an automatic override system to close All moving parts of the damper must be
and latch damper in the fire mode. inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Not recommended with blades running Also available with automatic
vertically. than every six months and in accordance
resettable/override release options: with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Features Model STO/R (single thermostat) or local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
The FSD-3V-FA-211 Combination Fire/ Model DTO/R (double thermostat) In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Smoke Dampers have been designed to provide the fire fighter with inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and complete discretionary control of recommended.
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as smoke functions during a fire/smoke
well as smoke dampers.They are intended emergency. (See STO/R and DTO/R Specifications are correct at time of printing.
for use where building codes call for the submittal drawings for complete However, as part of our continuous
fire damper to also operate as a smoke details). Spring return type damper improvement program, we reserve the
damper. motor controlled by a smoke detector right to make further improvements without
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled is recommended to provide proper notice.
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. operation in the smoke mode.
Oct / 12
245055
Model FSD-3V-FA-211
Leakage Class 1
3V Blade
Note - performance data is for

damper active area, and does
not include actuator cabinet. To
determine damper area, subtract
6" (152) from ordered width.
Model FSD-3V-FA-212
Leakage Class 2
3V Blade
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-3V-FA-212
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat
bracing.
seals.
blanket (Typical 3 sides).
Sizes: Minimum Size: 14"w x 10"h (356mm
x 254mm) U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Valve). These options provide quick
Maximum Size: 42"w x 48"h labelled as a Leakage Class II rated Smoke and economical ways to check damper
(1067mm x 1219mm) Damper with airflow in both directions. operations and also provide a Systematic
Notes: Dampers are furnished Class II provides for a maximum leakage Closure Control. Option PFV allows
approximately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static damper operation without the need/cost
given duct dimensions, (not including pressure. As we are constantly expanding for an E-P valve and electrical connection
thermal blanket). our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you at the damper.
contact the factory for current information. Manufacturers Recommendations
Wall opening must be oversized by 3/8"
(10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket Fusible link/actuator (DLT-1) provides All moving parts of the damper must be
thickness. an automatic override system to close inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
and latch damper in the fire mode. than every six months and in accordance
Not recommended with blades running Also available with automatic with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
vertically. resettable/override release options: local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Features Model STO/R (single thermostat) or In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
The FSD-3V-FA-212 Combination Fire/ Model DTO/R (double thermostat) inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Smoke Dampers have been designed to provide the fire fighter with recommended.
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and complete discretionary control of Specifications are correct at time of printing.
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as smoke functions during a fire/smoke However, as part of our continuous
well as smoke dampers.They are intended emergency. (See STO/R and DTO/R improvement program, we reserve the
for use where building codes call for the submittal drawings for complete right to make further improvements without
fire damper to also operate as a smoke details). Spring return type damper notice.
damper. motor controlled by a smoke detector
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled is recommended to provide proper
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. operation in the smoke mode.
U.L.and U.L.C. listed for vertical mounting. Also available are options EFL (Electric
Oct / 12
245056
Model FSD-3V-FA-212
Leakage Class 2
3V Blade

Model FSD-3V-OW-211
Leakage Class 1
3V Blade
Out of Wall/Partition Application
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper, U.L. 555S Classified 11/2 Hours
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-3V-OW-211
bracing.
Seals: Pressure sensitive. Air pressure
assists sealing effects.
blanket.
165 F and 212 F
x 254mm) U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and and economical ways to check damper
Single Sect. Max: 36"w x 48"h (914mm x labelled as a Leakage Class I rated Smoke operations and also provide a Systematic
1219mm) Damper with airflow in both directions. Closure Control. Option PFV allows
Max. Size: 42w x 48h (1067mm x 1219mm) Class I provides for a maximum leakage damper operation without the need/cost
of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static for an E-P valve and electrical connection
Notes: Dampers are furnished pressure. As we are constantly expanding at the damper.
approximately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you
given duct dimensions, (not including Manufacturers Recommendations
contact the factory for current information. All moving parts of the damper must be
thermal blanket).
Fusible link/actuator (DLT-1) provides inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Wall opening must be oversized by 3/8 an automatic override system to close than every six months and in accordance
(10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket and latch damper in the fire mode. Also with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
thickness. Not recommended with blades available with automatic resettable/ local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
running vertically. override release options: Model In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Features STO/R (single thermostat) or DTO/R inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
The FSD-3V-OW-211 series Combination (double thermostat) to provide the fire recommended.
Fire/Smoke Dampers have been designed fighter with complete discretionary Specifications are correct at time of printing.
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and control of smoke functions during However, as part of our continuous
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as a fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R improvement program, we reserve the
well as smoke dampers.They are intended and DTO/R submittal drawings for right to make further improvements without
for use where building codes call for the complete details). Spring return type notice.
fire damper to also operate as a smoke damper motor controlled by a smoke
damper. detector is recommended to provide
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled proper operation in the smoke mode.
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. Also available are options EFL (Electric
U.L. and U.L.C. listed for vertical & Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
horizontal mounting. Valve). These options provide quick
Jul / 06
245057
Model FSD-3V-OW-211
Leakage Class 1
3V Blade
Jul / 06 245057 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-3V-OW-212
Leakage Class 2
3V Blade
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-3V-OW-212
bracing.
Seals: Pressure sensitive. Air pressure
assists sealing effects.
blanket.
165 F and 212 F
x 254mm) U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and and economical ways to check damper
Single Sect. Max: 36"w x 48"h (914mm x labelled as a Leakage Class II rated Smoke operations and also provide a Systematic
1219mm) Damper with airflow in both directions. Closure Control. Option PFV allows
Class II provides for a maximum leakage damper operation without the need/cost
Max. Size: 42w x 48h (1067mm x 1219mm) of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static for an E-P valve and electrical connection
Notes: Dampers are furnished pressure. As we are constantly expanding at the damper.
approximately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you Manufacturers Recommendations
given duct dimensions, (not including contact the factory for current information. All moving parts of the damper must be
thermal blanket). Fusible link/actuator provides an inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Wall opening must be oversized by 3/8 automatic override system to close and than every six months and in accordance
(10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket latch damper in the fire mode. Also with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
thickness. Not recommended with blades available with automatic resettable/ local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
running vertically. override release options: Model In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Features STO/R (single thermostat) or DTO/R inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
The FSD-3V-OW-212 series Combination (double thermostat) to provide the fire recommended.
Fire/Smoke Dampers have been designed fighter with complete discretionary Specifications are correct at time of printing.
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and control of smoke functions during However, as part of our continuous
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as a fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R improvement program, we reserve the
well as smoke dampers.They are intended and DTO/R submittal drawings for right to make further improvements without
for use where building codes call for the complete details). Spring return type notice.
fire damper to also operate as a smoke damper motor controlled by a smoke
damper. detector is recommended to provide
proper operation in the smoke mode.
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. Also available are options EFL (Electric
U.L. and U.L.C. listed for vertical & Valve). These options provide quick
horizontal mounting.
Jul / 06
245058
Model FSD-3V-OW-212
Leakage Class 2
3V Blade
Jul / 06 245058 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-RD-211
Leakage Class 1
True Round
Model with 2,000 FPM airflow in both directions.

Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-RD-211 Class I provides for a maximum leakage
of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static
Standard Construction: pressure. As we are constantly expanding
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel,16" our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you
(406mm) long, integral sleeve. contact the factory for current information.
Blades: Double thickness gal-vanized steel, Actuator shaft permits operation by
14 ga. equivalent with welded channel re- any standard electric or pneumatic
inforcement. damper motor. Fusible link/actuator
Bearings: Bronze Oilite press-fit into frame. (DLT-1) provides an automatic
Axles: 3/8" (10mm) square plated steel. override system to close and latch
damper in the fire mode. Also
Jackshaft: 1/2" (13mm) diameter plated available with automatic resettable/
steel. override release options: Model
Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone STO/R (single thermostat) and
sandwiched between blades. DTO/R (dual thermostat override)
Linkage: Jackshaft to blade. to provide the fire fighter with
complete discretionary control of
Fusible Link: 165F standard, 212F smoke functions during a fire/smoke
available. emergency. (See STO/R and DTO/R
Spring: Stainless steel. submittal drawings for complete
Finish: Mill galvanized. details). Spring return type damper
motor controlled by a smoke detector
Sizes: 8" - 24" (203mm - 610mm) diameter. is recommended to provide proper
Retaining Plates: 2-20 ga. galvanized steel operation in the smoke mode.
complete with angle clips. Manufacturers Recommendations
Note: All moving parts of the damper must be
Retaining plate on operator side of damper inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
is installed at the factory. than every six months and in accordance
Dampers are furnished approximately with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
1
/ 8" (3mm) smaller than given duct local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
dimensions. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Features inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
The FSD-RD-211 series Combination Fire/ recommended.
Smoke Dampers have been designed Specifications are correct at time of printing.
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and However, as part of our continuous
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as improvement program, we reserve the
well as smoke dampers.They are intended right to make further improvements without
for use where building codes call for the notice.
fire damper to also operate as a smoke
damper.
as a 11/2 hour fire damper.
U.L.and U.L.C. listed for vertical and
horizontal mountings.
U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 listed and labelled
as a Leakage Class I rated Smoke Damper
Jul / 06
245059
Model FSD-RD-211
Leakage Class 1
True Round
Jul / 06 245059 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-RD-212
Leakage Class 2
True Round
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-RD-212
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel,16"
(406mm) long, integral sleeve.
inforcement.
Axles: 3/8" (10mm) square plated steel.
Jackshaft: 1/2" (13mm) diameter plated
steel.
sandwiched between blades.
Fusible Link: 165F standard, 212F
available.
Sizes: 8" - 24" (203mm - 610mm) diameter. with airflow in both directions. Class II All moving parts of the damper must be
Retaining Plates: 2-20 ga. galvanized steel provides for a maximum leakage of 20 cfm inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
complete with angle clips. per sq. ft. at 4.0 inch static pressure. As we than every six months and in accordance
are constantly expanding our U.L./U.L.C. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Note: listings, we suggest you contact the local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Retaining plate on operator side of damper factory for current information. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
is installed at the factory. inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Dampers are furnished approximately Actuator shaft permits operation by
any standard electric or pneumatic recommended.
1
dimensions. damper motor. Fusible link/actuator Specifications are correct at time of printing.
(DLT-1) provides an automatic However, as part of our continuous
Features override system to close and latch improvement program, we reserve the
The FSD-RD-212 series Combination Fire/ damper in the fire mode. Also right to make further improvements without
Smoke Dampers have been designed available with automatic resettable/ notice.
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and override release options: Model STO/R
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as (single thermostat) to provide the fire
well as smoke dampers.They are intended fighter with complete discretionary
for use where building codes call for the control of smoke functions during
fire damper to also operate as a smoke a fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R
damper. and DTO/R submittal drawings for
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled complete details). Spring return type
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. damper motor controlled by a smoke
U.L.and U.L.C. listed for horizontal & detector is recommended to provide
vertical mountings. proper operation in the smoke mode.
U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 listed and labelled Manufacturers Recommendations
as a Leakage Class II rated Smoke Damper
Jul / 06
245060
Model FSD-RD-212
Leakage Class 2
True Round
Jul / 06 245060 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-AF-S-211/231
c/w Sleeve
Leakage Class 1 Airfoil Blade
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper, U.L. 555 Classified 11/2, 3 Hours
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper
FSD-AF-S-211/231 c/w Sleeve
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel
hatsection with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Blades: Airfoil-shaped, double skin
galvanized steel of roll-formed construction.
Mechanically joined to form construction
equivalent to 14 ga. steel.
Minimum width 5" (127mm)
Maximum width 7" (178mm)
Axles: Square, plated steel. The FSD-AF-211/231 c/w sleeve series
been designed and tested to provide a
complete range of performance features
seals.
when used in engineered smoke control
Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars systems.
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and
Heat Responsive Devices: labeled as a 11/2 (FSD-AF-S-211) or 3 (FSD-
Fusible Links, 165 F and 212 F AF-S-231) hour fire damper.
Snap Disc, 250 F and 350 F U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
Finish: Mill galvanized. labelled as a Leakage Class I rated Smoke Valve). These options provide quick
Damper with airflow in both directions. and economical ways to check damper
Spring: Stainless steel. operations and also provide a Systematic
Class I provides for a maximum leakage
Sizes: Minimum Size: 8"w x 8"h of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static Closure Control. Option PFV allows
(203mm x 203mm) pressure. As we are constantly expanding damper operation without the need/cost
Maximum UL/ULC Listed Size: our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest for an E-P valve and electrical connection
Single Section: 36"w x 48"h you contact the factory for current at the damper.
(914mm x 1219mm) information. Available optional 3/ 4 (19) flanged
11/2 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly-108"w Streamlined airfoil blades to provide sleeve for grille mounting (see Fig.9 of
x 96"h (2743mm x 2438mm) low pressure drop and reduced air installation instructions). If actuator is to
turbulence for quiet operation. be externally mounted, it is suggested to
11/2 Hr. Horizontal: Multiple Assembly- order flange to be field installed.
36w x 48h (914mm x 1219mm) Fusible link/actuator provides an
automatic override system to close and Manufacturers Recommendations
3 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly-72w x All moving parts of the damper must be
latch damper in the fire mode. Also
96h (1829mm x 2438mm) inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
available with automatic resettable/
3 Hr. Horizontal: Maximum UL/ULC Listed override release options: Model than every six months and in accordance
Size: 36w X 48h (914mm x 1219mm) STO/R (single thermostat) or DTO/R with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Notes: (double thermostat) to provide the fire local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Dampers are furnished approximately 1/4" fighter with complete discretionary In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
smaller than given duct dimensions. control of smoke functions during a inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R recommended.
and DTO/R submittal drawings for Specifications are correct at time of printing.
vertically.
complete details). Spring return type However, as part of our continuous
Features damper motor controlled by a smoke improvement program, we reserve the
detector is recommended to provide right to make further improvements without
proper operation in the smoke mode. notice.
Jul / 06
245063
Model FSD-AF-S-211/231 c/w Sleeve
Leakage Class 1
Airfoil Blade
Jul / 06 245063 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-AF-S-212/232
c/w Sleeve
Leakage Class 2
Airfoil Blade
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper, U.L. 555 Classified 1 /2, 3 Hours 1
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper
FSD-AF-S-212/232 c/w Sleeve
Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel
hatsection with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Minimum width 5" (127mm)
Maximum width 7" (178mm)
Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame. Features
Axles: Square, plated steel. The FSD-AF-S-212/232 series Combination
Fire/Smoke Dampers have been designed
Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone and tested to provide a complete range
blade edge seals and flexible metal jamb of performance features when used in
seals. engineered smoke control systems.
Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and
are 12ga galvanized steel. labeled as a 11/2 (FSD-AF-S-212) or 3 (FSD-
Heat Responsive Devices: AF-S-232) hour fire damper. Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
Fusible Links, 165 F and 212 F U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Valve). These options provide quick
labelled as a Leakage Class II rated Smoke and economical ways to check damper
Snap Disc, 250 F and 350 F operations and also provide a Systematic
Damper with airflow in both directions.
Finish: Mill galvanized. Class II provides for a maximum leakage Closure Control. Option PFV allows
Spring: Stainless steel. of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static damper operation without the need/cost
pressure. As we are constantly expanding for an E-P valve and electrical connection
Sizes: Minimum Size: 8"w x 8"h at the damper.
(203mm x 203mm) our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you
contact the factory for current information. Available optional 3/4 (19mm) flanged
Maximum UL/ULC Listed Size: sleeve for grille mounting (see Fig.9 of
Single Section: 36"w x 48"h Streamlined airfoil blades to provide
low pressure drop and reduced air installation instructions). If actuator is to
(914mm x 1219mm) be externally mounted, it is suggested to
turbulence for quiet operation.
11/2 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly-108"w order flange to be field installed.
x 96"h (2743mm x 2438mm) Fusible link/actuator provides an
automatic override system to close and Manufacturers Recommendations
11/2 Hr. Horizontal: Multiple Assembly- latch damper in the fire mode. Also All moving parts of the damper must be
36w x 48h (914mm x 1219mm) available with automatic resettable/ inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
3 Hr. Vertical: Multiple Assembly-72w x override release options: Model than every six months and in accordance
96h (1829mm x 2438mm) STO/R (single thermostat) or DTO/R with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
(double thermostat) to provide the fire local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
3 Hr. Horizontal: Maximum UL/ULC Listed In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
Size: 36w x 48h (914mm x 1219mm) fighter with complete discretionary
control of smoke functions during inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Notes: a fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R recommended.
Dampers are furnished approximately and DTO/R submittal drawings for Specifications are correct at time of printing.
1
/ 4" (6mm) smaller than given duct complete details). Spring return type However, as part of our continuous
dimensions. damper motor controlled by a smoke improvement program, we reserve the
Not recommended with blades running detector is recommended to provide right to make further improvements without
vertically. proper operation in the smoke mode. notice.
Jul / 06
245064
Model FSD-AF-S-212/232 c/w Sleeve
Leakage Class 2
Airfoil Blade
Jul / 06 245064 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-AF-OW-211
Leakage Class 1
Airfoil Blade
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-AF-OW-211
bracing.
equivalent to 14 ga. steel.Minimum 5"
(127mm) wide, maximum 7" (178mm) wide.
Seals: High temperature inflatable silicone
to 450F. Air pressure assists sealing effects.
blanket.
of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static Closure Control. Option PFV allows
x 254mm)
pressure. As we are constantly expanding damper operation without the need/cost
Single Sect. Max: 36"w x 48"h (914mm x
our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you for an E-P valve and electrical connection
1219mm)
contact the factory for current information. at the damper.
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- Streamlined airfoil blades to provide Manufacturers Recommendations
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct low pressure drop and reduced air All moving parts of the damper must be
dimensions, (not including thermal blanket). turbulence for quiet operation. inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Wall opening must be oversized by 3/8" Fusible link/actuator provides an than every six months and in accordance
(10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket automatic override system to close with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
thickness. and latch damper in the fire mode.Also local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Not recommended with blades running available with automatic resettable/ In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
vertically. override release options: Model inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
STO/R (single thermostat) or DTO/R recommended.
Features
(double thermostat) to provide the fire Specifications are correct at time of printing.
The FSD-AF-OW-211 series Combination
fighter with complete discretionary However, as part of our continuous
Fire/Smoke Dampers have been designed
control of smoke functions during improvement program, we reserve the
and tested to provide a complete range
a fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R right to make further improvements without
of performance features when used in
and DTO/R submittal drawings for notice.
engineered smoke control systems.
complete details). Spring return type
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled damper motor controlled by a smoke
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. detector is recommended to provide
U.L. and U.L.C. listed for vertical & proper operation in the smoke mode.
horizontal mounting. Also available are options EFL (Electric
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
labelled as a Leakage Class I rated Smoke Valve). These options provide quick
Damper with airflow in both directions. and economical ways to check damper
Class I provides for a maximum leakage operations and also provide a Systematic
Jul / 06
245065
Model FSD-AF-OW-211
Leakage Class 1
Airfoil Blade
Jul / 06 245065 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-AF-OW-212
Leakage Class 2
Airfoil Blade
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-AF-OW-212
bracing.
equivalent to 14 ga. steel. Minimum 5"
(127mm) wide, maximum 7" (178mm) wide.
blanket.
Sizes: Minimum Size: 12"w x 10"h (305mm of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static
x 254mm) pressure. As we are constantly expanding
Single Sect. Max: 36"w x 48"h our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you
(914mm x 1219mm) contact the factory for current information.
Max. Size: 42"w x 48"h (1067mm x 1219mm) Streamlined airfoil blades to provide operations and also provide a Systematic
low pressure drop and reduced air Closure Control. Option PFV allows
Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi- damper operation without the need/cost
mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct turbulence for quiet operation.
for an E-P valve and electrical connection
dimensions, (not including thermal blanket). Fusible link/actuator provides an at the damper.
Wall opening must be oversized by 3/8" automatic override system to close and
(10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket latch damper in the fire mode. Also Manufacturers Recommendations
thickness. available with automatic resettable/ All moving parts of the damper must be
override release options: Model inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Features than every six months and in accordance
The FSD-AF-OW-212 series Combination STO/R (single thermostat) or DTO/R
(double thermostat) to provide the fire with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Fire/Smoke Dampers have been designed local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
and tested to provide a complete range fighter with complete discretionary
control of smoke functions during In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
of performance features when used in inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
engineered smoke control systems. a fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R
and DTO/R submittal drawings for recommended.
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. complete details). Spring return type Specifications are correct at time of printing.
damper motor controlled by a smoke However, as part of our continuous
U.L. and U.L.C. listed for vertical & detector is recommended to provide improvement program, we reserve the
horizontal mounting. proper operation in the smoke mode. right to make further improvements without
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Also available are options EFL (Electric notice.
labelled as a Leakage Class II rated Smoke Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
Damper with airflow in both directions. Valve). These options provide quick
Class II provides for a maximum leakage and economical ways to check damper
Jul / 06
245066
Model FSD-AF-OW-212
Leakage Class 2
Airfoil Blade
Jul / 06 245066 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model FSD-AF-FA-211
Leakage Class 1
Airfoil Blade
Front Access & Out of Wall/Partition Application
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-AF-FA-211
bracing.
Minimum 5" (127mm) wide,
Maximum 7" (178mm) wide.
Heat Responsive Devices: U.L.and U.L.C. listed for vertical mounting. and economical ways to check damper
Fusible Links, 165 F and 212 F U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and operations and also provide a Systematic
Snap Disc, 250 F and 350 F labelled as a Leakage Class I rated Smoke Closure Control. Option PFV allows
Damper with airflow in both directions. damper operation without the need/cost
Finish: Mill galvanized. for an E-P valve and electrical connection
Spring: Stainless steel. of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static at the damper.
Sizes: Minimum Size: 14"w x 10"h pressure. As we are constantly expanding Manufacturers Recommendations
(356mm x 254mm) our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you All moving parts of the damper must be
Maximum Size: 42"w x 48"h contact the factory for current information. inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
(1067mm x 1219mm) Fusible link/actuator (DLT-1) provides than every six months and in accordance
Notes: Dampers are furnished an automatic override system to close with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
approximately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given and latch damper in the fire mode. local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
duct dimensions, (not including thermal Also available with automatic In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
blanket). Wall opening must be oversized by resettable/override release options: inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
3
/8" (10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket Model STO/R (single thermostat) or recommended.
thickness. Not recommended with blades Model DTO/R (double thermostat) Specifications are correct at time of printing.
running vertically. to provide the fire fighter with However, as part of our continuous
Features complete discretionary control of improvement program, we reserve the
The FSD-AF-FA-211 Combination Fire/ smoke functions during a fire/smoke right to make further improvements without
Smoke Dampers have been designed emergency. (See STO/R and DTO/R notice.
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and submittal drawings for complete
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as details). Spring return type damper
well as smoke dampers.They are intended motor controlled by a smoke detector
for use where building codes call for the is recommended to provide proper
fire damper to also operate as a smoke operation in the smoke mode.
damper. Also available are options EFL (Electric
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. Valve). These options provide quick
Oct / 12
245067
Model FSD-AF-FA-211
Leakage Class 1
Airfoil Blade

Model FSD-AF-FA-212
Leakage Class 2
Airfoil Blade
Model
Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-AF-FA-212
bracing.
Minimum 5" (127mm) wide,
Maximum 7" (178mm) wide.
Heat Responsive Devices: U.L.and U.L.C. listed for vertical mounting. Closure Control. Option PFV allows
Fusible Links, 165 F and 212 F U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and damper operation without the need/cost
Snap Disc, 250 F and 350 F labelled as a Leakage Class II rated Smoke for an E-P valve and electrical connection
Damper with airflow in both directions. at the damper.
Class II provides for a maximum leakage Manufacturers Recommendations
Spring: Stainless steel. of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static All moving parts of the damper must be
Sizes: Minimum Size: 14"w x 10"h pressure. As we are constantly expanding inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
(356mm x 254mm) our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you than every six months and in accordance
Maximum Size: 42"w x 48"h contact the factory for current information. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
(1067mm x 1219mm) Fusible link/actuator (DLT-1) provides local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
Notes: Dampers are furnished an automatic override system to close In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
approximately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given and latch damper in the fire mode. Also inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
duct dimensions, (not including thermal available with automatic resettable/ recommended.
blanket). Wall opening must be oversized by override release options: Model STO/R Specifications are correct at time of printing.
3
/8" (10mm) to accomodate thermal blanket (single thermostat) or Model DTO/R However, as part of our continuous
thickness. Not recommended with blades (double thermostat) to provide the fire improvement program, we reserve the
running vertically. fighter with complete discretionary right to make further improvements without
Features control of smoke functions during notice.
The FSD-AF-FA-212 Combination Fire/ a fire/smoke emergency. (See STO/R
Smoke Dampers have been designed and DTO/R submittal drawings for
and tested to exceed all U.L., U.L.C. and complete details). Spring return type
N.F.P.A. requirements for fire dampers as damper motor controlled by a smoke
well as smoke dampers.They are intended detector is recommended to provide
for use where building codes call for the proper operation in the smoke mode.
fire damper to also operate as a smoke Also available are options EFL (Electric
damper. Fusible Link) and PFV (Pneumatic Fusible
U.L. 555 and U.L.C. S112 listed and labelled Valve). These options provide quick
as a 11/2 hour fire damper. and economical ways to check damper
operations and also provide a Systematic
Oct / 12
245068
Model FSD-AF-FA-212
Leakage Class 2
Airfoil Blade

Fire/Smoke Dampers
Important General Notes: gypsum or wood stud/gypsum partitions the fire barrier more than 6"(152mm)
When UL is referred to in this document, are being used then refer to Fig. 1-3 for unless an actuator or factory installed
it represents UL/ULC. This installation additional information and details. access door is supplied, then the sleeve
instruction applies to Combination Fire/ A. Damper Assemblies Using 2 Angles may extend up to 16"(406mm). Sleeve
Smoke Dampers (3V, Airfoil, Parallel, Methods (see note 4a) shall be a minimum shall terminate at both sides of wall within
Opposed, Single, and Multi-blade types) of 1/8"(3mm) per linear foot (305mm) of dimensions shown. If a rigid connection is
mounted in the plane of an UL approved height and width of sleeved assembly used, then the sleeve shall be a minimum
fire partition. Combination Fire /Smoke up to a maximum of 1 1/2(38mm) and a of 16 gage for dampers up to 36"(914mm)
Dampers are approved for use in Static minimum of 1/4 (6mm). The maximum wide by 24"(610mm) high and 14 gage for
or Dynamic Systems. The dampers are single section multi-blade damper is 36"x48" dampers exceeding 36"(914mm) wide by
designed for operation in the vertical or (914mmx1219mm) in vertical or horizontal 24"(610mm) high.
horizontal position with blades running mountings.This method is acceptable for 1 1/2 Round and oval breakaway connections
horizontal. The dampers are to be installed and 3 hour fire dampers. See Underwriters must use either a 4"(102mm) wide draw
square and free from twisting or racking. Laboratories Listings for maximum multiple band or #10 (M5) sheet metal screws
The dampers shall not be compressed or assembly sizes. spaced equally around the circumference
stretched into the opening. of the duct as follows: 3 screws for duct
B. Damper Assemblies Using 1 Angle
Transportation and installation of the Methods (see note 4b) shall be a minimum sizes 22"(559mm) and smaller; 5 screws for
dampers shall be handled with the sleeve or of 1/8"(3mm) per linear foot (305mm) of duct sizes greater than 22"(559mm) and up
frame. Do not lift the damper with the blades height and width of sleeved assembly up to to and including 36"(914mm): 8 screws for
or actuator. Special care shall be given to a maximum of 1 1/2 (38mm) and a minimum duct sizes greater than 36"(914mm). Refer
the damper before installation and after to of 1/4(6mm). The maximum single section to SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation
insure it is protected against dirt, weather, is the same as in A above. The maximum Damper Guide for HVAC Systems for
mortar and drywall dust, wall texture and multi-section is 108"w and 108"h (2743mm information on Ductmate, Nexus, Ward,
paint. Any of these conditions could cause x 2743mm) up to 36 square feet (3.345 sq. TDC and TDF systems and any additional
the damper not to operate correctly and meters). This method is acceptable for 1 1/2 information (Fig. 5-6). A sleeve may not be
void the warranty. Suitable access to inside hour fire dampers mounted in a masonry/ required if the damper frame is of sufficient
duct is to be provided for inspection and concrete or steel stud/ gypsum wall only. size and shape so the mounting angles can
replacement of parts such as heat response be directly fastened to it.
devices and actuators per NFPA 90A and C. Damper Assemblies Using No Angles
Methods (see note 4c) shall be a minimum 3. Multi-Section and Damper to
local authority having jurisdiction.The need Sleeve Connections:
to seal the damper in the penetration is not of 1/4"(6mm) and a maximum of 1/2 (13mm).
The maximum single section is the same Damper shall be secured to the sleeve
required by Underwriters Laboratories. and to each other (when joined to make
PRICE dampers have been tested and as in A above. The maximum multi-section
is 42"w x 48"h (1067mm x 1219mm). This multiple damper assemblies) with #10
approved to be mounted without the use sheet metal screws, 1/4(6mm) nut and
of sealants around the perimeter space method is acceptable for 11/2 hour fire
dampers mounted in a masonry/concrete bolts, 1/4(6mm) tack welds, 3/16(5mm) steel
between the damper and the penetration. rivets, spot welds, or clinching(toggle) on
As with all joints, contractor must seal or steel stud/gypsum wall only.
6" (152mm) centers.
duct-collar connections in the field after 2. Damper Sleeves and Breakaway
installation. PRICE Model numbers which are Connections: When field assembling multi-sections,
UL approved to utilize this installation are Sleeves shall be of the SAME GAUGE or a continuous 1/8 (3mm) bead of Dow
FSD-3V-211, FSD-3V-212, FSD-3V-231, heavier as the duct to which it is attached, Corning 999, Dow Corning Silastic 732,
FSD-3V-232, FSD-AF-211, FSD-AF-212, if one of the breakaway connections is used Nuflex 302, or GE RTV 108 Sealant shall
FSD-AF-231, FSD-AF-232. as defined in the SMACNA Fire, Smoke and be applied to the frame joints and where
Radiation Damper Guide for HVAC Systems the frame connects to the sleeve. Sealant
1. Opening Preparation/Clearances: is required only on one side of the damper.
The fire barrier opening shall be larger than (Fig. 4-6) and in NFPA 90A. Gauges shall
conform to SMACNA or ASHRAE duct Press the surface of the sealant in place to
the damper to allow for thermal expansion dispel any air.
and ease of installation. When steel stud/ standards. Sleeves shall not extend beyond
Fire/Smoke Dampers

Opening:
used. This method is approved for use in
UL approved concrete/masonry partitions,
steel stud/gypsum walls, and wood stud/
gypsum walls. In this method 2 sets of
angles are used to secure the damper in the
opening, one on each side of the partition
(See Fig. 7). Two Angle Method is approved
for 11/2 and 3 hour dampers, vertical or
horizontal orientation, and any maximum
size multi-section UL approved damper
(see Underwriters Laboratories Listings for
maximum assembly sizes). Angles shall be
a minimum of 11/2 x 11/2 (38mm x 38mm)
x 16 gauge. Angles are to be fastened to the
sleeve on 6" (152mm) centers with #10 (M5)
sheet metal screws, 3/16" (5mm) steel pop
rivets, 1/2 (13mm) tack welds, or 1/4 (6mm)
diameter nut and bolts with not more than
the duct work terminates at the damper or concrete screws on 6 (152mm) centers and and horizontal (flange on top side only)
installation prohibits angles from turning out/ must engage the fire partition a minimum of orientations, and the maximum size shall be
away from the wall, the retaining angle shall 11/2 (38mm); in steel stud/gypsum partitions 42 (1067mm) wide by 48 (1219mm) high up
be reversed (leg turned into the opening) secure the angles to the partition with #10 to the maximum multi-section UL approved
providing the size of the opening is increased (M5) screws long enough to penetrate the damper size (see Underwriters Laboratories
by an amount equal to twice the combined J-Runners and E-Stud by a minimum of 3/8 Listings for maximum assembly sizes). The
thickness of the angle and the height of the (10mm). Use a minimum of two fasteners per sleeve flange shall be a minimum of 3/4
screw or bolthead to maintain expansion side.The angles are to overlap the partition a (19mm) high by 20 gauge steel. If a flange/
clearances. See note 1A for information on minimum of 1 (25mm).These angles may be angle is added, it shall be a minimum of 1
clearances. See Fig. 7 for detailed drawings of a unit type construction and may or may x 1 (25mm x 25mm) by 18 gauge steel and
of installations. not be fastened to each other at the corners. fastened with #10 (M5) bolts or screws, 1/2
b. One Angle (Single Sided) Method: In When the duct work terminates at the (13mm) welds, or 3/16 (5mm) rivets to the
this method 1 set of angles are used to secure damper or installation prohibits angles from sleeve, at a maximum spacing of 6 (152mm)
the damper in the opening. This method is turning out/away from the wall, the retaining o.c., not more than 2 (51mm) from each
approved for use in UL approved concrete/ angle shall be reversed (leg turned into the end with a minimum of two fasteners per
masonry partitions and steel stud/gypsum opening) providing the size of the opening side. The sleeve is to be fastened to the fire
walls. Only one side of the fire partition is increased by an amount equal to twice partition with: in concrete/masonry partitions
will have the angles installed (see Fig. 8). the combined thickness of the angle and the with #10 self-tapping concrete anchors or
One Angle Method is approved for 11/2 height of the screw or bolt head to maintain concrete screws on 6 (152mm) centers and
hour dampers only, vertical and horizontal expansion clearances. Angles can be placed must engage the fire partition a minimum of
(angles on top side only) orientations, and in front of or behind the drywall attaching 11/2 (38mm); in steel stud/gypsum partitions
the maximum size shall be 108 wide or 108 directly to the steel studs or masonry. PRICEs secure the angles to the partition with #10
high (2743mm x 2743mm) up to 36 square Frame Retaining Angles (FRA) can be used (M5) screws long enough to penetrate the
feet and up to the maximum multi-section in place of the angle mentioned above. See J-Runners and E-Stud by a minimum of 3/8
UL approved damper size (see Underwriters note 1B for information on clearances. See (10mm). Use a minimum of two fasteners
Laboratories Listings for maximum assembly Fig. 8 for detailed drawings of installations. per side. The sleeve flange can be placed
sizes). Angle shall be a minimum of 11/2 x c. No Angle Method: In this method No in front of or behind the drywall attaching
11/2 (38mm x 38mm) by 16 gauge. Angles are angles are used to secure the damper in the directly to the steel studs or masonry. Be
to be fastened to the sleeve on 6 (152mm) opening.This method is approved for use in sure to not stretch the damper when securing
centers with #10 (M5) sheet metal screws, UL approved concrete/masonry partitions it into the partition. Stretching the damper
3
/16 (5mm) steel pop rivets, 1/2 (13mm) tack and steel stud/gypsum walls. This method can cause it to bind up and prevent it from
welds, or 1/4 (6mm) diameter nut and bolts uses a minimum 3/4 (19mm) flange is on operating properly. PRICEs Frame Retaining
with not more than 2 (51mm) from each one end of the sleeve. The damper/sleeve Angles (FRA) can be used in place of the
end with a minimum of two connections assembly is placed in the opening so that the angle mentioned above. See note 1C for
on each side/leg top and bottom.The angles flange rest flush up to the partition, then the information on clearances. See Fig. 9 for
are also to be fastened to the fire partition fasteners are placed through the sleeve into detailed drawings of installations.
with: in concrete/masonry partitions with the partition (see Fig. 9). No Angle Method is
#10 (M5) self-tapping concrete anchors or approved for 11/2 hour dampers only, vertical
Jul / 06 245069 SHEET 2 OF 4
Fire/Smoke Dampers
5. Actuator Connections:
Electrical and/or pneumatic connections to damper actuators should be made in accordance with wiring and piping diagrams developed
in compliance with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. Be sure to check actuator for proper voltage and current draw.Tampering
with the actuators installation or connecting the actuator to an improper voltage and current may void the warranty.

Transverse Joints
bottom joint.

Round or flat oval ducts connected to Type R, CR or CO damper collars may use no. 10 sheetmetal screws as follows:

as illustrated.

Fire/Smoke Dampers
Jul / 06 245069 SHEET 4 OF 4
Round Fire/Smoke Dampers
FSD-RD
When UL is referred to in this document,

it repesents UL/ULC.
using either:
22 (559mm) and smaller duct.
spaced equisdistant around the sleeve for
of 1 (25 mm).
plate.The clip angles shall be attachewd with
1/8 (3mm) rivets, #10 x 1/2 (13mm) steel
Round Fire/Smoke Dampers
FSD-RD

regulations.
recommended. When UL is referred to in
this document, it represents UL/ULC.
Jul / 06 245070 SHEET 2 OF 2

the dampers. PRICE Model numbers which are UL approved to utilize this installation are FD-OW, FDD-OW, FD-SL-OW, FDD-SL-OW,
FD-MD-3V-OW, FD-MB-AF-OW, FDD-MB-3V-OW, FDD-MB-AF-OW, FSD-3V-OW-211, -212, FSD-AF-OW-211, -212, FSD-3V-
FA-211, -212, FSD-AF-FA-211, -212.


3
Jul / 06 245071 SHEET 2 OF 4

Transverse Joints
connections.
bottom joint.

Round or flat oval ducts connected to Type R, CR or CO damper collars may use
(152)#10 sheetmetal
(2) screws as follows:
Figure 4 - Manufactured Flanged (152) (2)

(152) (2)
as illustrated.
(152)

Breakaway Connections (152)
TDC and TDF systems are approved as (152)

UL Approved
3/4" (19) Flange Wall Design Factory Installed
Thermal Insulation
Insulation
UL Approved
Wall Design Gypsum
Factory Installed 3/4" ( 1 9 ) Flange
Metal Studs
#10 Sheet Metal
Screws, 8" oc.
Masonry Walls
#10 Self-Tapping Screws, 6" (152) oc.
6" (152) oc Fire Damper 3/4" ( 1 9 ) Flange
Fire/Smoke Damper
#10 Sheet Metal
Screws, 6" (152) oc. UL Approved
Masonry Wall Design
Factory Installed
tor
Insulation
tua

Ac
Steel Sleeve 3/4" ( 1 9 ) Flange

(Typ. 4 Sides)
20 Ga. St.
6" (152) Masonry Walls
Max #10 Self-Tapping
Concrete Anchors,
6" (152) oc.
Fire Wall
Sides
3.5
5" Max.
Fasteners
Sleeve
Fire/Smoke
Fasteners
Sleeve
tor
ator
tua
Fire/Smoke Damper
Actu
Ac

Steel/Gypsum
Min. 1" Overlap
Masonry
Steel/Gypsum Wall
Wall
Damper
Sleeve
Sleeve
Fire/Smoke Damper
Jul / 06 245071 SHEET 4 OF 4
These installation instructions apply to the

fabrication and construction of generic sup-
port mullions. Support mullions are neces-
sary whenever fire dampers are installed
into an opening that is larger than the largest
UL rated size for that damper. The mullions
allow construction of a fire barrier that is
larger than the maximum available size.
The opening must not exceed 120" (3048mm)
high, but can be any width provided a verti-
cal support mullion is used a maximum of
every 120" (3048mm).
To properly use support mullions they must
be fabricated and installed according to
these instructions.
Horz. to Vert.
This generic support mullion is permitted Mullion Cap
by UL to only be used in static systems. A C-C (Typical)
static system is one in which the fan shuts
down in the event of a fire or smoke alarm.
Application
Generic steel mullions can be used to sepa-
rate vertically mounted galvanized steel fire
dampers in wall openings larger
than the UL permitted multiple damper
assembly size. Mullions can either be used
vertically, horizontally or both to split up
a vertical wall opening requiring use of a
damper having a 11/2 hour fire resistance
rating. Maximum mullion span is 120"
(3048mm) plus expansion allowance when
used either horizontally or vertically.
Sleeves are to be around each damper as-
sembly. Mullions are not intended to be in
the airstream, (i.e. exposed to flow) or to be
a part of the ductwork.
Wall Opening
Steel mullions are intended for use in a
concrete block or solid concrete wall. Hollow
concrete blocks are to be filled with concrete
(minimum 3500 psi) to permit proper mul-
lion anchoring.
Wall thickness is to be 7" (178mm) minimum,
12" (305mm) maximum.
Jul / 06 245073 SHEET 1 OF 4
36 (914) 33-3/8 (848) 3-1/2 (89
48 (1219) 47-1/4 (1200) 3-5/8 (92)
Support Mullions for 60 (1524) 59-1/8 (1502) 3-3/4 (95)
Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers 72 (1829)
84 (2134)
71 (1803)
82-7/8 (2105)
3-7/8 (98)
4 (102)
Fabrication and Installation Instructions 96 (2438) 94-3/4 (2407) 4-1/8(105)
108 (2749) 106-3/4 (2711) 4-1/4 (108)
120 (3048) 118-3/4 (3016) 4-3/8 (111)
(13)
(6)
(51) (46) (51)

Support mullion assemblies consist of three basic parts: the wall mullion cap, the
horizontal to vertical mullion cap and the mullion sections. Determine the number of
each piece required to complete the installation.
Fabrication of Wall Mullion Caps (Fig. A-A)
Wall mullion caps must be constructed from 12 ga. steel with a minimum yield strength (83)
of 42,000 psi. 12 (305) 11-1/2 (292) 3-1/4 (83)
1. Fabricate the formed section as shown below. 24 (610) 23-1/2 (597) 3-3/8 (86)
2. Shear the cap end plate to required dimensions. 36 (914) 33-3/8 (848) 3-1/2 (89
3. Weld the cap end plates to the formed section with 1/8" (3mm) fillet welds completely 48 (1219) 47-1/4 (1200) 3-5/8 (92)
around the top edges of the formed section.
60 (1524) 59-1/8 (1502) 3-3/4 (95)
4. Drill and countersink 8 holes (4 on each side for 1/4" -20 flat head machine screws.
72 (1829) 71 (1803) 3-7/8 (98)
Fabrication of Mullion12 (305) (Fig.
Sections 11-1/2
B-B) (292) 3-1/4 (83)
Mullions must be constructed from 1623-1/2
ga. steel with a3-3/8
minimum 84 (2134) 82-7/8 (2105) 4 (102)
24 (610) (597) (86) yield strength of
42,000 psi. 96 (2438) 94-3/4 (2407) 4-1/8(105)
36 (914) 33-3/8 (848) 3-1/2 (89
Important: The D dimension shown has been calculated to include the necessary 108 (2749) 106-3/4 (2711) 4-1/4 (108)
48 (1219) 47-1/4 (1200) 3-5/8 (92)
clearances required for thermal expansion in the mullions. The values can be found 120 (3048) 118-3/4 (3016) 4-3/8 (111)
60 (1524) and59-1/8
using the wall opening dimensions (1502)
tables on 3-3/4 (95)
this page.
72 of
1. Form two identical pieces (1829)
mullion71 (1803)
section as shown. 3-7/8 (98) (13)
(6) )
2. Connect the two mullion84sections
(2134) together.
82-7/8Use(2105)
3 4 (102)steel bind rivets or 3/4"
/16" (5mm) (83
(19mm) long stitch welds
96 12" (305mm)
(2438) on center
94-3/4 (2407)and4-1/8(105)
a 6" (152m) maximum from
both ends.
108 (2749) 106-3/4 (2711) 4-1/4 (108) (51) (46) (51)
Important: Both sides of the mullion piece should be fastened using the method de-
scribed above.
120 (3048) 118-3/4 (3016) 4-3/8 (111)
(13)
(6)
(83)
(83)
(51) (46) (51)
(19) (22)
(51) (51)
(83)
(89)
)
(83
3/16 (5) blind rivet (std.) or 3/4

(19) long intermittent welds 12
)
(83 (305) on center, 6 (152) max. (5)
from both ends, both sides of
assembly(83)
(19) (22)
(51) (51)
(83)
(19) (22)
(89)
(51) (51)
Fabrication and Installation and Instructions
Fabrication of Mullion Sections (Fig. C-C)

Horizontal to vertical mullion caps must be constructed from 12 ga. steel with a mini-
mum yield strength of 42,000 psi. Important: The H, E and F dimensions shown have
been calculated to provide the correct performance. The values can be found by using
the wall opening dimensions and the tables on page 2.
1. Form the horizontal mullion channel as shown.
2. Drill 12, 3/16" (5mm) dia. holes into the horizontal mullion channel using the dimen-
sions shown.
3. Form the center channel as shown.
NOTE:
If the center channel is to be made from two pieces, weld them together with an 1/8"
(3mm) fillet weld.
4. Shear the end plates to the dimensions required.
5. Weld the end plates to the center channel with 1/8" (3mm) fillet welds completely
around the top edges of the center section.
Jul / 06 245073 SHEET 3 OF 4
Mullion Installation
Before the fire dampers are installed into the wall the anchored into the wall. The fire dampers
may then be installed into the mullion assembly.
To correctly attach the mullions to the wall follow these steps:
1. Anchor wall mullion caps to wall using 1/4"-20 x 5/16" long flat head steel bolts and 3/8" (10mm)
diameter by 1" (25mm) long concrete expansion anchors (Hilti). If steel lintels are present, use
two 1" (25mm) long welds on each side of mullion caps. Note: End caps must be inserted into
the ends of the mullions before they are anchored to the wall.
2. Anchor horizontal mullion caps to vertical mullion caps with 3/16" (5mm) diameter steel blind
rivets in 12 places. Note: Mullion caps must be inserted into the ends of the mullions before
they are anchored to the vertical mullions or wall.
Fire Damper Installation
Galvanized steel fire dampers must be UL classified for 11/2 hour fire resistance. They must be
installed in galvanized steel sleeves and be retained by minimum 11/2" x 11/2" 1" (38mm x 38mm),
16 ga. retaining angles on each side of the wall. Retaining angles must overlap mullions or wall
by 1" minimum. Fasten to sleeve using 1/4" 1" (6mm) dia. bolts, 3/16" (5mm) steel rivets, welding,
or #10 sheet metal screws. All must be attached 6" 1" (152mm) on centers, 2" (51mm) maximum
from corners. Do not fasten retaining angles to the wall or mullions. Mullions must be free to
float. Total expansion clearance between sleeve and wall/mullion of 1/8" per foot of wall opening
or mullion span should be allowed. Maximum clearance is 11/4" 1" (32mm).
Application:
Procedure:
thoroughly.
ing angles.
Jul / 06 245074 SHEET 1 OF 1

single sections. Multiple assemblies may
require additional bracing. PRICE Manu-
facturing recommends appropriate bracing
on multiple assemblies at over 8' of width
and height.
JACKSHAFTING:
lion.
pressure, etc.)
bolts.
mount.)
6. Ball bearings.
recommended.
Damper Enclosures

FSD-3V .............................................................................................................................. 16"
c /w DLT or DLT-1 OR OVERRIDE RELEASE Transition Collars: 22 ga. Galv. Steel.
FSD-AF .............................................................................................................................. 16" *D = DIAMETER
c /w DLT OR DLT-1 OR OVERIDE RELEASE *W = WIDTH (DUCT)
NOTE: B TYPE TRANSITIONS MAY BE FURNISHED ON DAMPERS LESS THAN 8" IN HEIGHT. TRANSITION USED TO *H = HEIGHT (DUCT)
REDUCE MINIMUM DAMPER/SLEEVE HEIGHT OF 8" TO 7", 6", 5" OR 4". (MINIMUM DUCT HEIGHT). *L = LENGTH (SEE CHART)
DAMPER FRAME SHOWN AS DASHED
LINES
Model FRA
Model
16 ga. 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" (38 mm x 38 mm) Formed
size chart.
Installation:
perimeter angles.
sleeve.
Application:
recommended.
Jul / 06
245077
Damper Operators
Both electric and pneumatic damper opera- Typical Installations:

tors are available from PRICE Manufacturing
and may be factory installed (see methods
below) with our FSD series combination fire/
smoke dampers. We are constantly expand-
ing our Underwriters Laboratories listings
and therefore recommend that you contact
the factory for the appropriateness (i.e. size
limitations, torque, and temperature) of a
given fire/smoke application. Control damp-
ers may be shipped with factory installed
motors provided we have the following in-
formation: 1. damper/duct size; 2. maximum
velocity; 3. maximum static pressure; 4. ap-
plication (shut-off, balancing, or modulating
damper); 5. location of operator (internal or
external); 6. pneumatic or electric system. Dampers may be furnished with factory Dampers may be furnished with operators
installed mounting plate (insert type: mounted inside duct with factory installed
designation IT) either with operator or internal motor mount.
extended shaft for on site attachment.
Operator mounted out of airstream.
Suggested Specification
recommended.
Dampers may be furnished with factory

installed sleeves and with operators
mounted outside or inside air stream.
Minimum sleeve depth 16" (406mm).
Duct Mounted Smoke Detector
Typical Fire/Smoke Damper Mounting Detail
Note: Minimum Size 12"w x 10"h (305mm

x 254mm)
recommended.
Single Thermostat Operator Release (O/R)
for Fire/Smoke Dampers &
Motorized Multiblade Fire Dampers
O/R package - Single Thermostat Operator Release
In todays life safety products markets, indentical fusible link can be troublesome By depressing a button on the outside of the
many building codes require fire dampers, and time consuming. PRICEs O/R option sleeve an inspector can verify if the damper
smoke dampers and combination fire and provides the ease of operating and resetting is fully operational. The O/R is a multi-use
smoke dampers to be inspected for proper the damper in a matter of seconds without heat responsive device. It is wired in series
operation. Many of these codes require that replacing is used in lieu of a conventional with the smoke detector therefore it is user
the damper be inspected and cycled every fusible link. It is a reusable/resettable heat friendly in most applications. When the
6 months to a year depending on the local responsive device that can only be reset smoke detector interrupts the current to the
authority and the type of system in which after a visual inspection of the damper. damper, the O/R will not hinder the closing
it is installed. Usually fire dampers and Dampers which allow remote resetting of the damper.
combination fire and smoke dampers are of the damper from a remote location The O/R option is available on all PRICE
supplied with a fusible link. The fusible link are dangerous. A remotely reset damper Model FSD Combination Fire/Smoke Damp-
is a one time device and is generally limited may not be fully functional and should be ers and Motorized Multi-Blade Fire Dampers.
to 165F or 212F. Once the link has experi- visually inspected. The O/R is reset from
enced these elevated temperatures, it can no the outside of the damper sleeve, when the The O/R comes in temperatures of 165F,
longer be used and must be replaced with actuator is externally mounted, therefore 212F, 250F and 350F (depending on ac-
an indentical link. Locating and acquiring the requiring a visual inspection of the damper. tuator selected).
FSD DAMPER STO/R OPERATION Limitations All moving parts of the damper must be
Switch is in Normal (Damper Open) Position: 15 Ampere, 120 Volts A.C. inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
Damper motor is energized until thermostat than every six months and in accordance
senses temperature above initial closure 15 Ampere, 24 Volts A.C. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
rating. Above temperature closure rating, 12.5 Ampere, 250 Volts A.C. local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
the damper motor is de-energized and In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
damper closes. inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Manufacturers Recommendations recommended.
Smoke Detector (if used) wired in series with
temperature sensitive device.
Switch in Closed Position damper motor is
de-energized and damper is closed.
Detailed wiring diagrams including termi-
nal designation and/or wire color coding
furnished with each shipment.
Thermostat Switch Electrical
Single Thermostat Operator Release (O/R)
O/R package - Single Thermostat Operator Release
O/R Wiring Details

Remote Switch Package
L1 Wiring
L2
Command
Blk. Station Compartment Wht.
Control
Panel
Wire Nut Motor
Blk.
Org.
L Actuator
Org. Blue Blk. Wht.

M1
Smoke Detector TS1

If Used
FS Primary TS1
Heat Sensor
Manual Reset
Orange
Blue
Jul / 06 245081 SHEET 2 OF 2
Single Thermostat Operator Release (STO/R)
STO/R Package - Single Thermostat Operator Release
In todays life safety products markets, the identical fusible link can be troublesome outside of the sleeve an inspector can verify if
many building codes require fire dampers, and time consuming. PRICEs STO/R option the damper is fully operational.The STO/R is
smoke dampers and combination fire and provides the ease of operating and resetting a multi-use heat responsive device. It is wired
smoke dampers to be inspected for proper the damper in a matter of seconds without in series with the smoke detector therefore
operation. Many of these codes require replacing the link. The is used in lieu of a it is user friendly in most applications. When
that the damper be inspected and cycled conventional fusible link. It is a reusable/ the smoke detector interrupts the current to
every 6 months to a year depending on the resettable heat responsive device that can the damper, the STO/R will not hinder the
local authority and the type of system in only be reset after a visual inspection of the closing of the damper. The STO/R package
which it is installed. Usually fire dampers damper. Dampers which allow remote includes blade indicator switches which al-
and combination fire and smoke dampers resetting of the damper from a remote low for remote notification of damper blade
are supplied with a fusible link. The fusible location are dangerous. A remotely reset position, as a standard feature.
link is a one time device and is generally damper may not be fully functional and The STO/R option is available on all PRICE
limited to 165F or 212F. Once the link has should be visually inspected. The STO/R is Model FSD Combination Fire/Smoke Damp-
experienced these elevated temperatures, it reset from the outside of the damper sleeve, ers and Motorized Multi-Blade Fire Dampers.
can no longer be used and must be replaced therefore requiring a visual inspection of
with an identical link. Locating and acquiring the damper. By depressing a button on the FSD DAMPER STO/R OPERATION
Switch is in Normal (Damper Open) Position: Limitations All moving parts of the damper must be
Damper motor is energized until thermostat Installation: inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
senses temperature above initial closure 10 Amperes, 1/4 HP, 120 or 240 Volts than every six months and in accordance
rating. Above temperature closure rating, A.C. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
the damper motor is de-energized and .5 Ampere, 125 Volts D.C. local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
damper closes. In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
.25 Ampere, 250 Volts D.C. inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Smoke Detector (if used) wired in series with
temperature sensitive device. 5 Amperes, 120 Volts (Lamp Load) recommended.
Switch in Closed Position damper motor is 15 Amperes, 24 Volts D.C.
de-energized and damper is closed. Manufacturers Recommendations
Indicator Switch Electrical
Jul / 06 245082 SHEET 2 OF 4
Jul / 06 245082 SHEET 4 OF 4
Double Thermostat Override Release (DTO/R)
for Fire/Smoke Dampers
DTO/R Package - Double Thermostat Override Release
Prior to todays advancements in smoke tion fire/smoke dampers may need to oper- mum design limit. The DTO/R options also
control techniques, fan systems were re- ate at temperatures above and beyond their permits a combination fire/smoke damper
quired to shut down during fire conditions initial closure rating. PRICEs DTO/R option to be reopened after a fire emergency has
and fire dampers were closed by heat. Air provides the capability to override rated been controlled providing the temperatures
pressures were not utilized for the control damper closure from a secure remote loca- at the damper have cooled down below the
and containment of smoke. In recent years, tion (such as a fire fighters smoke control maximum design limit. Please note that the
the requirement that systems completely station). Upon sensing temperature above DTO/R option is recommended only for use
shut down and fire dampers close and re- the initial rating (usually 165F or 212F) the in systems utilizing an Engineered Smoke
main closed during fire conditions has been damper will close but it may be reopened at Control design.
questioned. With the current engineered the command of a remotely located control The DTO/R option is available on all PRICE
smoke control systems simple closure of a to permit utilization of the HVAC/Engineered Model FSD Combination Fire/Smoke
fire damper at a specific temperature is no Smoke Control System, but only until such Dampers.
longer the absolute requirement. Combina- time as the fire conditions exceed the maxi-
FSD DAMPER DTO/R OPERATION Indicator Switch Electrical Limitations All moving parts of the damper must be
Switch is in Normal (Open) Position damper 10 Amperes, 1/4 HP, 120 or 240 Volts inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
motor is energized until thermostat senses A.C. than every six months and in accordance
temperature above initial closure rating. .5 Ampere, 125 Volts D.C. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
Above temperature closure rating, the .25 Ampere, 250 Volts D.C. local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
damper motor is de-energized and damper In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
closes. 5 Amperes, 120 Volts (Lamp Load) inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
Switch may then be moved to the Override 15 Amperes, 24 Volts D.C. recommended.
Position and the damper will reopen and Manufacturers Recommendations
remain open until maximum operating tem-
perature is reached. Once this temperature
has been reached the damper motor is de-
energized and the damper closes.
Switch in Closed Position damper motor is
de-energized and damper is closed.
Double Thermostat Override Release (DTO/R)
for Fire/Smoke Dampers
DTO/R Package - Double Thermostat Override Release
Jul / 06 245083 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model PFV and EFL
Pneumatic Fuse Valve (PFV) and Electric Fusible Link (EFL)

for Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers
In todays world of many variables and

controlled cost, PRICE offers several
options to meet the needs of the industry.
In many cases, the need to check for damper
operation in the event a fire occurs is very
hard to do, especially with the system
running in a real time case. PRICE offers two
options that allow for the fusible link to be
removed and the operation of the damper
checked, as in the event of a fire. Just merely
turning the power off to the actuator may not
tell you if the damper will close if the total
HVAC system is shut down. It is also very
difficult to melt the link while the system is
running. Many times the system designer
would like a systematic control closure of
the damper to prevent ductwork implosion.
PRICE offers the options PFV and EFL to
meet these needs.
The PFV option has several features that
make it a good choice on your job. First
it does not require electric power to be
at the dampers location. An E-P switch is
not required on a pneumatically actuated
damper which has this option. When the
link melts, the pneumatic power does not
have to be shut off for the damper to close.
The PFV costs less and has fewer parts to
maintain than an E-P switch. Another feature
is that the link can be easily removed and
the damper inspected for operation under
airflow conditions. By using the PFV over
conventional fuse links, the HVAC system
can be systematically control closed to
prevent any duct implosion problems.
Fusible links are available at 165F and 212F
temperatures.
The EFL option has several features that
make it a good choice as an option on your
job. The fusible link can easily be removed
from its holder, thus causing the damper
to close for inspection while the HVAC Manufacturers Recommendations
continues to run. In many cases the EFL All moving parts of the damper must be
package can be easily removed from the inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
outside of the duct and the link removed. By than every six months and in accordance
using the EFL over conventional fuse links, with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
the HVAC system can be systematically local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
control closed to prevent any duct implosion In addition, fuse links shall be removed and
problems. Fusible links are available at 165F inspected for corrosion. Dry lubricants are
and 212F. recommended.
Jul / 06
245084
Model M/S
Micro Switch Package
The M/S Switch Package provides the abil- of the switch box, containing two damper
The M/S option is available on all PRICE
ity to remotely indicate the damper blade position indicator switches (one closes when
Model FSD Combination Fire/Smoke Damp-
position. It is two integrally mounted micro the damper is fully open and the other closes
ers, Model SSD Smoke dampers, and Model
switches for positive status indications. when the damper is fully closed), a switch
FDD-MB Multi-blade dampers.
Electrical interface with a remote control on/ box mounting bracket, a blade bracket,
off fan station is also possible with the M/S and hardware necessary to directly link the
package. The M/S Switch Package consists switch box to the blade.
Detailed wiring diagrams including terminal designation and/or wire

color coding furnished with each shipment.
Indicator Switch Electrical Limitations
10 Amperes, 1/4 HP, 120 or 240 Volts A.C.
.5 Ampere, 125 Volts D.C.
5 Amperes, 120 Volts (Lamp Load)
15 Amperes, 24 Volts D.C.
All moving parts of the damper must be inspected and cycled at intervals
not greater than every six months and in accordance with the latest
edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
In addition, fuse links shall be removed and inspected for corrosion.
Dry lubricants are recommended.
Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our
continuous improvement program, we reserve the right to make
Jul / 06 245085 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model M/S
4-Wire Photoelectric Duct
Smoke Detector
The InnovairFlex Series are the only duct smoke
detectors flexible enough to fit configurations from
square to rectangular and everything in between.
Features The InnovairFlex D4120A 4-wire photoelectric duct smoke

Photoelectric, integrated low-flow technology detector features a pivoting housing that fits both square and
rectangular footprints and mounts to round or rectangular ductwork.
Air velocity rating from 100 ft/min to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/s to 20.32 This unit senses smoke in the most challenging conditions, operating
m/sec) in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute, temperatures
Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular configuration of 4F to 158F, and a humidity range of 0 to 95 percent (non-
Plug-in sensor offers superb false alarm immunity and the latest condensing). A plug-in sensor head offers improved false alarm
sensor technology immunity and simple installation, testing, and maintenance. An
improved cover design isolates the sensor head from the low-flow
Broad ranges for operating temperature (4F to 158F) and feature for simple maintenance.
humidity (0% to 95% non-condensing)
Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the detector The InnovairFlex housing provides ample wiring space, a -inch
with no tools required conduit knockout, and built-in short circuit protection to prevent
damage to sensitive components during installation. High contrast
Increased wiring space with a newly added -inch conduit terminal designations make wiring easy. With its 2:1 sensor-to-power
knockout capability, the power board of the D4120A may be used to monitor
One easy-access Test/Reset button and improved LED status a second sensor ,D4SA, simultaneously (i.e., supply and return side).
Patented interconnect feature for multi-fan shutdown As many as 50 InnovairFlex detectors can be interconnected. When
one unit senses smoke, all interconnected detectors will switch
New high contrast terminal designations their relays; only the detector sensing smoke will go into alarm, thus
Built-in short circuit protection from operator wiring errors pinpointing the fire source.
Field selectable settings for configuring the detector An easy-access Test/Reset button makes it possible to test the unit
Two DPDT Form-C relay contacts with the cover on. Three DIP switches can be used to configure field
24 VAC/DC or 120VAC selectable settings: cover tamper delay, number of sensors to be
controlled, and shut down on trouble option. Each power board
Backward compatibility with existing Innovair products, including has two LEDs that can be used to indicate the status of connected
remote accessories sensors, and a quick reference imprinted on the cover explains the
LED status indications (Standby, Maintenance, Trouble, and Alarm).
The InnovairFlex duct smoke detector can be customized to meet
local codes and specifications without additional wiring. The new
InnovairFlex product line is compatible with all previous Innovair
Agency Listings models, including remote test accessories.
WARNING: Duct smoke detectors are NOT a substitute for open area
smoke detectors; NOT a substitute for early warning detection; NOT a
replacement for a buildings regular fire detection system.
APPROVED
Refer to NFPA 72 and 90A and CAN/ULC S524 for additional information.
InnovairFlex Duct Smoke Detector Specifications
Architectural/Engineering Specifications
The air duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor InnovairFlex D4120A Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector. The detector housing shall be ULC listed
specifically for use in air handling systems. The flexible housing of the duct smoke detector fits multiple footprints from square to rectangular. The detector
shall operate at air velocities of 100 feet per minute to 4000 feet per minute (0.5 to 20.32 meters/second). The unit shall be capable of controlling up to 50 air
handling systems when interconnected with other detectors. The detector shall be capable of providing a trouble signal in the event that the front cover is
removed. It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch, test button on the cover, or remote testing using the RTS451KEYA Remote Test Station. Terminal
connections shall be of the strip and clamp method suitable for 1218 AWG wiring.
Physical Specifications
Size: (Rectangular Dimensions) 14.38 in (37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.74 cm) Width; 2.5 in (6.36 cm) Depth
(Square Dimensions) 7.75 in (19.7 cm) Length; 9 in (22.9 cm) Width; 2.5 in (6.35 cm) Depth
Weight: 2.5 lbs (1.14 kg)
Operating Temperature Range: D4120A & D4SA: 20 to 70C (4 to 158F); D4P120A: 40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Storage Temperature Range: D4120A & D4SA: 30 to 70C (22 to 158F); D4P120A: 40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Operating Humidity Range: 0% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing
Air Duct Velocity: 100 to 4000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/sec)
Electrical Ratings
Power supply voltage: 2029 VDC 24 VAC 5060 Hz 120 VAC 5060 Hz
Input capacitance: 270 F max. 270 F max. N/A
Reset voltage: 3.0 VDC min. 2.0 VAC min. 10 VAC min.
Reset time: (with RTS451) .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec.
Reset time: (by power down) 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max.
Power up time: 35 sec. max. 35 sec. max. 35 sec. max.
Alarm response time: 15 sec. 15 sec. 15 sec.
Sensitivity Test: See detector label See detector label See detector label
Current Requirements: (Using No Accessories)
Max. standby current: 21 mA @ 24VDC 65 mA RMS @ 24VAC 60Hz 20 mA RMS @ 120VAC 60Hz
Max. alarm current: 65 mA @ 24VDC 135 mA RMS @ 24VAC 60Hz 35 mA RMS @ 120VAC 60Hz
Contact Ratings
Alarm initiation contacts: (SPST) 2.0A @ 30 VDC (resistive)
Alarm auxiliary contacts: (DPDT) 10A @ 30 VDC (resistive); 10A @ 250 VAC (resistive); HP @ 240 VAC ; HP @ 120 VAC
Note: Alarm auxiliary contacts shall not be connected to initiating circuits of control panels. Use the alarm initiation contact for this purpose.
Supervisory contacts: (SPDT) 2.0A @ 30 VDC (resistive); 2.0A @ 125 VAC (resistive)
Accessory Current Loads at 24 VDC
Device Standby Trouble Alarm
MHRA/MHWA 0 mA n/a 29 mA Max.
RA400ZA 0 mA n/a 12 mA Max.
RTS451/RTS451KEYA 0 mA/12 mA n/a 12 mA Max.
Note: Any combination of accessories may be used such that the given accessory loads are: 110 mA or less at the Aux output, and 50 mA or less at the Alarm output
Installing the InnovairFlex Sampling Tube

The InnovairFlex sampling tube may be installed from the front or back of the detector. The tube locks securely into place and can be removed by releasing
the front or rear locking tab (front locking tab shown below right).
A05-0419-000
Wiring for 4-wire Duct Smoke Detector and Accessories
POWER INPUTS (NOTE 1 ) P OWER INPUTS (NOTE 1)

24VAC/DC 120 24V 120
VAC VAC
9 10 9 10
OR OR
AUXILIARY CONTACTS AUXILIARY CONTACTS

FOR FAN SHUTDOWN, ETC. (NOTE 2) FOR FAN SHUTDOWN, ETC. (NOTE 2)
AUX A AUX B AUX A AUX B
N.C. C. N.O. N.C. C. N.O. N.C. C. N.O. N.C. C. N.O.
16 6 17 8 18 7 16 6 17 8 18 7
EOL RESISTOR
SPECIFIED BY
PANEL
SUPERVISORY CONTACT S SUPERVISORY CONTACT S MANUFACTURER
(NOTE 3) (NOTE 3)
SUP C. SUP N.O. SUP C. SUP N.O.
ULC LISTED 3 14 3 14
4-WIRE
CONTROL PANEL
+
ALARM 4 ALARM C. ALARM 4 ALARM C.
ALARM INITIATION INITIATION
INITIATION CONTACTS CONTACTS
LOOP (NOTE 4) (NOTE 4)
5 ALARM N.O. 5 ALARM N.O.
FIRST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP LAST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP
NOTE 1: 24V Power Inputs accept a non-polarized 24VDC or 24VAC 50-60Hz. NOTE 3: Supervisory contacts shown in standby position. Open contacts
120VAC Power Inputs accept only 120VAC 50-60Hz. Connect power indicate a trouble condition to the panel. See specications for
source to appropriate terminals of each detector. See specications contact ratings.
for additional power supply information. NOTE 4: Alarm Initiation contacts shown in standby position. Closed
NOTE 2: Auxiliary contacts shown in standby position. Contacts switch contacts indicate an alarm condition to the panel. See specications
during alarm as indicated by arrows. Auxiliary contacts are not to for contact ratings.
be used for connection to the control panel. See specications for
contact ratings.
*Please refer to the corresponding installation manual for accessory wiring diagrams.
Important Notes on 2:1 Sensor-to-Power Capability

2:1 sensor-to-power capability is not available for all InnovairFlex models. The feature is only available on the D4120A 4-wire conventional models.
2:1 sensor-to-power capability can be enabled using one D4120A and one D4SA, or two D4SA and one D4P120A.
Important Interconnect Notes

When using the interconnect feature, all interconnected units must be powered using the same independent supply.
Polarity must be maintained throughout the interconnect wiring. Connect the INT+ terminal on unit 1 to the INT+ terminal on unit 2 and so on. Similarly,
connect the INT/AUX terminal on unit 1 to the INT/AUX- terminal on unit 2 and so on.
Up to 50 D4120A units, 50 D4P120A units, or 50 units of combination may be interconnected.
Up to 10 DH100ACDC units may be interconnected. Please note that each of the 9 DH100ACDC units interconnected may be replaced by three D4P120A
units. Therefore, when using the interconnect feature a single DH100ACDC can drive either 9 DH100ACDCs or 27 D4120A units.
* NOTE: Alarm can be reset only at the initiating device and not at the devices interconnected.
A05-0419-000
Accessories
System Sensor provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, including two remote test stations and several different means of
visible and audible system annunciation. As with our duct smoke detectors, all duct smoke detector accessories are ULC listed.
RTS451 RTS451KEYA RA400ZA
MHWA MHRA
Ordering Information
Part No. Description
D4120A 4-wire photoelectric low-flow duct smoke detector
Accessories
D4SA 4-wire photoelectric sensor component only MHRA Mini Horn, Red
D4P120A 4-wire photoelectric power board component only, MHWA Mini Horn, White
24 VAC/DC, 120 VAC
2D51A 4-wire conventional photoelectric sensor head P48-21-00 End cap for metal sampling tubes
DST1 Metal sampling tube duct width up to 1ft (0.3m) RA400ZA Remote annunciator alarm LED
DST1.5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 1 ft to 2 ft (0.3 to 0.6 m) RTS451 Remote test station
DST3 Metal sampling tube duct widths 2 ft to 4 ft (0.6 to 1.2 m) RTS451KEYA Remote test station with key lock
DST5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 4 ft to 8 ft (1.2 to 2.4 m)
DST10 Metal sampling tube duct widths 8 ft to 12 ft (2.4 to 3.7 m)
DH400 OE-1 Weatherproof enclosure
ETX Metal exhaust tube duct width 1ft (0.3m)
M02-04-00 Test magnet
6-6581 Kitimat Road Mississauga ON, L5N 3T5 2007 System Sensor.
Product specifications subject to change without notice. Visit systemsensor.com for
Phone: 800-SENSOR2 www.systemsensor.ca current product information, including the latest version of this data sheet.
A05-0414-000 1/07 #1743
Model MSD
MSD Micro Switch Package - Shaft Mounted
The MSD Switch Package provides the ability to remotely indicate the damper blade position, for
direct mounting on damper driveshafts or jackshafts. It incorporates two integrally mounted
microswitches for positive status indications. Electrical interface with a remote control on/off fan
station is also possible with the MSD package. The MSD option is available on PRICE model FSD
combination fire/smoke dampers, model SSD smoke dampers, and FDD-MB multi-blade fire
dampers.
5 3
4 DIRECT DRIVE INDICATOR MOUNTING
PARTS LIST:
1) MICROSWITCH
1 2) INDICATOR SWITCH SPACER
3) SWITCH STRIKE
4) SWITCH BASE PLATE
5) SWITCH COVER
6) CONDUIT CONNECTOR
6 NOTES:
1. Fasten the base plate to the duct or sleeve with two sheet metal
SWITCH STRIKE
screws through the holes. Align the switch strike so it is centered
on the drive shaft.
2. Position the switch strike so that it actuates the microswitch

MS-1 when the damper blades are open and the microswitch MS-2
when the blades are closed. When positioned secure to the drive
shaft.
MS-2 MS-1
3. Factory furnished lead wires extend from the MLS-300 enclosure.
Field connections are to be made to the leads and enclosed in a
proper conduit.
YELLOW WHITE 4. If the output signals are reversed to that desired, reverse the
YELLOW RED field connections. Note that the wiring shown is for the indicator-
switch being mounted on the left side of the damper if it is
mounted directly to the damper axle, or on the right side of the
damper if it is mounted to a jackshaft. If the indicator switch is
mounted opposite of these locations, the wire connections should
be reversed.
L1 MS Box L2
SWITCH ELECTRICAL DATA:
Single pole, double throw switches.
250 F (121 C) max. temp. 30 min. test temp.
MS1 OPEN 11 AMPS, 1/3 HP, 125 or 250 VAC
1/2 AMP, 125 VDC, 1/4 AMP, 250 VDC
WHITE RED 4 AMPS, 125 VAC "L" (lamp load)
11 AMPS, 24 VDC
MS1 IS DAMPER OPEN SIGNAL FOR

YELLOW YELLOW INSTALLATION AS SHOWN.
CLOSED
MS2 IS DAMPER CLOSED SIGNAL FOR
MS2 INSTALLATION AS SHOWN.
Model MSD
DAMPER EXTENDED SHAFT
BLADE POSITION SWITCH PACKAGE
UNIVERSAL ACTUATOR BRACKET
ACTUATOR
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHAFT MOUNTED POSITION INDICATOR SWITCH BOX:

- REMOVE MOTOR FROM DRIVE SHAFT.
- REMOVE COVER FROM POSITION INDICATOR.
- SLIP POSITION INDICATOR OVER DRIVE SHAFT AND ATTACH TO SLEEVE.
- SLIP BRASS COLLAR OVER SHAFT AND TIGHTEN BOLT TO SHAFT, WITH THE HEAD OF
THE BOLT TO POINT UPWARDS AND MAKE CONTACT WITH THE SWITCHES IN THE
INDICATOR SWITCH BOX.
- REPLACE COVER.
- WIRE BLADE SWITCH PACKAGE DIRECTLY TO CONTROL PANEL.
- REINSTALL MOTOR ON DRIVESHAFT.
Jul / 06 245091 SHEET 2 OF 2
Fire Smoke Dampers
FSD-3V-211/231 FSD-3V-OW-211 FSD-AF-211/231

Combination Fire/Smoke Damper Combination Fire/Smoke Damper Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall
be Model: FSD-3V-211/231 by PRICE. be Model: FSD-3V-OW-211 by PRICE. Fire/ be Model: FSD-AF-211/232 by PRICE.
Fire/Smoke Dampers shall bear the Smoke Dampers shall bear the Underwriters Damper blades shall be of double-skinned
Underwriters Laboratories labels for both Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers streamlined (airfoil) construction for
Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers. U.L. and Smoke Dampers. Each damper shall minimum pressure drop. Both blade edge
555S / U.L.C. S112.1 rating shall be Class be UL/ULC qualified for mounting outside and jamb seals shall be of the pressure
I with leakage not to exceed 8 cfm per sq. of the plane of the wall to allow 'through sensitive type for low leakage. Dampers
ft.. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any size. the grille' access to actuator and controls. shall be rated for both Fire Damper (U.L.
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for U.L. 555S/U.L.C. S112 rating shall be Class 555S/U.L.C. S112) and Smoke Damper (U.L.
maximum free area. I with leakage not to exceed 8 cfm per sq. 555S/U.L.C. S112.1) operation. Leakage shall
FSD-3V-212/232 ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any size. not exceed 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0" static
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for pressure. Linkage shall be of the concealed
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper maximum free area. type for maximum free area. Dampers shall
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall FSD-3V-OW-212 bear the Underwriters Laboratories labels.
be Model: FSD-3V-212/232 by PRICE.
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper FSD-AF-212/232
Fire/Smoke Dampers shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratories labels for both Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers. U.L. be Model: FSD-3V-OW-212 by PRICE. Fire/ Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall
555S / U.L.C. S112.1 rating shall be Class II Smoke Dampers shall bear the Underwriters be Model: FSD-AF-212/232 by PRICE.
with leakage not to exceed 20 cfm per sq. Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers Damper blades shall be of double-skinned
ft.. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any size. and Smoke Dampers. Each damper shall streamlined (airfoil) construction for
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for be UL/ULC qualified for mounting outside minimum pressure drop. Both blade edge
maximum free area. of the plane of the wall to allow 'through and jamb seals shall be of the pressure
FSD-3V-FA-211 the grille' access to actuator and controls. sensitive type for low leakage. Dampers
U.L. 555S/U.L.C. S112 rating shall be Class shall be rated for both Fire Damper (U.L.
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper I with leakage not to exceed 8 cfm per sq. 555/U.L.C. S112) and Smoke Damper (U.L.
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall be ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any size. 555S/U.L.C. S112.1) operation. Leakage shall
Model: FSD-3V-FA-211 by PRICE. Fire/Smoke Linkage shall be of the concealed type for not exceed 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0" static
Dampers shall bear the Underwriters maximum free area. pressure. Linkage shall be of the concealed
Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers FSD-RD-211 type for maximum free area. Dampers shall
and Smoke Dampers. Each damper shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories labels.
be UL/ULC qualified for mounting outside Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
FSD-AF-OW-211
of the plane of the wall and have concealed Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall be
actuator access, from grille side, to allow Model: FSD-RD-211 by PRICE. Fire/Smoke Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
through the grille access to actuator and Dampers shall bear the Underwriters Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall
controls. U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 rating shall Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers be Model: FSD-AF-OW-211 by Price.
be Class I with leakage not to exceed 8 cfm and Smoke Dampers. U.L. 555S / U.L.C. Damper blades shall be of double-skinned
per sq. ft.. at 4.0 inches static pressure for S112.1 rating shall be Class I with leakage streamlined (airfoil) construction for
any size. Linkage shall be of the concealed in cfm per sq. ft. not to exceed 8 cfm per minimum pressure drop. Both blade edge
type for maximum free area. sq. ft.. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any and jamb seals shall be of the pressure
FSD-3V-FA-212 size. Units shall also be listed to operate at sensitive type for low leakage. Dampers
a minimum of 2,000 FPM at 350F (177C). shall be rated for both Fire Damper (U.L.
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
FSD-RD-212 555S/U.L.C. S112) and Smoke Damper (U.L.
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall be 555S/U.L.C. S112.1) operation. Leakage shall
Model: FSD-3V-FA-212 by PRICE. Fire/Smoke Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
not exceed 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0" static
Dampers shall bear the Underwriters Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall pressure. Linkage shall be of the concealed
Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers be Model: FSD-RD-212 by PRICE. Fire/ type for maximum free area. Each damper
and Smoke Dampers. Each damper shall Smoke Dampers shall bear the Underwriter shall be qualified for mounting outside of
be UL/ULC qualified for mounting outside Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers the plane of the wall to allow through the
of the plane of the wall and have concealed and Smoke Dampers. U.L. 555S / U.L.C. grille access to actuators and controls.
actuator access, from grille side, to allow S112.1 rating shall be Class II with leakage Dampers shall bear the Underwriters
through the grille access to actuator and in cfm per sq. ft. not to exceed 20 cfm per sq. Laboratories labels.
controls. U.L. 555S / U.L.C. S112.1 rating shall ft.. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any size.
be Class II with leakage not to exceed 20 cfm
per sq. ft.. at 4.0 inches static pressure for
any size. Linkage shall be of the concealed
type for maximum free area.
Fire Smoke Dampers
FSD-AF-OW-212 FSD-AF-FA-212
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall be
be Model: FSD-AF-OW-212 by Price. Model: FSD-AF-FA-212 by Price. Fire/Smoke
Damper blades shall be of double-skinned Dampers shall bear the Underwriters
streamlined (airfoil) construction for Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers
minimum pressure drop. Single blade edge and Smoke Dampers. Each damper shall
and jamb seals shall be of the pressure be UL/ULC qualified for mounting outside
sensitive type for low leakage. Dampers shall of the plane of the wall and have concealed
be rated for both Fire Damper (U.L. 555/U.L.C. actuator access, from grille side, to allow
S112) and Smoke Damper (U.L. 555S/U.L.C. through the grille access to actuator and
S112.1) operation. Leakage shall not exceed controls. U.L. 555S rating shall be Class II
20cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0" static pressure. with leakage not to exceed 20 cfm per sq.
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any size.
maximum free area. Each damper shall be Linkage shall be of the concealed type for
qualified for mounting outside of the plane maximum free area.
of the wall to allow through the grille access
to actuators and controls. Dampers shall
bear the Underwriters Laboratories labels.
FSD-AF-FA-211
Combination Fire/Smoke Damper
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall be
Model: FSD-AF-FA-211 by Price. Fire/Smoke
Dampers shall bear the Underwriters
Laboratories labels for both Fire Dampers
and Smoke Dampers. Each damper shall
be UL/ULC qualified for mounting outside
of the plane of the wall and have concealed
actuator access, from grille side, to allow
through the grille access to actuator and
controls. U.L. 555S rating shall be Class I
with leakage not to exceed 8 cfm per sq.
ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure for any size.
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for
maximum free area.
Submittal Sheets
Smoke Damper
Smoke Damper
SSD-3V-201 3V Blade, Class I 245040 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
SSD-3V-202 3V Blade, Class II 245041 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
SSD-RD-201 Round Blade, Class I 245042 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
SSD-RD-202 Round Blade, Class II 245043 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
SSD-AF-201 Airfoil Blade, Class I 245044 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
SSD-AF-202 Airfoil Blade, Class II 245045 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Smoke Damper Installation and Accessories

Smoke Damper Installation instructions 245046 Jul / 06
Actuator and Jackshaft Dimensions 245047 Jul / 06
Damper Enclosures & Transitions 245048 Jul / 06
Damper Operators 245049 Jul / 06
Actuator Reference Chart 245050 Jul / 06
Micro Switch Package 245051 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Micro Switch Package - Shaft Mounted 245090 (2 sheets) Jul / 06
Smoke Damper Suggested Specifications Jul / 06
Model SSD-3V-201
Class1
Low Leakage Smoke Damper

Low Leakage Smoke Damper SSD-3V-201 Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat-
Features bracing.
The SSD-3V-201 series Smoke Dampers
have been designed and tested to exceed
all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements
for smoke dampers. These U.L. leakage
rated dampers are intended for use in Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
engineered smoke control systems to Axles: Square, plated steel.
provide extremely tight shut off.
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and
labelled as Leakage Class I rated Smoke
seals.
Class I provides for a maximum leakage Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4 inch static pressure. are 12ga. galvanized steel.
As we are constantly expanding our U.L./ Finish: Mill galvanized.
U.L.C. listings, we suggest you contact
Sizes:
the factory for further information.
Minimum Size: 8"w x 6"h.
The SSD-3V-201 dampers rigid frame and (203 mm x 152 mm)
Maximum UL Listed Size:
Single Section: 36"w x 48"h
(914 mm x 1219 mm)
test results. Multiple Assembly:
The SSD-3V-201 exceeds N.F.P.A. 90A 144"w x 96"h (3658mm x 2438mm)
& 92 smoke damper requirements and Notes: Dampers are furnished approxi-
is recommended for applications that mately 1/4" (6mm) smaller than given duct
call for tight sealing requirements. The dimensions.
SSD-3V-201 provides excellent control of
smoke movement or containment as the
vertically.
smoke management system demands.
The SSD-3V-201 may be equipped with
factory installed electric or pneumatic
operators.
recommended.
notice.
Jul / 06
245040
Jul / 06 245040 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model SSD-3V-201
Class 1
Model SSD-3V-202
Class 2
Model Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat-

Low Leakage Smoke Damper SSD-3V-202 section with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Features
The SSD-3V-202 series Smoke Dampers Blades: 16 ga. Roll-formed galvanized steel.
have been designed and tested to exceed Minimum width: 41/4" (108mm)
all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements Maximum width: 71/4" (184mm)
for smoke dampers. These U.L. leakage
rated dampers are intended for use in Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
engineered smoke control systems to Axles: Square, plated steel.
provide extremely tight shut off. Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and blade edge seals and flexible metal jamb
labelled as Leakage Class II rated Smoke seals.
Class II provides for a maximum leakage Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static are 12ga. galvanized steel.
pressure. As we are constantly expanding Finish: Mill galvanized.
our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you Sizes: Minimum Size: 6"w x 6"h. (152mm
contact the factory for further information. x 152mm)
The SSD-3V-202 dampers rigid frame and Maximum UL Listed Size:
integrally braced corners provide true Single Section: 36"w x 48"h
damper alignment that generally resists (914mm x 1219mm)
This insures onsite performance equal to Multiple Assembly:
test results. 144"w X 96"h (3658mm x 2438mm)
The SSD-3V-202 exceeds N.F.P.A. 90A Notes:
& 92 smoke damper requirements and Dampers are furnished approximately
is recommended for applications that 1
call for tight sealing requirements. The dimensions.
SSD-3V-202 provides excellent control of Not recommended with blades running
smoke movement or containment as the vertically.
smoke management system demands. Manufacturers Recommendations
The SSD-3V-202 may be equipped with All moving parts of the damper must be
factory installed electric or pneumatic inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
operators. than every six months and in accordance
Standard Construction: local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
recommended.
notice.
Jul / 06
245041
Jul / 06 245041 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model SSD-3V-202
Class 2
Model SSD-RD-201
Class 1
Low Leakage Smoke Damper, True Round

Low Leakage Smoke Damper SSD-RD-201 Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel, 16"
Features (406mm) long, integral sleeve.
The SSD-RD-201 series Smoke Dampers Blades: Double thickness galvanized steel,
have been designed and tested to exceed 14 ga. equivalent with welded channel
all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements reinforcement.
for smoke dampers. These U.L. leakage Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
rated dampers are intended for use in
engineered smoke control systems to Axles: 3/8" (10mm) Square, plated steel.
provide extremely tight shut off. Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and sandwiched between blades.
labelled as Leakage Class I rated Smoke Jackshaft: 1/2" (13mm) diameter plated
Damper with airflow in both directions. steel.
of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4 inch static pressure. Linkage: Jackshaft to blade.
As we are constantly expanding our U.L./ Finish: Mill galvanized.
U.L.C. listings, we suggest you contact Sizes:
the factory for further information. 8"- 24" (203mm - 610mm) diameter.
The SSD-RD-201 exceeds N.F.P.A. 90A
& 92 smoke damper requirements and Notes:
is recommended for applications that Dampers are furnished approximately
call for tight sealing requirements. The
1
SSD-RD-201 provides excellent control of dimensions.
smoke movement or containment as the Manufacturers Recommendations
smoke management system demands. All moving parts of the damper must be
The SSD-RD-201 may be equipped with inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
factory installed electric or pneumatic than every six months and in accordance
operators. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
recommended.
notice.
Jul / 06
245042
Jul / 06 245042 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model SSD-RD-201
Class 1
Model SSD-RD-202
Class 2

Low Leakage Smoke Damper SSD-RD-202 Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel, 16"
Features (406mm) long, integral sleeve.
The SSD-RD-202 series Smoke Dampers Blades: Double thickness galvanized steel,
have been designed and tested to exceed 14 ga. equivalent with welded channel
all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements reinforcement.
for smoke dampers. These U.L. leakage Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
rated dampers are intended for use in
engineered smoke control systems to Axles: 3/8" (10mm) Square, plated steel.
provide extremely tight shut off. Jackshaft: 1/2" (13mm) diameter plated
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and steel.
labelled as Leakage Class II rated Smoke Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
Damper with airflow in both directions. sandwiched between blades.
Class II provides for a maximum leakage
of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4 inch static Linkage: Jackshaft to blade.
pressure. As we are constantly expanding Finish: Mill galvanized.
our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you Sizes:
contact the factory for further information. 8" - 24" (203mm - 610mm) diameter.
The SSD-RD-202 exceeds N.F.P.A. 90A
& 92 smoke damper requirements and Notes:
is recommended for applications that Dampers are furnished approximately
call for tight sealing requirements. The
1
SSD-RD-202 provides excellent control of dimensions.
smoke movement or containment as the Manufacturers Recommendations
smoke management system demands. All moving parts of the damper must be
The SSD-RD-202 may be equipped with inspected and cycled at intervals not greater
factory installed electric or pneumatic than every six months and in accordance
operators. with the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A,
recommended.
notice.
Jul / 06
245043
Jul / 06 245043 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model SSD-RD-202
Class 2
Model SSD-AF-201
Class 1

Low Leakage Smoke Damper SSD-AF-201 Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat-
Features bracing.
The SSD-AF-201 series Smoke Dampers
have been designed and tested to exceed Blades: Airfoil-shaped, double skin gal-
all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements vanized steel of roll-formed construction.
for smoke dampers. These U.L. leakage Mechanically joined to form construction
rated dampers are intended for use in equivalent to 14 ga. steel.
engineered smoke control systems to Minimum width: 5" (127mm)
provide low pressure drop (open posi- Maximum width: 7" (178mm)
tion) and extremely tight shut-off (closed
position). Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Axles: Square, plated steel.
labelled as Leakage Class I rated Smoke Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
Damper with airflow in both directions. blade edge seals and flexible metal jamb
Class I provides for a maximum leakage seals.
of 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4 inch static pres-
sure. As we are constantly expanding Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you are 12ga. galvanized steel.
contact the factory for further information. Finish: Mill galvanized.
Streamlined airfoil blades to provide Sizes: Minimum Size: 8"w x 8"h.
low pressure drop and reduced air tur- (203mm x 203mm)
bulence for quiet operation.
The SSD-AF-201 exceeds N.F.P.A. 90A Maximum UL Listed Size:
& 92 smoke damper requirements and Single Section:
is recommended for applications that 36"w x 48"h (914mm x 1219mm)
call for tight sealing requirements. The Multiple Assembly:
SSD-AF-201 provides excellent control of 144"w X 96"h (3658mm x 2438mm)
smoke movement or containment as the Notes:
smoke management system demands. Dampers are furnished approximately 1/4"
The SSD-AF-201 may be equipped with (6mm) smaller than given duct dimen-
factory installed electric or pneumatic sions.
operators. Not recommended with blades running
vertically.
recommended.
Jul / 06
245044
Jul / 06 245044 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model SSD-AF-201
Class 1
Model SSD-AF-202
Class 2
Model Frame: Roll-formed galvanized steel hat-

Low Leakage Smoke Damper SSD-AF-202 section with staked corners with integral
bracing.
Features
The SSD-AF-202 series Smoke Dampers Blades: Airfoil-shaped, double skin gal-
have been designed and tested to exceed vanized steel of roll-formed construction.
all U.L., U.L.C. and N.F.P.A. requirements Mechanically joined to form construction
for smoke dampers. These U.L. leakage equivalent to 14 ga. steel.
rated dampers are intended for use in Minimum width: 5" (127mm)
engineered smoke control systems to Maximum width: 7" (178mm)
provide low pressure drop (open posi-
tion) and extremely tight shut-off (closed Bearings: Bronze Oilite, press-fit into frame.
position). Axles: Square, plated steel.
U.L. 555S and U.L.C. S112.1 listed and Seals: Pressure sensitive 450F silicone
labelled as Leakage Class II rated Smoke blade edge seals and flexible metal jamb
Damper with airflow in both directions. seals.
Class II provides for a maximum leakage
of 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4 inch static pres- Linkage: Concealed in frame. Linkage bars
sure. As we are constantly expanding are 12ga. galvanized steel.
our U.L./U.L.C. listings, we suggest you Finish: Mill galvanized.
contact the factory for further information. Sizes: Minimum Size: 8"w x 8"h.
Streamlined airfoil blades to provide (203mm x 203mm)
low pressure drop and reduced air tur-
bulence for quiet operation. Maximum UL Listed Size:
The SSD-AF-202 exceeds N.F.P.A. 90A Single Section:
& 92 smoke damper requirements and 36"w x 48"h (914mm x 1219mm)
is recommended for applications that Multiple Assembly:
call for tight sealing requirements. The 144"w X 96"h (3658mm x 2438mm)
SSD-AF-202 provides excellent control of Notes:
smoke movement or containment as the Dampers are furnished approximately 1/4"
smoke management system demands. (6mm) smaller than given duct dimen-
The SSD-AF-202 may be equipped with sions.
factory installed electric or pneumatic Not recommended with blades running
operators. vertically.
Standard Construction: Manufacturers Recommendations
recommended.
Jul / 06
245045
Jul / 06 245045 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model SSD-AF-202
Class 2
Smoke Dampers
Smoke
Installation Details Barrier
Duct or
1. Dampers should be installed to provide Damper
proper operation and performance. They Sleeve
Fastener
should be installed to permit them to
maintain their shape and remain square.
Do not compress or stretch damper frame.
Damper should be installed as to prevent
any racking. Operator or
Actuator
2. The dampers should be attached to the
duct (s), sleeve or wall opening using No. Access
10 sheet metal screws, 1/4" dia. (6 mm) Door
bolts and nuts, 1/2" (13 mm) long welds, or Panel
spot welds or 3/16" (5 mm) dia. steel pop
rivets, 12" (305 mm) on center with a
minimum of three fasteners. As well,
when dampers are installed as a multiple
damper assembly, the damper frames
should all be attached to each other as 24"
outlined above. Sealant
(610 mm)
3. All joints where the damper frame meets Maximum
the duct or sleeve should be sealed using
a 1/8" (3 mm) bead of sealant - CGE1200 Duct Air Outlet, Inlet or Branch
Single Blade Damper
Silicone Construction Sealant. As well,
when dampers are installed as multiple
damper assembly, all joints between
the damper frames should be sealed as
outlined above. Smoke
Duct or Barrier Fastener
Smoke dampers must be installed at or Sleeve
adjacent to the point where the duct passes
through the smoke barrier in accordance Damper
with NFPA 90A. The maximum installation
distance is 24" (610 mm) from the smoke
barrier, however, the preferred location
of leakage rated smoke dampers is in the
smoke barrier. Duct air outlets, inlets or Operator
branches shall not be located between Access
the smoke damper and the smoke barrier. Door
Smoke dampers must not be installed in or Panel
fibrous glass-lined ducts and fibrous glass Caulking
ducts in a manner that will damage the
material. Use a hat section standoff, lining
interruption, metal sleeves or sections on
externally insulated metal duct. Provide a
duct hanger at a smoke damper location 24"
when the duct strength is inadequate for Sealant
(610 mm)
the damper and its operator. If the damper
Maximum
operator is located within the duct, an access
door must be provided. Duct Air Outlet, Inlet or Branch
Multiblade Damper
recommended.
Jul / 06 245046 SHEET 1 OF 1

single sections. Multiple assemblies may
require additional bracing. PRICE Manufac-
turing recommends appropriate bracing on
multiple assemblies at over 8' (2438mm) of
width and height.
JACKSHAFTING:
lion.
pressure, etc.)
bolts.
mount.)
6. Ball bearings.
recommended.
Damper Enclosures & Transitions

SCD-57 ...............................................................................................................................10"
Transition Collars: 22 ga. Galv. Steel.
SCD-LL-57 ..........................................................................................................................10"
*D = DIAMETER
SCD-LL-HD-57 ....................................................................................................................10"
*W = WIDTH (DUCT)
SSD-3V ............................................................................................................................. 16"
*H = HEIGHT (DUCT)
SSD-AF ............................................................................................................................ 16"
*L = LENGTH (SEE CHART)
FSD-3V .............................................................................................................................. 16"
c /w DLT or DLT-1 OR OVERRIDE RELEASE DAMPER FRAME SHOWN AS DASHED
LINES
FSD-AF .............................................................................................................................. 16"
c /w DLT OR DLT-1 OR OVERIDE RELEASE
NOTE: B TYPE TRANSITIONS MAY BE FURNISHED ON DAMPERS LESS THAN 8" IN HEIGHT. TRANSITION USED TO
REDUCE MINIMUM DAMPER/SLEEVE HEIGHT OF 8" TO 7", 6", 5" OR 4". (MINIMUM DUCT HEIGHT).
Jul / 06 245048 SHEET 1 OF 1
Damper Operators
Both electric and pneumatic damper opera- Typical Installation:

tors are available from PRICE Manufacturing
and may be factory installed (see methods
below) with either our SCD, SSD & FSD
series control dampers, smoke dampers,
and combination fire/smoke dampers. We
are constantly expanding our Underwrit-
ers Laboratories listings and therefore
recommend that you contact the factory
for the appropriateness (i.e. size limitations,
torque, and temperature) of a given fire/
smoke application. Control dampers may
be shipped with factory installed motors
provided we have the following information:
1. damper/duct size; 2. maximum velocity;
3. maximum static pressure; 4. application
(shut-off, balancing, or modulating damper); Dampers may be furnished with-out an Dampers may be furnished with factory in-
5. location of operator (internal or external); operator but with an extended shaft for on stalled mounting plate (insert type: designa-
6. pneumatic or electric system. site attachment to motor. tion IT) either with operator or extended shaft
for on site attachment. Operator mounted
out of airstream.
Suggested Specification
recommended.
Dampers may be furnished with operators Dampers may be furnished with factory in-
mounted inside duct with factory installed stalled sleeves and with operators mounted
internal motor mount. outside or inside air stream. Minimum sleeve
depth 16" (406mm).
Actuator Reference Chart
MAXIMUM DAMPER SIZE AND STATIC PRESSURE

FSD-3V and SSD-3V FSD-AF and SSD-AF
POWER Max. Velocity 2000 FPM Max. Velocity 2000 FPM
MANUFACTURER MODEL MOUNTING SUPPLY Pressure 4.0" w.g. Pressure 4.0" w.g. *

MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE - 250F
PNEUMATIC SQ FT, WIDTH, HEIGHT LIMITATIONS PER ACTUATOR
Siemens #3, 331-4826 Internal / External 25 PSI 6 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 6 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Siemens #4, 331-2961 Internal / External 25 PSI 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
ELECTRIC
Honeywell ML-8115 Internal / External 24 VAC 6 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 6 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Honeywell ML-4115 Internal / External 120 VAC 6 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 6 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Honeywell MS-8209 Internal / External 24 VAC 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Honeywell MS-4209 Internal / External 120 VAC 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Belimo FSLF24 Internal / External 24 VAC 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Belimo FSLF120 Internal / External 120 VAC 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Belimo FSNF24 Internal / External 24 VAC 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Belimo FSNF120 Internal / External 120 VAC 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Siemens GND-121-1 Internal / External 24 VAC 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Siemens GND-221-1 Internal / External 120 VAC 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 4 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Siemens GGD-121-1 Internal / External 24 VAC 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Siemens GGD-221-1 Internal / External 120 VAC 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Honeywell MS8120F Internal / External 24 VAC 18 sq.ft., 72" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Honeywell MS4120F Internal / External 120 VAC 18 sq.ft., 72" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE - 350F

PNEUMATIC SQ FT, WIDTH, HEIGHT LIMITATIONS PER ACTUATOR
9 sq.ft., 36"w, 48"h Class1 9 sq.ft., 36"w, 48"h Class1
Siemens #4, 331-2961 External 25 PSI 12 sq.ft., 36"w, 48"h Class2 12 sq.ft., 36"w, 48"h Class2
ELECTRIC
Siemens GGD-121-1 External 24 VAC 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Siemens GGD-221-1 External 120 VAC 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 9 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Honeywell MS8120F External 24 VAC 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Honeywell MS4120F External 120 VAC 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h 12 sq.ft., 36" w, 48" h
Accessories
Belimo All Models Auxiliary Switches (SPDT)
Honeywell ML-Series Auxiliary Switches (SPDT)
Siemens 147-2000 Pneumatic positioner
* Consult Factory for actuator and damper sizes on velocities up to 4000 FPM and 6" w.g.
* All 350F actuators are external mounting only.
Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our continuous improvement program, we reserve the right to
make further improvements without notice.
Jul / 06 245050 SHEET 1 OF 1
Model M/S
The M/S Switch Package provides the ability of the switch box, containing two damper
The M/S option is available on all PRICE
to remotely indicate the damper blade position indicator switches (one closes when
Model FSD Combination Fire/Smoke
position. It is two integrally mounted micro the damper is fully open and the other closes
Dampers, Model SSD Smoke dampers,
switches for positive status indications. when the damper is fully closed), a switch
and Model FDD-MB Multi-blade dampers.
Electrical interface with a remote control on/ box mounting bracket, a blade bracket,
off fan station is also possible with the M/S and hardware necessary to directly link the
package. The M/S Switch Package consists switch box to the blade.
Detailed wiring diagrams including terminal designation and/or wire

color coding furnished with each shipment.
Indicator Switch Electrical Limitations
10 Amperes, 1/4 HP, 120 or 240 Volts A.C.
5 Amperes, 120 Volts (Lamp Load)
15 Amperes, 24 Volts D.C.
All moving parts of the damper must be inspected and cycled at intervals
not greater than every six months and in accordance with the latest
edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, local codes and the actuator manufacturer.
In addition, fuse links shall be removed and inspected for corrosion.
Dry lubricants are recommended.
Specifications are correct at time of printing. However, as part of our
continuous improvement program, we reserve the right to make
Model M/S
Jul / 06 245051 SHEET 2 OF 2
Model MSD
The MSD Switch Package provides the ability to remotely indicate the damper blade position, for
direct mounting on damper driveshafts or jackshafts. It incorporates two integrally mounted
microswitches for positive status indications. Electrical interface with a remote control on/off fan
station is also possible with the MSD package. The MSD option is available on PRICE model FSD
combination fire/smoke dampers, model SSD smoke dampers, and FDD-MB multi-blade fire
dampers.
5 3
4 DIRECT DRIVE INDICATOR MOUNTING
PARTS LIST:
1) MICROSWITCH
1 2) INDICATOR SWITCH SPACER
3) SWITCH STRIKE
4) SWITCH BASE PLATE
5) SWITCH COVER
6) CONDUIT CONNECTOR
6 NOTES:
1. Fasten the base plate to the duct or sleeve with two sheet metal
SWITCH STRIKE
screws through the holes. Align the switch strike so it is centered
on the drive shaft.
2. Position the switch strike so that it actuates the microswitch

MS-1 when the damper blades are open and the microswitch MS-2
when the blades are closed. When positioned secure to the drive
shaft.
MS-2 MS-1
3. Factory furnished lead wires extend from the MLS-300 enclosure.
Field connections are to be made to the leads and enclosed in a
proper conduit.
YELLOW WHITE 4. If the output signals are reversed to that desired, reverse the
YELLOW RED field connections. Note that the wiring shown is for the indicator-
switch being mounted on the left side of the damper if it is
mounted directly to the damper axle, or on the right side of the
damper if it is mounted to a jackshaft. If the indicator switch is
mounted opposite of these locations, the wire connections should
be reversed.
L1 MS Box L2
SWITCH ELECTRICAL DATA:
Single pole, double throw switches.
250 F (121 C) max. temp. 30 min. test temp.
MS1 OPEN 11 AMPS, 1/3 HP, 125 or 250 VAC
1/2 AMP, 125 VDC, 1/4 AMP, 250 VDC
WHITE RED 4 AMPS, 125 VAC "L" (lamp load)
11 AMPS, 24 VDC
MS1 IS DAMPER OPEN SIGNAL FOR

YELLOW YELLOW INSTALLATION AS SHOWN.
CLOSED
MS2 IS DAMPER CLOSED SIGNAL FOR
MS2 INSTALLATION AS SHOWN.
Model MSD
DAMPER EXTENDED SHAFT
BLADE POSITION SWITCH PACKAGE
UNIVERSAL ACTUATOR BRACKET
ACTUATOR
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHAFT MOUNTED POSITION INDICATOR SWITCH BOX:

- REMOVE MOTOR FROM DRIVE SHAFT.
- REMOVE COVER FROM POSITION INDICATOR.
- SLIP POSITION INDICATOR OVER DRIVE SHAFT AND ATTACH TO SLEEVE.
- SLIP BRASS COLLAR OVER SHAFT AND TIGHTEN BOLT TO SHAFT, WITH THE HEAD OF
THE BOLT TO POINT UPWARDS AND MAKE CONTACT WITH THE SWITCHES IN THE
INDICATOR SWITCH BOX.
- REPLACE COVER.
- WIRE BLADE SWITCH PACKAGE DIRECTLY TO CONTROL PANEL.
- REINSTALL MOTOR ON DRIVESHAFT.
Jul / 06 245090 SHEET 2 OF 2
Smoke Dampers
SSD-3V-201 be model SSD-AF-201 by PRICE. Damper

Low Leakage Smoke Control Dampers shall blades shall be of the streamlined (airfoil)
be model SSD-3V-201 by PRICE. Both blade construction for minimum pressure drop.
edge and jamb seals shall be of the pressure Both blade edge and jamb seals shall be of
sensitive type for low leakage. Dampers the pressure sensitive type for low leakage.
shall be rated for leakage as to UL 555S Dampers shall be rated for leakage as to UL
/ ULC S112.1 and bear the Underwriters 555S / ULC S112.1 and bear the Underwriters
Laboratories label. Leakage shall not exceed Laboratories label. Leakage shall not exceed
8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure. 8 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure.
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for Linkage shall be of the concealed type for
maximum free area. maximum free area.
SSD-3V-202 SSD-AF-202
Low Leakage Smoke Control Dampers shall Low Leakage Smoke Control Dampers shall
be model SSD-3V-202 by PRICE. Single blade be model SSD-AF-202 by PRICE. Damper
edge and jamb seals shall be of the pressure blades shall be of the streamlined (airfoil)
sensitive type for low leakage. Dampers construction for minimum pressure drop.
shall be rated for leakage as to UL 555S Single blade edge and jamb seals shall be of
/ ULC S112.1 and bear the Underwriters the pressure sensitive type for low leakage.
Laboratories label. Leakage shall not exceed Dampers shall be rated for leakage as to UL
20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure. 555S / ULC S112.1 and bear the Underwriters
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for Laboratories label. Leakage shall not exceed
maximum free area. 20 cfm per sq. ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure.
Linkage shall be of the concealed type for
SSD-RD-201 maximum free area.
Round Low Leakage Smoke Control
Dampers shall be model SSD-RD-201 by
PRICE. Damper blade shall be of galvanized
steel with channel reinforcement. Blade edge
seals shall be of the pressure sensitive, high
temperature type for low leakage. Dampers
shall be rated for leakage in accordance with
UL 555S / ULC S112.1 and shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratories label for Class
I. Leakage shall not exceed 8 cfm per sq. ft.
at 4.0 inches static pressure.
SSD-RD-202
Round Low Leakage Smoke Control
Dampers shall be model SSD-RD-202 by
PRICE. Damper blade shall be of galvanized
steel with channel reinforcement. Blade edge
seals shall be of the pressure sensitive, high
temperature type for low leakage. Dampers
shall be rated for leakage in accordance with
UL 555S / ULC S112.1 and shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratories label for Class
II. Leakage shall not exceed 20 cfm per sq.
ft. at 4.0 inches static pressure.
SSD-AF-201
Low Leakage Smoke Control Dampers shall
Index Date: Feb 2011
Submittal Sheets
Backdraft Damper
Backdraft Damper
BDD-2X Extruded Aluminum Backdraft Damper 245089 (2 sheets) Feb / 11
Backdraft Damper Suggested Specifications Feb / 11
Model BDD-2X
Extruded Aluminum Backdraft Damper
Standard Construction: 21/2 (64)

Frame: Extruded aluminum.
Blades: Extruded aluminum.
Axles: 3/16" (4.8 mm) dia. aluminum.
Seals: Vinyl blade seals.
Linkage: Heavy gauge aluminum brackets
with aluminum linkage bar.
Finish: Mill aluminum.
Sizes:
Minimum Damper Size:
Single Blade - 6"w x 6"h (152 mm x 152 mm)
Maximum Damper Size: Single Section -
40"w x 52"h (1016 mm x 1321 mm)
Maximum Velocity: 2500 fpm
Options:
Counterweight: Assist or Retard
Air Flow
Flange: 11/4 (32 mm) Flange frame (front
or rear)
Mounting: Horizontal mount (up blast only)
Notes:
All dampers are fabricated 1/4" (6mm) under
listed size unless specified "actual or exact".
Dampers must be installed square and
free from racking.
3/4" (19) 53/8" (136)

11/4" (32)
Flange A Flange B
Air Flow
Feb / 11
245089
Feb / 11 245089 SHEET 1 OF 2
Model BDD-2X
Extruded Aluminum Backdraft Damper
Performance Data
BDD-2X
The following performance data and tables are developed
from testing a 24 x 24 (610mm x 610mm) BDD-2X Backdraft
Damper in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 using figure
5.5 (vertical mount, no ductwork upstream or downstream).The
data represented has been corrected to represent standard air
density, .075 lb/ft3. Testing to AMCA standard 500 is preformed
under laboratory conditions. Actual field and environmental
conditions may exist that will not allow the dampers to perform
and operate in this manner. Horizontal mounted dampers may
require high flows and create larger pressure drops. The BDD-
2X is an extruded aluminum frame and blade damper and it is
recommended for velocities up to 2500 fpm.
Position Data
Blade P Velocity
Position (in. wg) (fpm)
5% Open 0.07 45
25% Open 0.15 325
50% Open 0.25 800
75% Open 0.40 1400
100% Open 0.45 1625
Feb / 11 245089 SHEET 2 OF 2 Imperial dimensions are converted to metric and rounded to the nearest millimetre.
Backdraft Dampers
BDD-2X
Backdraft Dampers shall be model BDD-
2X by PRICE. Blade seals shall be used to
minimize leakage. Frame and blades shall
be constructed of extruded aluminum,
linkage bars shall be constructed of
aluminum. Damper performance data shall
be in accordance with AMCA standard 500.
Maximum velocity for the damper shall be
2500 fpm.
Index Date: March 2014
Submittal Sheets
Actuators / Accessories
Actuator Selection Charts / Accessories

Actuator Selection Chart Models FSD, SSD, FD-MB, FDD-MB 256128 (4 sheets) Rev.B
Actuator Selection Chart Model CCD 256129 Rev.A
DADI Duct Access Door with Insulation 256130 Rev.0
Belimo - 2 position / spring return actuators

TF24 (-S) 24VAC/DC, 18 in.lb. torque TF120 (-S) 120VAC, 18 in.lb. torque
LF24 (-S) 24VAC/DC, 35 in.lb. torque LF120 (-S) 120VAC, 35 in.lb. torque
NFB24 (-S) 24VAC/DC, 90 in.lb. torque NFBUP (-S) 120VAC, 90 in.lb. torque
AF24 (-S) 24VAC/DC, 133 in.lb. torque AF120 (-S) 120VAC, 133 in.lb. torque
FSLF24 (-S)* 24VAC, 30 in.lb. torque FSLF120 (-S)* 120VAC, 30 in.lb. torque
FSNF24 (-S)* 24VAC, 70 in.lb. torque FSNF120 (-S)* 120VAC, 70 in.lb. torque
FSLF230(-S)* 230VAC, 30 in.lb. torque FSNF230 (-S)* 230VAC, 70 in.lb. torque
Honeywell - 2 position / spring return actuators

MS8104* 24VAC, 30 in.lb. torque ML4104* 120VAC, 30 in.lb. torque
MS8109* 24VAC, 80 in.lb. torque MS4109* 120VAC, 80 in.lb. torque
MS4620* 230VAC, 175 in.lb. torque
Belimo Modulating - Spring Return Actuators

LF24-SR (-S) 24VAC/DC, 35 in.lb. torque
NFB24-SR (-S) 24VAC/DC, 90 in.lb. torque
AF24-SR 24VAC/DC, 133 in.lb. torque
AFB24-MFT (-S) 24VAC/DC, 180 in.lb. torque
AFB24-MFT95 24VAC/DC, 180 in.lb. torque
Siemens - 2 position / spring return actuators

GND-126* 24VAC/DC, 53 in.lb. torque GND-226* 120VAC, 53 in.lb. torque
GGD-121* 24VAC, 142 in.lb. torque GGD-221* 120VAC, 142 in.lb. torque
GGD-326* 230VAC, 53 in.lb. torque GGD-321* 230VAC, 142 in.lb. torque
Siemens - pneumatic
331-4826* #3 pneumatic
331-2961* #4 pneumatic
* Also approved for UL Fire and Smoke Dampers, see 256128 for details.
Contact factory for other actuator availability, including 230V applications.

Submittal Sheet
ActuatorsforFSD3V,SSD3V,FDMB3VandFDDMB3VDampers
@250F,2000fpm,4in.W.G.staticpressure
PowerSupply ActuatorType Mounting SizeLimitationPerActuator
Pneumatic(25PSI) Siemens#3,3314826 Internal/External 6sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
Siemens#4,3312961 Internal/External 12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
Electric(24VAC) HoneywellMS8104 Internal/External 6sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
HoneywellMS8109 Internal/External 9sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
HoneywellMS8120F Internal/External 12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
External 18sq.ft.,72"wx48"h(twosectionsperactuator)
BelimoFSLF24 Internal/External 4sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
BelimoFSNF24 Internal/External 12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
SiemensGND126 Internal/External 4sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
SiemensGGD1211 Internal/External 12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
NOTE:
230VAC ACTUATORS ARE SPECIAL ORDER. CONTACT FACTORY FOR LEAD TIME.
ACTUATORS MAY OPERATE A SINGLE DAMPER SECTION ONLY, EXCEPT FOR MS4120, MS4620, AND
MS8120 AS NOTED IN CHART. DAMPER SECTIONS MUST BE ORIENTED SIDE BY SIDE TO BE
OPERATED BY A SINGLE ACTUATOR.
SIEMENS GGD AND GND SERIES ACTUATORS AVAILABLE ON SPECIAL REQUEST, CONTACT FACTORY
FOR LEAD TIME AND PRICING.
ALL METRIC DIMENSIONS ( ) ARE SOFT CONVERTED. IMPERIAL DIMENSIONS ARE CONVERTED TO METRIC AND ROUNDED TO THE NEAREST MILLIMETER.
PROJECT:
FSD, SSD
ENGINEER:
FD-MB, FDD-MB
CUSTOMER: 256128 ACTUATOR SELECTION
REFERENCE CHART
SUBMITTAL DATE: SPEC. SYMBOL: 2014/02/25
Copyright PRICE INDUSTRIES 2014 SHEET 1 OF 4 REV B
Submittal Sheet
ActuatorsforFSD3VandSSD3VDampers
@350F,2000fpm,4in.W.G.staticpressure(N/AtoFDMB3VandFDDMB3Vdampers)
Pneumatic(25PSI) Siemens#4,3312961 External 9sq.ft.,36"wx48"h(class1)
12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h(class2)
HoneywellMS8120F Internal/External 9sq.ft.,36"wx48"h(class1)
NOTE:
ACTUATORS MAY OPERATE A SINGLE DAMPER SECTION ONLY, EXCEPT FOR MS4120 , MS4620 AND
MS8120 AS NOTED IN CHART. DAMPER SECTIONS MUST BE ORIENTED SIDE BY SIDE TO BE
OPERATED BY A SINGLE ACTUATOR.
PROJECT:
FSD, SSD
ENGINEER:
FD-MB, FDD-MB
REFERENCE CHART
Submittal Sheet
ActuatorsforFSDAF,SSDAF,FDMBAFandFDDMBAFDampers
@250F,2000fpm,4in.W.G.staticpressure
Pneumatic(25PSI) Siemens#3,3314826 Internal/External 6sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
Siemens#4,3312961 Internal/External 12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
HoneywellMS8120F External 12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h
ActuatorsforFSDAFandSSDAFDampers
@350F,2000fpm,4in.W.G.staticpressure(N/AtoFDMBAFandFDDMBAFdampers)
Electric(24VAC) HoneywellMS8120F External 12sq.ft.,36"wx48"h(class2)
NOTE:
ACTUATORS MAY OPERATE A SINGLE DAMPER SECTION ONLY.
PROJECT:
FSD, SSD
ENGINEER:
FD-MB, FDD-MB
REFERENCE CHART
Submittal Sheet
ActuatorsforFSDRDandSSDRDDampers
@250/350F,2000fpm,4in.W.G.staticpressure
PowerSupply ActuatorType Mounting MaximumSizeLimitation
Pneumatic(25PSI) Siemens#3,3314826 External 24"diameter
Siemens#4,3312961 External 24"diameter
Electric(24VAC) HoneywellMS8104 External 24"diameter
HoneywellMS8109 External 24"diameter
HoneywellMS8120F External 24"diameter
BelimoFSLF24 External 18"diameter
BelimoFSNF24 External 24"diameter
SiemensGND126 External 18"diameter
SiemensGGD1211 External 24"diameter
NOTE:
PROJECT:
FSD, SSD
ENGINEER:
FD-MB, FDD-MB
REFERENCE CHART
Submittal Sheet
Actuators for Model CCD - Commercial Control Dampers
Size Limitation Per Actuator

3V or AF Blades 3V or AF Blades Aluminum True Round
Power Supply Actuator Model (no Blade Seals) (w/ Blade Seals) Blades Damper
Pneumatic (25PSI) Siemens #3, 331-4826 9 sq.ft. 9 sq.ft. 9 sq.ft. 24" dia.
spring return Siemens #4, 331-2961 25 sq.ft. 25 sq.ft. 20 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Electric (120VAC) Belimo TF120 (-S) 4.5 sq.ft. 2.5 sq.ft. 1.8 sq.ft. 12" dia.
spring return Belimo LF120 (-S) 8 sq.ft. 5 sq.ft. 3.5 sq.ft. 18" dia.
Belimo NFBUP (-S) 22.5 sq.ft. 12.75 sq.ft. 9 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Belimo AF120 (-S) 33 sq.ft. 19 sq.ft. 13.3 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Honeywell MS4104 9 sq.ft. 6 sq.ft. 6 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Honeywell MS4109 20 sq.ft. 11.5 sq.ft. 8 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Honeywell MS4120 25 sq.ft. 25 sq.ft. 17.5 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Siemens GND226.1 8 sq.ft. 5 sq.ft. 3.5 sq.ft. 18" dia.
Siemens GGD221.1 25 sq.ft. 20 sq.ft. 14.1 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Electric (24VAC/DC) Belimo TF24 (-S) 4.5 sq.ft. 2.5 sq.ft. 1.8 sq.ft. 12" dia.
spring return Belimo LF24 (-S) 8 sq.ft. 5 sq.ft. 3.5 sq.ft. 18" dia.
Belimo NFB24 (-S) 22.5 sq.ft. 12.75 sq.ft. 9 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Belimo AF24 (-S) 33 sq.ft. 19 sq.ft. 13.3 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Honeywell MS8104 9 sq.ft. 6 sq.ft. 6 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Honeywell MS8109 20 sq.ft. 11.5 sq.ft. 8 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Siemens GND126.1 8 sq.ft. 5 sq.ft. 3.5 sq.ft. 18" dia.
Electric (24VAC) Honeywell MS8120 25 sq.ft. 25 sq.ft. 17.5 sq.ft. 24" dia.
spring return Siemens GGD121.1 25 sq.ft. 20 sq.ft. 14.1 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Electric (24VAC/DC) Belimo LF24-SR (-S) 8 sq.ft. 5 sq.ft. 3.5 sq.ft. 18" dia.
spring return, Belimo NFB24-SR (-S) 22.5 sq.ft. 12.75 sq.ft. 9 sq.ft. 24" dia.
modulating Belimo AF24-SR (-S) 33 sq.ft. 19 sq.ft. 13.3 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Belimo AFB24-MFT (-S) 33 sq.ft. 19 sq.ft. 13.3 sq.ft. 24" dia.
Belimo AFB24-MFT95 33 sq.ft. 19 sq.ft. 13.3 sq.ft. 24" dia.
NOTE:
BELIMO AF SERIES AND HONEYWELL MS-4120/8120 ARE SUITABLE FOR OPERATING UP TO TWO
DAMPER SECTIONS. ALL OTHER ACTUATORS MAY OPERATE ONE DAMPER SECTION ONLY.
USE ALUMINUM BLADE SQUARE FOOTAGE FOR STEEL FRAME DAMPERS WITH INSULATED BLADES.
230VAC ACTUATORS ARE AVAILABLE ON SPECIAL REQUEST. CONTACT FACTORY FOR AVAILABILITY.
SIEMENS GGD AND GND SERIES ACTUATORS ARE AVAILABLE ON SPECIAL REQUEST, CONTACT
FACTORY FOR LEAD TIME AND PRICING.
PROJECT:
CCD
ENGINEER:
CONTROL DAMPER
CHART
Copyright PRICE INDUSTRIES 2013 SHEET 1 OF 1 REV A
TF24(-S) US
On/Off, Spring Return, 24 V
Torque min. 18 in-lb, for control of air dampers
Application
For On/Off, fail-safe control of dampers in HVAC systems. Actuator sizing should be
done in accordance with the damper manufacturers specifications. Control is On/Off
from an auxiliary contact, or a manual switch.
The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft from 1/4 up to 1/2 in diameter
by means of its universal clamp, 1/2 shaft centered at delivery. A crank arm and
several mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot be
direct coupled to the damper shaft.
Operation
The TF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe
application and positive close off on air tight dampers. The spring return system
provides consistent torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the
actuator.
The TF series provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a graduated position
indicator showing 0 to 90.
The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotation without the need of
mechanical end switches. Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.
The TF24-S US versions are provided with one built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT
switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The
Technical Data TF24(-S) US switching function is adjustable between 0 and 95.
Power supply 24VAC 20%, 50/60Hz
SAFETY NOTE
24VDC 10%
Screw a conduit fitting into the actuators bushing. Jacket the actuators input and
Power consumption running 2W
output wiring with suitable flexible conduit. Properly terminate the conduit in a
holding 1.3 W suitable junction box.
Transformer sizing 5 VA (class 2 power source)
Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable
(-S models have 2 cables) 1/2 conduit connector Dimensions (Inches [mm])
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation
D096
0.68" [16.7]
Angle of rotation max 95, adjust. with mechanical stop

Torque min. 18 in-lb [2 Nm]
Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95
[83.72]
3.30"
(0 spring return position)

2.40"
[61]
Running time motor < 75 sec (0 to 18 in-lb)
M40024 - 05/10 - Subject to change. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

(nominal) spring < 25 sec @-4F to 122F [-20C to 50C]
< 60 sec @-22F [-30C]
Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
6.28"
Ambient temperature -22F to 122F [-30C to 50C] [159.5]
Storage temperature -40F to 176F [-40C to 80C] Standard:
Housing NEMA type 2 / IP42, UL enclosure type 2 1/4" to 1/2"
Housing material UL94-5VA
1/4" to 5/16"
[76.2]
[5.2]
3.0"
0.2"
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL60730-1A/-2-14, CAN/CSA

E60730-1:02, CE acc. to 2004/108/EC (and
2006/95/EC for -S versions)
Noise level (max) running < 50 db (A)
spring return 62 dB (A) 0.77" [19.5]
4.5" 0.43" [11]
Servicing maintenance free [114]
Quality standard ISO 9001

Weight TF24 1.4 lbs (0.6 kg)
TF24-S 1.5 lbs (0.7 kg)
Rated Impulse Voltage 800V, Type of action 1.AA (1.AA.B for -S version), Control Pollution Degree 3.
TF24-S US
Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 3A (0.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL approved
adjustable 0 to 95
800-543-9038 USA 866-805-7089 CANADA 203-791-8396 LATIN AMERICA
127
TF24(-S) US
Accessories Wiring Diagrams

Tool-06 8mm and 10 mm wrench
KH-TF Crank arm for up to 1/2 round shaft
ZG-TF2 Crank arm adaptor kit for TF
1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
ZG-TF112 Mounting bracket, kit for TF
ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)
2 CAUTION Equipment Damage!
ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate) Actuators may be connected in parallel.
NOTE: When using TF24 US and TF24-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page. Power consumption must be observed.
For actuator wiring information and diagrams, Please See Belimo Wiring Guide (pg 349).
3 Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.
For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., TF24-S US
Typical Specification 4 incorporates a built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 3A (0.5A) @250 VAC, UL
On/Off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which require Approved, adjustable 0 to 95.
no crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaft up to a 1/2
diameter and center a 1/2 shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they may
be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall
Meets cULus requirements without the need of an electrical ground con-
be protected from overload at all angles of rotation. If required, one SPDT auxiliary
nection.
switch shall be provided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with
auxiliary switch must be constructed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation WARNING
G Live Electrical Components!
so an electrical ground is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
cULus listed certified, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
Belimo. tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical compo-
nents could result in death or serious injury.
W567_08
On/Off wiring for TF24 US
W238_08
On/Off wiring for TF24-S US
128
TF120(-S) US
On/Off, Spring Return, 100 to 240 VAC
Application
by means of its universal clamp, 1/2 shaft centered at delivery. A crank arm and
several mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot be
direct coupled to the damper shaft.
Operation
The TF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe
actuator.
The TF series provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a graduated position
mechanical end switches. Power consumption is reduced in holding mode. The
actuator is double insulated so an electrical ground connection is not necessary.
The TF120-S US versions are provided with one built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT
Technical Data TF120(-S) US switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The
Power supply nominal 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz switching function is adjustable between 0 and 95.
tolerance 85 to 265 VAC, 50/60 Hz
SAFETY NOTE
Power consumption running 2.5 W Screw a conduit fitting into the actuators bushing. Jacket the actuators input and
holding 1.3 W output wiring with suitable flexible conduit. Properly terminate the conduit in a
Transformer sizing 5 VA (class 2 power source) suitable junction box.
(-S models have 2 cables) 1/2 conduit connector
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation Dimensions (Inches [mm])
Electrical protection actuators are double insulated
D096
0.68" [16.7]

Torque min. 18 in-lb [2 Nm]
Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting
[83.72]
3.30"
(0 spring return position)

2.40"
[61]

Running time motor < 75 sec (0 to 18 in-lb)
spring < 25 sec @-4F to 122F [-20C to 50C]
< 60 sec @-22F [-30C]
6.28"
Ambient temperature -22F to 122F [-30C to 50C] [159.5]
Storage temperature -40F to 176F [-40C to 80C] Standard:

Housing NEMA type 2 / IP42, UL enclosure type 2 1/4" to 1/2"
Housing material UL94-5VA
[76.2]
1/4" to 5/16"
[5.2]
3.0"
0.2"

E60730-1:02, CE acc. to 2004/108/EC (and
2006/95/EC for -S versions)
0.77" [19.5] 0.43" [11]
spring return 62 dB (A) 4.5"
[114]
Servicing maintenance free
Weight TF120 1.4 lbs (0.6 kg)
TF120-S 1.5 lbs (0.7 kg)
Rated Impulse Voltage 4kV, Type of action 1.AA (1.AA.B for -S version), Control Pollution Degree 3.
TF120-S US
Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 3A (0.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL approved
adjustable 0 to 95
129
TF120(-S) US

KH-TF Crank arm for up to 1/2 round shaft
ZG-TF2 Crank arm adaptor kit for TF
ZG-TF112 Mounting bracket, kit for TF
ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate) Actuators may be connected in parallel.
NOTE: When using TF120 US and TF120-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page. Power consumption must be observed.
For actuator wiring information and diagrams, refer to Belimo Wiring Guide.
For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., TF120-S US
4 incorporate one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 3A (0.5A) @250 VAC, UL
Approved, adjustable 0 to 95.
Typical Specification
On/Off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which require
no crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaft up to a 1/2 Meets cULus requirements without the need of an electrical ground con-
diameter and center a 1/2 shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they may nection.
be protected from overload at all angles of rotation. If required, one SPDT auxiliary WARNING
switch shall be provided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators must be During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
constructed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical ground necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be cULus listed and have a
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical compo-
5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control nents could result in death or serious injury.
Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.
W568
100 to 240 VAC
N L1 1 Neutral
H L2 2 Hot
TF120 US 2
On/Off wiring for TF120 US
W218_08
On/Off wiring for TF120-S US
130
LF24(-S) US
On/Off, Spring Return, 24V
Application
from an auxiliary contact, digital output, or a manual switch.
by means of its universal clamp, 1/2 shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4
use K6-1 accessory. A crank arm and several mounting brackets are available for
applications where the actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.
Operation
The LF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe
actuator.
The LF series provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a graduated position
mechanical end switches. Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.
The LF24-S US version is provided with one built in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch
is provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The
Technical Data LF24(-S) US switching function is adjustable between 0 and 95. The auxiliary switch in the
Power supply 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz LF24-S is double insulated so an electrical ground connection is not necessary.
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption running 5W Dimensions (Inches [mm])
holding 2.5 W
D010
Transformer sizing 7 VA (class 2 power source) 7.67" [195]
6.10" [155]
Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable Standard: 0.98"
[25]
0.39" [10] 0.256" [6.5]
(LF24-S US has 2 cables) 1/2 conduit connector 3/8" to 1/2"
3/8" to 7/16"
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation 3.15" [80]
Angle of rotation max. 95, adjust. with mechanical stop Optional 3.86"
[98]
1/2" to 3/4"
Torque 35 in-lb [4 Nm] w/K6-1
1.93"
[49]
0.79"
[20]
Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting accessory

0.5"
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 [12.7]
(0 is spring return position)

3.66" [93] 0.71" [18]
Running time motor < 40 to 75 sec 4.92" [125]

(nominal) spring < 25 sec @-4F to 122F [-20C to 50C] 0.74" [18.7]
< 60 sec @-22F [-30C] 3.23" [82]

2.24"
Ambient temperature -22F to 122F [-30C to 50C] [57]
Storage temperature -40F to 176F [-40C to 80C]

Housing NEMA type 2 / IP54 0.25" [6.3]
Housing material zinc coated steel

Agency listings cULus acc. to UL 873 and
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24-93
spring return 62 dB (A)
Weight LF24 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg)
LF24-S 3.2 lbs (1.45 kg)
LF24-S US
Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 3A (0.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL Approved
adjustable 0 to 95 (double insulated)
95
LF24(-S) US

AV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)
IND-LF Damper position indicator
K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4 diameter shafts
KH-LF Crank arm for up to 1/2 round shaft
ZG-LF2 Crank arm adaptor kit for LF Actuators may be connected in parallel.
ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415 Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
type actuators, and new installations
ZG-LF112 Crank arm adaptor kit for Honeywell Mod IV,
M6415 type actuators, and new installations For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., LF24-S US
4 incorporates a built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 3A (0.5A) @250 VAC, UL
ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate) Approved, adjustable 0 to 95.
ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing
NOTE: When using LF24 US and LF24-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page.
nection.
Typical Specification WARNING
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
On/Off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which require no necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4 individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
diameter and center a 1/2 shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they may be tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical compo-
used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall be nents could result in death or serious injury.
protected from overload at all angles of rotation. If required, one SPDT auxiliary switch
shall be provided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary
W047
switch must be constructed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an 24 VAC Transformer
electrical ground is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be cULus
listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International 1 Common
Line
Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo. 3
Volts 2 + Hot
LF24 US 2
On/Off wiring for LF24 US
W048
24 VAC Transformer
Line 1 Common
Volts 3
2 + Hot
S1 4
NC
S2
S3 0 to 95
NO
LF24-S US 2
On/Off wiring for LF24-S US
96
LF120(-S) US / LF230(-S) US
On/Off, Spring Return, 120/230 VAC
Application
Operation
actuator.
mechanical end switches. Power consumption is reduced in holding mode. The
actuator is double insulated so an electrical ground connection is not necessary.
The LF120-S US and LF230-S US versions are provided with one built-in auxiliary
Technical Data LF120(-S) US / LF230(-S) US switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example,
Power supply LF120(-S) US 120 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz for fan start-up. The switching function is adjustable between 0 and 95.
LF230(-S) US 230 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Dimensions (Inches [mm])
LF120(-S) US running 5.5 W
D010
holding 3.5 W 7.67" [195]
6.10" [155]
LF230(-S) US running 5W Standard: 0.98"
0.39" [10] 0.256" [6.5] [25]
3/8" to 1/2"
holding 3W
3/8" to 7/16"
Transformer sizing 3.15" [80]
LF120(-S) US 7.5 VA Optional 3.86"

[98]
1/2" to 3/4" 0.79"
LF230(-S) US 7 VA w/K6-1
1.93"
[49] [20]
Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable accessory

0.5"
(-S models have 2 cables) 1/2 conduit connector [12.7]
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation 3.66" [93] 0.71" [18]

Electrical protection actuators are double insulated 4.92" [125]

0.74" [18.7]
Torque 35 in-lb [4 Nm] constant torque 3.23" [82]
Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting 2.24"

Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 [57]

0.25" [6.3]
Electrical protection actuators are double insulated
Running time motor < 40 to 75 sec
(nominal) spring < 25 sec @-4F to 122F [-20C to 50C]
< 60 sec @-22F [-30C]
Ambient temperature -22F to 122F [-30C to 50C]
Housing NEMA type 2 / IP54
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24-93
Weight LF120/230 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg)
LF120/230-S 3.5 lbs (1.60 kg)
LF120-S US / LF230-S US
adjustable 0 to 95
97
LF120(-S) US / LF230(-S) US
On/Off, Spring Return, 120/230 VAC

AV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)
IND-LF Damper position indicator
KH-LF Crank arm for up to 1/2 round shaft
ZG-LF2 Crank arm adaptor kit for LF Actuators may be connected in parallel.
ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415 Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
type actuators, and new installations
3 No ground connection is required.
ZG-LF112 Crank arm adaptor kit for Honeywell Mod IV,
M6415 type actuators, and new installations For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., LF120-S US
4 and LF230-S US incorporate one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 3A
ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate) (0.5A) @250 VAC, UL Approved, adjustable 0 to 95.
NOTE: When using LF120/230 US & LF120-S/230-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page.
nection.
Typical Specification WARNING
On/Off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which require necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
no crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4 individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
diameter and center a 1/2 shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they may tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical compo-
be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall nents could result in death or serious injury.
be protected from overload at all angles of rotation. If required, one SPDT auxiliary
switch shall be provided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators must be
W049
constructed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical ground 120 VAC
is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be cULus listed, have a 5 230 VAC
year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control
Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo. L1 N 1 Neutral
1 3
L2 H 2 Hot
LF120 US
LF230 US 2
On/Off wiring for LF120 US / LF230 US
W050_08
On/Off wiring for LF120-S US / LF230-S US
98
NFB24, NFB24-S, NFX24, NFX24-S
Application
The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05 in diameter by means
of its universal clamp. A crank arm and several mounting brackets are available for
Operation
The NFB and NFX series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-
safe application and positive close off on air tight dampers. The spring return system
provides constant torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the
actuator.
The NFB and NFX series provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a graduated
position indicator showing 0 to 95.
mechanical end switches.
Technical Data NFB24, NFB24-S, NFX24, NFX24-S
The NFB24-S and NFX24-S versions are provided with two built-in auxiliary switches.
Power supply 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz
These SPDT switches are provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for
24 VDC +20% / -10%
fan start-up. The switching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +10, the other
Power consumption running 6 W
switch function is adjustable between +10 to +90. The NFB24, NFB24-S, NFX24
holding 2.5 W and NFX24-S actuator is shipped at +5 (5 from full fail-safe) to provide automatic
Transformer sizing 8.5 VA (class 2 power source) compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off.
Electrical connection
NFB24... 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable, 1/2" conduit
connector Dimensions (Inches [mm])
-S models: two 3 ft, 18 gauge appliance cables
WAFBNFBDim
with 1/2 conduit connectors K7-2 (supplied)
NFX24... 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or 16 ft [5m] 18 GA 1/2" Centered 3/4" Centered 1.05" Centered
(Default) (Field Selectable) (Field Selectable)
appliance or plenum cables, with or without 1/2
conduit connector
-S models: two 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or
16 ft [5m] appliance cables, with or without 1/2"
conduit connectors
Control on/off

Torque 90 in-lb [10 Nm] minimum
Direction of rotation spring reversible with CW/CCW mounting
Mechanical angle of rotation 95 (adjustable with mechanical end stop, 35 to
95)
Running time motor < 75 seconds
spring 20 seconds @ -4F to 122F [-20C to 50C];
< 60 seconds @ -22F [-30C]
(0 is full spring return position)
Manual override 5 mm hex crank (" Allen), supplied
Humidity max. 95% RH non-condensing
Housing Nema 2, IP54, Enclosure Type2
Housing material zinc coated metal and plastic casing
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL60730-1A/-2-14,
CAN/CSA E60730-1:02, CE acc. to
2004/108/EC & 2006/95/EC
Noise level <50dB(A) motor @ 75 seconds
62dB(A) spring return
Weight 4.15 lbs (1.9 kg); 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) with switches
NFB24-S, NFX24-S
Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 3A (0.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL approved
one set at +10, one adjustable 10 to 90
67
NFB24, NFB24-S, NFX24, NFX24-S

AV 8-25 Shaft extension
IND-AFB Damper position indicator
KH-AFB Crank arm
K7-2 Universal clamp for up to 1.05 dia jackshafts
TF-CC US Conduit fitting
Tool-06 8mm and 10 mm wrench Actuators may be connected in parallel.
ZG-100 Universal mounting bracket Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
ZG-101 Universal mounting bracket
ZG-118 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman MA 3../4.., Honeywell
Mod III or IV or Johnson Series 100 replacement or new crank For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., NFB24-S and
4 NFX24-S incorporates two built-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT, 3A (0.5A)
arm type installations
ZG-AFB Crank arm adaptor kit @250 VAC, UL Approved, one switch is fixed at +10, one is adjustable 10
ZG-AFB118 Crank arm adaptor kit to 90.
ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)
ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing Meets cULus requirements without the need of an electrical ground con-
ZS-300 NEMA 4X housing nection.
Note: When using NFB24, NFB24-S, NFX24, NFX24-S actuators, only use accessories listed on
this page. WARNING
For actuator wiring information and diagrams, refer to Belimo Wiring Guide. During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
Typical Specification nents could result in death or serious injury.
no crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a
W063_NFB(X)
1.05 diameter. The actuators must be designed so that they may be used for either 24 VAC Transformer
1
clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall be protected
from overload at all angles of rotation. If required, two SPDT auxiliary switch shall 1 Common
be provided having the capability of one being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary
Line
Volts 3
switches must be constructed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so 2 + Hot
an electrical ground is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be
cULus Approved and have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001
International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo. NFB24, NFB24-S
NFX24, NFX24-S 2
On/Off wiring for NFB24, NFX24
W064_NFB(X)_-S
NFB24-S
NFX24-S
Auxiliary Switches for NFB24-S, NFX24-S
68
NFBUP, NFBUP-S, NFXUP, NFXUP-S
Application
Operation
safe application and positive close off on air tight dampers. The spring return system
actuator.
The NFB and NFX series provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a graduated
position indicator showing 0 to 95.
mechanical end switches.
Technical Data NFBUP, NFBUP-S, NFXUP, NFXUP-S
Power supply 24...240 VAC -20% / +10%, 50/60 Hz The NFBUP-S and NFXUP-S versions are provided with two built-in auxiliary switches.
24...125 VDC 10% These SPDT switches provide safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-
Power consumption running 6 W up. The switching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +10, the other switch
holding 2.5 W function is adjustable between +10 to +90. The NFBUP, NFBUP-S, NFXUP and
Transformer sizing 6 VA @ 24 VAC (class 2 power source) NFXUP-S actuator is shipped at +5 (5 from full fail-safe) to provide automatic
6.5 VA @ 120 VAC compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off.
9.5 VA @ 240 VAC
Dimensions (Inches [mm])
NFBUP... 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable, 1/2" conduit
WAFBNFBDim
connector
K7-2 (supplied)
-S models: Two 3 ft, 18 gauge appliance cables
1.05" Centered
with 1/2 conduit connectors 1/2" Centered
(Default)
3/4" Centered
(Field Selectable) (Field Selectable)
NFXUP... 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or 16 ft [5m] 18 GA
appliance cable, with or without 1/2 conduit
connector
-S models: two 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or
16 ft [5m] appliance cables with or without 1/2"
conduit connectors

Control on/off
Mechanical angle of rotation 95 (adjustable with mechanical end stop,
35 to 95)
Running time motor < 75 seconds
spring 20 seconds @ -4F to 122F [-20C to 50C];
< 60 seconds @ -22F [-30C]
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL60730-1A/-2-14,
CAN/CSA E60730-1:02, CE acc. to
2004/108/EC & 2006/95/EC
Noise level <50dB(A) motor @ 75 seconds
Weight 4.15 lbs (1.9 kg), 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) with switches
Rated Impulse Voltage 4kV, Type of action 1.AA (1.AA.B for -S version), Control Pollution Degree 3.
NFBUP-S, NFXUP-S
69
NFBUP, NFBUP-S, NFXUP, NFXUP-S

KH-AFB Crank arm
Tool-06 8mm and 10 mm wrench Actuators may be connected in parallel.
ZG-100 Universal mounting bracket Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
Mod III or IV or Johnson Series 100 replacement or new crank For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., NFBUP-S and
4 NFXUP-S incorporates two built-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT, 3A (0.5A)
arm type installations
ZG-AFB Crank arm adaptor kit @250 VAC, UL Approved, one switch is fixed at +10, one is adjustable 10
ZG-AFB118 Crank arm adaptor kit to 90.
ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing Meets cULus requirements without the need of an electrical ground con-
ZS-300 NEMA 4X housing nection.
Note: When using NFBUP, NFBUP-S, NFXUP, NFXUP-S actuators, only use accessories listed on
this page. WARNING
For actuator wiring information and diagrams, refer to Belimo Wiring Guide. During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
Typical Specification nents could result in death or serious injury.
no crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a
W066_NFB(X)UP
1.05 diameter. The actuators must be designed so that they may be used for either
clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall be protected
from overload at all angles of rotation. If required, two SPDT auxiliary switch shall
be provided having the capability of one being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary
switches must be constructed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so
an electrical ground is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be
International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by
Belimo.
NFBUP, NFBUP-S
NFXUP, NFBUP-S
On/Off wiring for NFBUP, NFXUP
W067_NFB(X)UP-S
Wht
Blk
NFBUP-S
NFXUP-S
Auxiliary Switches for NFBUP-S, NFXUP-S
70
AF24(-S) US
Application
Operation
The AF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe
actuator.
The AF series provide 95 of rotation and are provided with a graduated position
indicator showing 0 to 95. The AF has a unique manual positioning mechanism
which allows the setting of any damper position within its 95 of rotation. The AF
series actuators are shipped at +5 (5 from full fail-safe) to provide automatic
compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power is applied to the
AF series, the manual mechanism is released. The actuators will now try to close
against the 0 position during its normal control operations. The manual override can
also be released physically by the use of a crank supplied with the actuator.
Technical Data AF24... US The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an Application Specific
Power supply 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and controls the actuators rotation and
24 VDC 10% provides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall
Power consumption running 5 W condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotation without the
holding 1.5 W need of mechanical end switches.
Transformer sizing 10 VA (class 2 power source) The AF24-S US version is provided with two built in auxiliary switches. These SPDT
Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable switches are provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up.
(-S models have 2 cables) 1/2 conduit connector The switching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5, the other switch
Electrical protection auxiliary switches are double insulated function is adjustable between +25 to +85.
Angle of rotation 95, adjustable 35 to 95 w/ZDB-AF2 US
Torque 133 in-lb [15 Nm] constant Dimensions (Inches [mm])
Direction of rotation reversible with CW/CCW mounting
D001
0.65" [16.5]
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 K4-2 US (supplied)

3.25" [82.7]

1/2" Centered
(Default)
Manual override 3mm hex crank (shipped w/actuator)
2.24"
[57]
Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL approved 3/4" Centered

(Field Selectable)
1.05" Centered 0.19" [5]
Running time 150 seconds constant, independent of load, (Field Selectable)
spring return < 20 seconds
10.47" [266]
Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing 0.39" [10] 2.64"
5.85" [148.5]
K4-1 US (optional) [67]
Ambient temperature -22F to 122F [-30C to 50C] 0.35" [9] 0.26" [6.5]
3/4" to 1.05"
Storage temperature -40F to 176F [-40C to 80C] 1.93"
Adjustable [49]
3.86" [98]
3.15" [80]

K4 US (optional)
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24-93 3/8" to 3/4"
Adjustable
1.97"
[50]
Noise level max. 45 dB (A)
Weight 6.0 lbs (2.7 kg)
43
AF24(-S) US

IND-AF2 Damper position indicator
K4 US Universal clamp for 3/8 to 3/4 shafts
K4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05 dia jackshafts
K4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8 to 5/8
KH-AF Crank arm for up to 3/4 round shaft (Series 2) Actuators may be connected in parallel.
KH-AF-1 Crank arm for up to 1.05 jackshaft (Series 2) Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1
ZG-HTR Thermostat/Heater Kit For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., AF24-S US
ZDB-AF2 US Angle of rotation limiter 4 incorporates two built-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250
ZG-100 Universal mounting bracket VAC, UL Approved, one switch is fixed at +5, one is adjustable 25 to 85.
ZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracket
ZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV Meets cULus requirements without the need of an electrical ground con-
ZG-107 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod III or Johnson Series nection.
100 replacement or new crank arm type installations
ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman MA 3../4.., WARNING
Honeywell Mod III or IV or Johnson Series 100 necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
replacement or new crank arm type installations individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
ZG-AF US Crank arm adaptor kit for AF/NF tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical compo-
ZG-AF108 Crank arm adaptor kit for AF/NF nents could result in death or serious injury.
W002_08
ZS-300 NEMA 4X housing
NOTE: When using AF24 US and AF24-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page.
On/Off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which require no
crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05
diameter. The actuators must be designed so that they may be used for either
clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall have a manual
positioning mechanism accessible on its cover. Actuators shall use a brushless DC
motor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be
constant and independent of torque. If required, two SPDT auxiliary switches shall be
provided with one switch having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with
switches must be constructed to meet the requirement for Double Insulation so an
electrical ground connection is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be
cULus listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001
International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.
On/Off control for AF24-S US
W001
1 24 VAC Transformer
Line 1 Common
Volts 3
2 + Hot
AF24 US 2
On/Off control for AF24 US
44
AF120(-S) US, AF230(-S) US
On/Off, Spring Return, 120 or 230 VAC
Application
Operation
actuator.
The AF series provide 95 of rotation and are provided with a graduated position
indicator showing 0 to 95. The AF has a unique manual positioning mechanism
which allows the setting of any damper position within its 95 of rotation. The AF
series actuators are shipped at +5 (5 from full fail-safe) to provide automatic
compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power is applied to the
AF series, the manual mechanism is released. The actuators will now try to close
against the 0 position during its normal control operations. The manual override can
Technical Data AF120... US, AF230... US also be released physically by the use of a crank supplied with the actuator.
Power supply The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an Application Specific
AF120(-S) US 120 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and controls the actuators rotation and
AF230(-S) US 230 VAC 15% 50/60 Hz provides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall
Power consumption condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotation without the
AF120(-S) US running 8W need of mechanical end switches. The actuators are Double Insulated so a ground
holding 3W connection is not required.
AF230(-S) US running 8.5 W The AF120/230-S US version is provided with two built-in auxiliary switches. These
holding 3W SPDT switches are provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan
Transformer sizing start-up. The switching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5, the other
AF120(-S) US 11 VA switch function is adjustable between +25 to +85.
AF230(-S) US 11 VA
(-S models have 2 cables) 1/2 conduit connector
D001
Electrical protection actuators are double insulated 0.65" [16.5]
K4-2 US (supplied)

3.25" [82.7]
Angle of rotation 95, adjustable 35 to 95 w/ZDB-AF2 US 1/2" Centered

(Default)
2.24"
[57]
Torque 133 in-lb [15 Nm] constant

3/4" Centered
Direction of rotation reversible with CW/CCW mounting (Field Selectable)
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 1.05" Centered 0.19" [5]
(Field Selectable)
Manual override 3mm hex crank (shipped w/actuator) 10.47" [266]
0.39" [10] 2.64"
Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL approved K4-1 US (optional)
0.35" [9] [67]
5.85" [148.5]
0.26" [6.5]
(AF120/230-S) one set at +5, one adjustable 25 to 85 3/4" to 1.05"
1.93"
Running time 150 seconds constant, independent of load,

[49]
Adjustable
3.86" [98]
3.15" [80]
spring return < 20 seconds

Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing K4 US (optional)
3/8" to 3/4" 1.97"
Storage temperature -40F to 176F [-40C to 80C] Adjustable [50]
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24-93
45
AF120(-S) US, AF230(-S) US
On/Off, Spring Return, 120 or 230 VAC

KH-AF Crank arm for up to 3/4 round shaft (Series 2)
KH-AF-1 Crank arm for up to 1.05 jackshaft (Series 2) Actuators may be connected in parallel.
KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1 Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
ZG-HTR Thermostat/Heater Kit
ZDB-AF2 US Angle of rotation limiter For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., AF120/240-S
ZG-100 Universal mounting bracket 4 US incorporates two built-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250
ZG-101 Universal mounting bracket VAC, UL Approved, one switch is fixed at +5, one is adjustable 25 to 85.
ZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV replacement or new
crank arm type installations Meets cULus requirements without the need of an electrical ground con-
ZG-107 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod III or Johnson Series nection.
ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman MA 3../4.., WARNING
Honeywell Mod III or IV or Johnson Series 100
necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or
replacement or new crank arm type installations other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform
ZG-AF US Crank arm adaptor kit for AF/NF these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical
ZG-AF108 Crank arm adaptor kit for AF/NF components could result in death or serious injury.
W004_08
NOTE: When using AF120/230 US and AF120/230-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page.
On/Off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which
require no crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a
jackshaft up to a 1.05 diameter. The actuators must be designed so that
they may be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe
operation. Actuators shall have a manual positioning mechanism accessible
on its cover. Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor and be protected

from overload at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant and
independent of torque. If required, two SPDT auxiliary switches shall be
provided with one switch having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators
must be constructed to meet the requirement for Double Insulation so an
electrical ground connection is not required to meet agency listings.
Actuators shall be cULus listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be
manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.
Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo. On/Off wiring for AF120-S US and AF230-S US
W003_08
On/Off wiring for AF120 US and AF230 US
46
FSLF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSLF120(-S)(-FC) US
70154-00001D
On/Off, Spring Return, 350F for Half Hour, 15 Seconds Cycle Time
Application
The type FSLF spring-return actuator is intended for the operation of smoke and
combination fire and smoke dampers in ventilation and air-conditioning systems. The
actuator will meet requirements of UL555 and UL555S when tested as an assembly
with the damper and will meet requirements of UBC for 15 second opening and
closing. Square footage of damper operated will depend on make and model and the
temperature required.
Operation
Mounting of the actuator to the damper axle shaft or jackshaft is via a cold-weld
clamp. Teeth in the clamp and V-bolt dig into the metal of both solid and hollow shafts
maintaining a perfect connection. The specially designed clamp will not crush hollow
shafts. The bottom end of the actuator is held by an anti-rotation strap or by a stud
provided by the damper manufacturer.
The actuator is mounted in its fail safe position with the damper blade(s) closed. Upon
applying power, the actuator drives the damper to the open position. The internal
Technical Data FSLF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSLF120(-S)(-FC) US spring is tensioned at the same time. If the power supply is interrupted, the spring
Power supply moves the damper back to its fail-safe position.
FSLF24(-S)(-FC) US 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz
FSLF120(-S)(-FC) US 120 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption running 50/60 Hz, 15 VA SAFETY NOTES
The actuator contains no components which the user can replace or repair.
24 VAC holding 50/60 Hz, 3.5 VA
24 VAC Connect via safety isolating transformer, Class 2 supply.
end stop 50/60 Hz 25 VA
120 VAC running 50/60 Hz 18 VA 1/2" Threaded Connector
holding 50/60 Hz 6.5 VA Screw a conduit fitting into the actuators metal bushing. Jacket the actuators
end stop 50/60 Hz 27 VA input wiring with suitable flexible conduit. Properly terminate the conduit in a
Fusing* suitable junction box.
FSLF24 1 amp slow blow 3/8" Flex Connector (-FC models)
FSLF120 0.25 amp slow blow Mount the flexible conduit into the actuators metal bushing by means of the
Transformer sizing 25 VA per 24 VAC actuator provided screw with a torque of 1.2 Nm. Jacket the actuators input wiring with
Electrical connection suitable flexible conduit. Properly terminate the conduit in a suitable junction box.
FSLF24 US 3 ft, 18 ga, 2 color coded leads
FSLF...-S US 3 ft, 18 ga, appliance cable
FSLF120Dims
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation 7.03"
[179]
auto-restart after temporary overload (FSLF120 6.81"
US grounded enclosure) 0.45" [11]
[173]
1.1"
[28]
Control microprocessor
Angle of rotation 95 max 0.79"
[20]
Torque 30 in-lb [3.5 Nm] minimum
from 32F to 350F [0C to 177C] 2.37"
[60]
3.86"
"
[98]
Direction of rotation spring can be selected by CCW/CW mounting
Subject to change. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
min 0.5"
0.2 [12.7]
Running time motor < 15 sec at rated voltage and torque 5.42"
32F to +122F [0C to +50C] [138]
spring <15 seconds at rated voltage and torque

0.75" [19]
Ambient temperature 32F to 122F [0C to 50C]
2.24"
Storage temperature -40F to 176F [-40C to 80C] [57]
Housing NEMA type 1 0.24" [6]

Gears permanently lubricated
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL60730-1A/-2-14, CAN/CSA *Individual Fusing or Breakers are not required by Belimo.
E60730-1, CSA C22.2 No.24-93 The FSLF24 draws higher peak current when driving against any type of stop. Given
Servicing maintenance free the technology of fuses & breakers, this requires the value of fuse or breaker to be
Quality standard ISO 9001 increased to avoid nuisance opening or tripping. A 1 amp slow blow should be used
Weight for 24VAC. A 0.25 amp slow blow should be used for 120VAC.
FSLF24(-S) US 3.4 lbs [1.7 kg], (+ 0.3 lbs [+0.14 kg])

Auxiliary switch 2 x SPST 0.5 A inductive, 3A resistive @ 120/
250VAC, minimum 1 mA @ 5 VDC, .3 A ind, .5A
res @ 24VDC, UL listed, 10 and 85.
Double insulated
800-543-9038 USA 866-805-7089 CANADA 203-791-8396 LATIN AMERICA/CARIBBEAN
1
Typical Applications Wiring Diagrams

The typical fire and smoke damper requires from 5-15 in-lb of torque per square
foot at 250F - 350F under dynamic load (2000 fpm velocity). The FSLF is a single
section damper actuator. For the multi section dampers, use the FSNF series. 1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
This is a direct coupled actuator. If linkages are needed use the FSNF series.
Actuators may be connected in parallel.
Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
3 No ground on 24 V models
4 S4 makes to S6 when the actuator is powered open.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc.,
5 FSLF24-S US and FSLF120-S US incorporate two built-in
Single section Two section for auxiliary switches.
for one two FSLF actuators Double insulated
6
FSLF actuator
WARNING
Typical Specification necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or
Smoke Control and Combination Fire and Smoke Control Damper Actuators other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform
these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical
All smoke and combination fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with Belimo components could result in death or serious injury.
FSLF, FSNF, or FSAF actuators. No substitutions allowed. Damper and actuator shall
have UL555S Listing for 250F (350F) and shall comply with UBC if required by
W201
local codes. Where proof of closure switches are required, blade switches, actuator
auxiliary switches, or proximity switches are allowed.
24V 120V
Replacement Applications C=Blk N=Wht 1 Common, Neutral
1
The number one "equal or better" requirement for use as a replacement for obsolete H=Red L1=Blk 2 Hot
defective motors is the UL555S listing of the Belimo actuator with the damper for the 3 Ground
application. The local authority having jurisdiction sets the requirements. In some No ground on 24 V models
cases a permit and inspection may be required. FSLF24 US
2
FSLF120 US
Go to www.belimo.us/firesmoke for a Cross Reference from old damper actuators
to Belimo. Extensive retrofit installation instructions are available, along with
technical training information.
FSLF120_Parallel_Aux_wiring
CAUTION
24V 120V
Caution must be used when replacing failed motors with new Belimo actuators. C=Blk N=Wht 1 1
Many old motors did not have internal springs and depended on external springs
on the side of the damper or wrapped around the damper shaft to close the H=Red L1=Blk 2 2

damper. Old motor springs must be removed or disabled. Do not remove fusible
link springs if they had only fire and no smoke functions Gnd Gnd
In some cases, a BAE 165 or equal thermal sensor must be installed. 3
Parallel Actuator Wiring

Violet S1
Violet S2
NC
10
5
Gray S4
6
Gray S6
NO
4 85
FSLF24-S US
FSLF120-S US
Auxiliary switch wiring for FSLF24-S US, FSLF120-S US
2
FSLF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSLF230(-S) US
70266-00001D
Application
The type FSLF spring-return actuator is intended for the operation of smoke and
with the damper and will meet requirements of UBC for 15 second opening and
closing. Square footage of damper operated will depend on make and model and the
temperature required.
Operation
Mounting of the actuator to the damper axle shaft or jackshaft is via a cold-weld
clamp. Teeth in the clamp and V-bolt dig into the metal of both solid and hollow shafts
maintaining a perfect connection. The specially designed clamp will not crush hollow
shafts. The bottom end of the actuator is held by an anti-rotation strap or by a stud
provided by the damper manufacturer.
The actuator is mounted in its fail-safe position with the damper blade(s) closed. Upon
Technical Data FSLF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSLF230(-S) US spring is tensioned at the same time. If the power supply is interrupted, the spring
Power supply moves the damper back to its fail-safe position.
FSLF24(-S)(-FC) US 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz
FSLF230(-S) US 230 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption running 50/60 Hz, 15 VA SAFETY NOTES
24 VAC holding 50/60 Hz, 3.5 VA
24 VAC Connect via safety isolating transformer, Class 2 supply.
end stop 50/60 Hz 25 VA
230 VAC running 50/60 Hz 17 VA 1/2" Threaded Connector
holding 50/60 Hz 6.5 VA Screw a conduit fitting into the actuators metal bushing. Jacket the actuators
end stop 50/60 Hz 27 VA input wiring with suitable flexible conduit. Properly terminate the conduit in a
Fusing* suitable junction box.
FSLF24 1 amp slow blow 3/8" Flex Connector (-FC models)
FSLF230 0.125 amp slow blow Mount the flexible conduit into the actuators metal bushing by means of the
Transformer sizing 25 VA per 24 VAC actuator provided screw with a torque of 1.2 Nm. Jacket the actuators input wiring with
Electrical connection suitable flexible conduit. Properly terminate the conduit in a suitable junction box.
FSLF...-S US 3 ft, 18 ga, appliance cable
FSLF120Dims
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation 7.03"
[179]
auto-restart after temporary overload (FSLF230 6.81"
US grounded enclosure) 0.45" [11]
[173]
1.1"
[28]
Angle of rotation 95 max 0.79"
[20]
from 32F to 350F [0C to 177C] 2.37"
[60]
3.86"
"
[98]
min 0.5"
0.2 [12.7]
Running time motor < 15 sec at rated voltage and torque 5.42"
32F to +122F [0C to +50C] [138]
spring <15 seconds at rated voltage and torque

0.75" [19]
Ambient temperature 32F to 122F [0C to 50C]
2.24"
Housing NEMA type 1 0.24" [6]

Gears permanently lubricated
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL60730-1A/-2-14, CAN/CSA *Individual Fusing or Breakers are not required by Belimo.
E60730-1, CSA C22.2 No.24-93 The FSLF24 draws higher peak current when driving against any type of stop. Given
Servicing maintenance free the technology of fuses & breakers, this requires the value of fuse or breaker to be
Quality standard ISO 9001 increased to avoid nuisance opening or tripping. A 1 amp slow blow should be used
Weight for 24VAC. A 0.125 amp slow blow should be used for 230VAC.

Auxiliary switch 2 x SPST 0.5 A inductive, 3A resistive @ 120/
250VAC, minimum 1 mA @ 5 VDC, .3 A ind, .5A
res @ 24VDC, UL listed, 10 and 85.
Double insulated
1

The typical fire and smoke damper requires from 5-15 in-lb of torque per square
foot at 250F - 350F under dynamic load (2000 fpm velocity). The FSLF is a single
section damper actuator. For the multi section dampers, use the FSNF series. 1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
This is a direct coupled actuator. If linkages are needed use the FSNF series.
3 No ground on 24 V models
4 S4 makes to S6 when the actuator is powered open.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc.,
5 FSLF24-S US and FSLF230-S US incorporate two built-in
Single section Two section for auxiliary switches.
for one two FSLF actuators Double insulated
6
FSLF actuator
WARNING
Typical Specification necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or
Smoke Control and Combination Fire and Smoke Control Damper Actuators other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform
All smoke and combination fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with Belimo components could result in death or serious injury.
FSLF, FSNF, or FSAF actuators. No substitutions allowed. Damper and actuator shall
have UL555S Listing for 250F (350F) and shall comply with UBC if required by
FSLF230on-off_wiring
local codes. Where proof of closure switches are required, blade switches, actuator
auxiliary switches, or proximity switches are allowed.
24V 230V
Replacement Applications C=Blk N=Blu 1 Common, Neutral
1
The number one "equal or better" requirement for use as a replacement for obsolete H=Red L1=Brn 2 Hot
defective motors is the UL555S listing of the Belimo actuator with the damper for the 3 Ground
application. The local authority having jurisdiction sets the requirements. In some No ground on 24 V models
cases a permit and inspection may be required. FSLF24 US
2
FSLF230 US
CAUTION
24V 230V
Caution must be used when replacing failed motors with new Belimo actuators. C=Blk N=Blu 1 1
on the side of the damper or wrapped around the damper shaft to close the H=Red L1=Brn 2 2

link springs if they had only fire and no smoke functions Gnd Gnd
In some cases, a BAE 165 or equal thermal sensor must be installed. 3

Violet S1
Violet S2
NC
10
5
Gray S4
6
Gray S6
NO
4 85
FSLF24-S US
FSLF230-S US
Auxiliary switch wiring for FSLF24-S US, FSLF230-S US
2
FSNF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSNF120(-S)(-FC) US
70274D
Application
The type FSNF spring-return actuator is intended for the operation of smoke and
with the damper and will open and close in 15 seconds at 350F. Square footage of
damper operated will depend on make and model of damper and the temperature
250F or 350F.
Operation
Mounting of the actuator to the damper axle shaft or jackshaft (3/8 to 1.05) is via a
cold-weld clamp. Teeth in the clamp and V-bolt dig into the metal of both solid and
hollow shafts maintaining a perfect connection. The specially designed clamp will not
crush hollow shafts. The bottom end of the actuator is held by an anti-rotation strap
or by a stud provided by the damper manufacturer.
spring is tensioned at the same time. If the power supply is interrupted, the spring
moves the damper back to its fail-safe position.
Technical Data FSNF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSNF120(-S)(-FC) US -FC Models have the same electrical and mechanical characteristics except instead of
Power supply a 1/2" conduit connector a 3/8" screw flex connector is supplied.
FSNF24(-S)(-FC) US 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz
FSNF120(-S)(-FC) US 120 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz SAFETY NOTES
Power consumption running 17 W, 24 VA The actuator contains no components which the user can replace or repair.
24 VAC holding 4 W, 6.5 VA
120 VAC running 19 W, 23 VA, 0.19 A 1/2" Threaded Connector Screw a conduit fitting into the actuators metal
holding 6 W, 8.5 VA, 0.07 A bushing. Jacket the actuators input wiring with suitable flexible conduit. Properly
terminate the conduit in a suitable junction box.
Fusing*
FSNF24 2.5 amp slow blow 3/8" Flexible Connector Models (-FC Screw Connector) Mount the flexible
FSNF120 0.5 amp slow blow conduit into the actuators metal bushing by means of the provided screw with a
Transformer sizing 40 VA per 24 VAC actuator torque of 0.9 ft-lb. Jacket the actuators input wiring with suitable flexible conduit.
Electrical connection Properly terminate the conduit in a suitable junction box.
FSNF24 US 3 ft, 18 ga, 2 color coded leads
FSNF120 US 3 ft, 18 ga, 3 color coded leads Dimensions (Inches [mm])
FSNF...-S US 3 ft, 18 ga, appliance cable
0.65" [16.5]
0.19"
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation grounded Standard:
[5]
enclosure, 120V 1/2" to 1.05"
3.25" [82.7]
2.24"
[57]
Optional*
Angle of rotation 95
3/8" to 3/4"
from 32F to 350F [0C to 177C]
0.19" [5]
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 0.39" [10]
10.20" [259]
2.64"
5.85" [148.5]
Running time between 32F and 350F [0C to 177C] 0.35" [9] [67]
0.26" [6.5]
<15 seconds at rated voltage and torque
1.93"
1.62"
[49]
3.86" [98]
3.15" [80]
[41.2]
Ambient temperature 32F to 122F [0C to 50C] *with K4 US
[73.5]
2.89"
clamp
-S models only
Housing NEMA type 1
1.97"
Housing material zinc coated steel [50]
7.54"
Gears steel, permanently lubricated
[191.6]
Agency listings cULus listed to UL873 and
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24
NYC Department of Buildings Materials and
Equipment Acceptance Division MEA 197-07-M Accessories
California State Fire Marshal Listing All AF/NF linkages and parts except ZG-102 may be employed.
3210-1593:101
Servicing maintenance free * Individual Fusing or Breakers are not required by Belimo.
The FSNF24 draws higher peak current when driving against any type of stop. Given
Weight
the technology of fuses & breakers, this requires the value of fuse or breaker to be
FSNF24(-S) US 6.0 lbs [2.75 kg], (+ 0.5 lbs [+.23 kg])
increased to avoid nuisance opening or tripping. A 2.5 amp slow blow should be used
FSNF120(-S) US 6.7 lbs [3.0 kg], (+ 0.5 lbs [+.23 kg]) for 24VAC. A 0.5 amp slow blow should be used for 120VAC.
FSNF24-S US, FSNF120-S US, FSNF24-S-FC, FSNF120-S-FC Transformers
Auxiliary switch 2xSPST 7A resistive, 2.5A inductive at 120V or Note that while a 100VA transformer would handle 2 actuators, a 4A breaker is
250V, UL Approved, double-insulated, one switch insufficient.
at 10, one at 85
1
FSNF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSNF120(-S)(-FC) US

Multi-section Damper Assemblies
The typical fire and smoke damper requires from 5-15 in-lb of torque per square foot
at 250F 350F under dynamic load (2400 fpm velocity). The FSNF will operate 1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
multi-section dampers using multiple actuators for multiple sections. Some of the
methods used are shown below. 2 CAUTION Equipment Damage!
This is a direct coupled actuator. If linkages are needed use those for the FSAF
series. Do not use the ZG-102 as close coupled actuators have a shortened life due
to the high speed of the FSNF. Mounting at opposite ends of a jackshaft is OK. For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., FSNF24-S
4 US and FSNF120-S US incorporate two built-in auxiliary switches:
2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A inductive)@125/250 VAC, UL Approved, 10 and 85.
Switch rating is for 250F 1/2 hour only.
WARNING
Blank-off Channel necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or
Single section other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform
for one
FSNF actuator
components could result in death or serious injury.
Blank-off
W177
Channel
24V 120V
Wht C N 1 Neutral
1
Blk H L1 2 Hot
3 Ground
Use of blank-offs between damper sections to No ground on 24 V models

provide space for actuator mounting. Large multi-section assembly FSNF24 US
2
FSNF120 US
Smoke Control and Combination Fire and Smoke Control Damper Actuators
FSNF Multi-Sec ApplicBLK

All smoke and combination fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with Belimo 24V 120V
FSTF, FSLF, FSNF, or FSAF actuators. No substitutions allowed. Wht C N 1 1
Damper and actuator shall have UL555S Listing for 250F (350F) and shall comply Blk H L1 2 2
with UBC if required by local codes.
Gnd Gnd
Where proof of closure switches are required, blade switches, actuator auxiliary
switches, or proximity switches are allowed if permitted by local codes.

No ground on 24 V models
Replacement Applications
The number one "equal or better" requirement for use as a replacement for obsolete
W175_08
defective motors is the UL555S listing of the Belimo actuator with the damper for the
application. The local authority having jurisdiction sets the requirements. In some
cases a permit and inspection may be required.
to Belimo. Extensive retrofit installation instructions are available, along with techni-
cal training information.
CAUTION
Caution must be used when replacing failed motors with new Belimo actuators.
on the side of the damper or wrapped around the damper shaft to close the
link springs if they had only fire and no smoke functions
In some cases, a BAE 165 or equal thermal sensor must be installed.
Auxiliary switch wiring for FSNF24-S US, FSNF120-S US
2
FSNF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSNF230(-S) US
70101-00001D
Application
The type FSNF spring-return actuator is intended for the operation of smoke and
with the damper and will open and close in 15 seconds at 350F. Square footage of
damper operated will depend on make and model of damper and the temperature
250F or 350F.
Operation
Mounting of the actuator to the damper axle shaft or jackshaft (3/8 to 1.05) is via a
cold-weld clamp. Teeth in the clamp and V-bolt dig into the metal of both solid and
hollow shafts maintaining a perfect connection. The specially designed clamp will not
crush hollow shafts. The bottom end of the actuator is held by an anti-rotation strap
or by a stud provided by the damper manufacturer.
Technical Data FSNF24(-S)(-FC) US, FSNF230(-S) US applying power, the actuator drives the damper to the open position. The internal
Power supply spring is tensioned at the same time. If the power supply is interrupted, the spring
FSNF24(-S)(-FC) US 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz moves the damper back to its fail-safe position.
FSNF230(-S) US 230 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption running 17 W, 24 VA -FC Models have the same electrical and mechanical characteristics except instead of
24 VAC holding 4 W, 6.5 VA a 1/2" conduit connector a 3/8" screw flex connector is supplied.
230 VAC running 20 W, 23 VA, 0.1 A
holding 6 W, 9 VA, 0.04 A
Fusing* SAFETY NOTES
FSNF24 2.5 amp slow blow
FSNF230 0.25 amp slow blow 1/2" Threaded Connector Screw a conduit fitting into the actuators metal
Transformer sizing 40 VA per 24 VAC actuator bushing. Jacket the actuators input wiring with suitable flexible conduit. Properly
Electrical connection terminate the conduit in a suitable junction box.
FSNF24 US 3 ft, 18 ga, 2 color coded leads 3/8" Flexible Connector Models (-FC Screw Connector) Mount the flexible
FSNF230 US 3 ft, 18 ga, 3 color coded leads conduit into the actuators metal bushing by means of the provided screw with a
FSNF...-S US 3 ft, 18 ga, appliance cable torque of 0.9 ft-lb. Jacket the actuators input wiring with suitable flexible conduit.
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation grounded Properly terminate the conduit in a suitable junction box.
enclosure, 230V
Angle of rotation 95 Dimensions (Inches [mm])
Torque 70 in-lb [7.9 Nm] minimum 0.65" [16.5]
0.19"
Standard:
[5]
from 32F to 350F [0C to 177C] 1/2" to 1.05"
3.25" [82.7]

2.24"
[57]
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 Optional*

Running time between 32F and 350F [0C to 177C] 3/8" to 3/4"
<15 seconds at rated voltage and torque
0.19" [5]
Ambient temperature 32F to 122F [0C to 50C] 10.20" [259]
0.39" [10] 2.64"
5.85" [148.5]
0.35" [9] 0.26" [6.5]
Housing NEMA type 1
1.93"
Housing material zinc coated steel 1.62"
[49]
3.86" [98]
3.15" [80]
[41.2]
Gears steel, permanently lubricated *with K4 US
[73.5]
2.89"
Agency listings cULus listed to UL873 and clamp
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24 -S models only
NYC Department of Buildings Materials and 1.97"

[50]
Equipment Acceptance Division MEA 197-07-M 7.54"
California State Fire Marshal Listing [191.6]
3210-1593:101
UL2043 Listed, Suitable for Use in Other
Environmental Air Space (Plenums) in
Accordance with Section 300.22, (C) of the NEC
Accessories
and Section 602 of the IMC. All AF/NF linkages and parts except ZG-102 may be employed.
Quality standard ISO 9001 * Individual Fusing or Breakers are not required by Belimo.
Weight The FSNF24 draws higher peak current when driving against any type of stop. Given
FSNF24(-S) US 6.0 lbs [2.75 kg], (+ 0.5 lbs [+.23 kg]) the technology of fuses & breakers, this requires the value of fuse or breaker to be
FSNF230(-S) US 6.7 lbs [3.0 kg], (+ 0.5 lbs [+.23 kg]) increased to avoid nuisance opening or tripping. A 2.5 amp slow blow should be used
for 24VAC. A 0.25 amp slow blow should be used for 230VAC.
Transformers
Auxiliary switch 2xSPST 7A resistive, 2.5A inductive at 120V or Note that while a 100VA transformer would handle 2 actuators, a 4A breaker is
250V, UL Approved, double-insulated, one switch insufficient.
at 10, one at 85
1

Multi-section Damper Assemblies
The typical fire and smoke damper requires from 5-15 in-lb of torque per square foot
at 250F 350F under dynamic load (2400 fpm velocity). The FSNF will operate 1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
multi-section dampers using multiple actuators for multiple sections. Some of the
methods used are shown below. 2 CAUTION Equipment Damage!
This is a direct coupled actuator. If linkages are needed use those for the FSAF
series. Do not use the ZG-102 as close coupled actuators have a shortened life due
to the high speed of the FSNF. Mounting at opposite ends of a jackshaft is OK. For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., FSNF24-S
4 US and FSNF230-S US incorporate two built-in auxiliary switches:
2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A inductive)@125/250 VAC, UL Approved, 10 and 85.
Switch rating is for 250F 1/2 hour only.
WARNING
Blank-off Channel necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or
Single section other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform
for one
FSNF actuator
components could result in death or serious injury.
Blank-off
W192_08
Channel
Use of blank-offs between damper sections to

provide space for actuator mounting. Large multi-section assembly
Smoke Control and Combination Fire and Smoke Control Damper Actuators
FSNF230 Multi-Sec ApplicBLK_11

24V 230V
All smoke and combination fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with Belimo
Wht C N, L1 1 1
FSTF, FSLF, FSNF, or FSAF actuators. No substitutions allowed.
Blk H L1, L2 2 2
Damper and actuator shall have UL555S Listing for 250F (350F) and shall comply
with UBC if required by local codes.
Gnd Gnd
Where proof of closure switches are required, blade switches, actuator auxiliary
switches, or proximity switches are allowed if permitted by local codes.
No ground on 24 V models

Replacement Applications Parallel Actuator Wiring
The number one "equal or better" requirement for use as a replacement for obsolete
W175_08
defective motors is the UL555S listing of the Belimo actuator with the damper for the
application. The local authority having jurisdiction sets the requirements. In some
cases a permit and inspection may be required.
CAUTION
Caution must be used when replacing failed motors with new Belimo actuators.
on the side of the damper or wrapped around the damper shaft to close the
link springs if they had only fire and no smoke functions FSNF24-S US
FSNF230-S US
In some cases, a BAE 165 or equal thermal sensor must be installed.
Auxiliary switch wiring for FSNF24-S US, FSNF230-S US
2
MS4104, MS4109, MS4604, MS4609, MS8104,
MS8109 Fast-Acting, Two-Position Actuators
FOR FIRE/SMOKE CONTROL APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
30 lb-in. (3.4 Nm) or 80 lb-in. (5.9 Nm) minimum
driving torque at 350F (176C).
Reversible mounting facilitates use in either clockwise
(cw) or counterclockwise (ccw) spring rotation.
Integral spring return ensures level of return torque.
Fifteen-second spring return timing.
No special cycling required during long-term holding.
(See Operation section.)
No audible noise during holding.
Patent pending design eliminates need for limit
switches to reduce power consumption.
Models available for 24, 120, and 230 Vac.
Ninety-five degree angle of rotation.
Actuator holds rated torque at reduced power level.
Die-cast aluminum housing.
Housing design allows flush mounting to damper.
APPLICATION Designed to operate reliably in smoke control systems

requiring Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL555S
ratings up to 350F.
The MS4104, MS4109, MS4604, MS4609, MS8104 and
MS8109 Fast-Acting, Two-Position Actuators are spring return Models available with SPST position-indicating
direct coupled actuators (DCA) for Fire and Smoke dampers switches (7, 85 stroke).
(on/off control). The actuator accepts an on/off signal from a
single-pole, single-throw (SPST) controller. Reversible
mounting allows actuator to be used for either clockwise (cw)
or counterclockwise (ccw) spring rotation.
Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1
Features ........................................................................... 1
Specifications ................................................................... 2
Ordering Information ........................................................ 2
Installation ........................................................................ 4
Operation .......................................................................... 6
Checkout .......................................................................... 6
MS4104, MS4109, MS4604, MS4609, MS8104, MS8109 FAST-ACTING, TWO-POSITION ACTUATORS
SPECIFICATIONS Mounting: Round 1/2 inch shaft adapter with 1/4 inch set
screws.
Threads: -20 UNC-2A
Models: See Table 1. Material: Alloy Steel hardened to HRC 45-53
Table 1. Models. Thread Lock: Nylon Patch
Voltage Internal Auxiliary

Model (Vac) Switches Honeywell does not recommend using linkages with
these actuators because side-loading of the output
MS4104F1010 120 None hub reduces actuator life.
MS4104F1210 120 2 SPSTa
Temperature Ratings:
MS4109F1010 120 None Ambient: 0F to 130F (-18C to 55C).
MS4109F1210 120 Shipping and Storage: -40F to 140F (-40C to 60C).
2 SPSTa
MS4604F1010 230 None
The actuator is designed to meet UL555S standards
MS4604F1210 230 2 SPSTa at 350F (176C). The actuator must be tested with
MS4609F1010 230 None the damper to achieve this rating.
MS4609F1210 230 2 SPSTa Humidity Ratings: 5% to 95% RH noncondensing.
MS8104F1010 24 None Noise Rating (Maximum):
MS8104F1210 24 2 SPSTa Driving Open: 80 dBA at 1m.
Holding: 20 dBA at 1m (no audible noise).
MS8109F1010 24 None
MS8109F1210 24 2 SPSTa Controller Type:
MS4104, MS4109: Line voltage (120 Vac),
a two-position, SPST (Series 40).
Internal switches are designed to pass UL555S
requirements (at 350F for 30 minutes) and are intended for MS4604, MS4609: Line voltage (230 Vac),
use as position indication. two-position, SPST (Series 40).
MS8104, MS8109: Low voltage (24 Vac),
Dimensions: See Fig. 1. two-position, SPST (Series 80).
Minimum Damper Shaft Length: 2 in. (51 mm). Table 2. MS4104, MS4109, MS4604, MS4609, MS8104 and
MS8109 DCA Models.
Device Weight: 5 lb (2.3 kg).
Power Consumption Torque Voltage
Stroke: 95 3, mechanically limited. in lb-in. Input
Model Running Holding (Nm) in Vac
Electrical Ratings: See Table 2.
MS4104F 0.18A, 18W 0.11A, 9W 30 (3.4) 120 10%,
Electrical Connections: MS4109F 0.25A, 23W 0.13A, 7W 80 (9) 50/60 Hz
Power Lead Wires:
MS410xF and MS460xF: 32 inches (0.8m), 18 AWG MS4604F 0.13A, 18W 0.10A, 11W 30 (3.4) 230 10%,
MS4609F 0.13A, 23W 0.09A, 7W 80 (9) 50/60 Hz
MS810xF: 39 inches (1m), 18 AWG MS8104F 16 VA 8 VA 30 (3.4) 24Vac/dc +20%,
Switch Lead Wires: 18 inches, 18 AWG, 2 color coded leads MS8109F 23 VA 7 VA 80 (9) -10%, 50/60 Hz
ORDERING INFORMATION
When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE wholesaler or distributor, refer to the
TRADELINE Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number. If you have additional questions, need further information,
or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or phone:
1. Your local Honeywell Environmental and Combustion Controls Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory).
2. Honeywell Customer Care
1885 Douglas Drive North
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422-4386
3. http://customer.honeywell.com or http://customer.honeywell.ca
International Sales and Service Offices in all principal cities of the world. Manufacturing in Belgium, Canada, China, Czech
Republic, Germany, Hungary, Italy, Mexico, Netherlands, United Kingdom, and United States.
63-274003 2
Torque Rating (at rated voltage):

Spring Return:
MS4104F, MS4604F, MS8104F: 30 lb-in. (3.4 Nm).
MS4109F, MS4609F, MS8109: 80 lb-in. (9 Nm).

Stall Maximum:

MS4104F, MS4604F, MS8104F: 150 lb-in. (17 Nm).
MS4109F, MS4609F, MS8109: 240 lb-in. (27 Nm).
350F Driving:
MS4104F, MS4604F, MS8104F: 30 lb-in. (3.4 Nm).

MS4109F, MS4609F, MS8109: 80 lb-in. (9 Nm).
Timing (At Rated Torque and Voltage):
Drive Open: 15 seconds typical.
Spring Close: 15 seconds typical.
Cycling Requirements:
Prolonged holding-period (1 year) testing of these actuators
has been performed with no spring return failures. The actu-
ator and the internal spring are designed to require no spe-
cial cycling during long-term holding.
Honeywell recommends following all local, state and national
codes for periodic testing of the entire smoke control sys-

tem. Refer to National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
National Fire Codes: NFPA90A, NFPA92A and NFPA92B
for your application.
NFPA recommends periodic examination of each fire/smoke

damper (semi-annually or annually) to ensure proper perfor-
mance.
Design Life (at Rated Voltage): 30,000 full stroke cycles.
Approvals: See Table 3.
Environmental Protection Ratings: See Table 4. Fig. 1. MS4104, MS4109, MS4604, MS4609, MS8104 and
MS8109 dimensional drawing in in. (mm).
Accessories:
205649 Mounting Bracket (not supplied with actuator).
Table 3. Approvals.
MS4104F, MS4604F, MS8104F,
MS4109F MS4609F MS8109F
UL/cUL X X X
UL873 X X X
Table 4. Environmental Ratings.

MS4104, MS4109, MS4604,
MS4609, MS8104 and
All Devices MS8109
NEMA1 IP40
3 63-274003
INSTALLATION
When Installing this Product...
1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow
them could damage the product or cause a hazardous
condition.
2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the
product to make sure the product is suitable for your
application.
3. Installer must be a trained, experienced service
technician.
4. After installation is complete, check out product

operation as provided in these instructions.
All wiring must agree with applicable codes,

ordinances and regulations.
WARNING
Electrical Power Hazard.
Line voltage can cause death or serious injury
and short equipment circuitry.
Disconnect power supply before installation.
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.

Low voltage can shock individuals or short
equipment circuitry.
Location and Mounting Fig. 2. Mounting actuator to damper housing.
The actuators are designed to open a damper by driving the

damper shaft in either clockwise or counterclockwise Preparation
direction. The actuator housing has two slots on the Before mounting the actuator onto the damper shaft,
bottom that, with a 205649 Mounting Bracket, secure it flush to determine the:
a damper box (see Fig. 2). When mounted correctly, these Damper/valve opening direction for correct spring
slots allow the actuator to float without rotating relative to the return rotation. The actuator can be mounted to provide
damper shaft. clockwise or counterclockwise spring return.
Damper shaft size (see Specifications section).
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard.
Tightly securing actuator to damper housing can
damage actuator.
Mount actuator to allow it to float along its vertical axis.
63-274003 4
Installation 1. All wiring must comply with local electrical codes,

ordinances and regulations.
2. Voltage and frequency of transformer must corre-
CAUTION spond with the characteristics of power supply and
Device Malfunction Hazard. actuator.
Improper set screw tightening causes device 3. Use wires rated for at least 75C (167F).
malfunction. 4. The conduit fittings are designed for use with 3/8 in.
Ensure damper blade is in the correct position and reduced-wall steel or aluminum flexible conduit.
tighten set screws with proper torque to prevent
damper shaft slippage.

CAUTION

Actuator Damage Hazard.
Using actuator as shaft bearing causes device
damage.
Use actuator only to supply rotational torque. Avoid any
side loads to actuator output coupling bearings.

To install actuator, proceed as follows:
1. Place actuator over damper shaft; and hold mounting
bracket in place. See Fig. 2.
2. Mark screw holes on damper housing.
3. Remove actuator and mounting bracket. Fig. 3. Typical 24 Vac wiring.
4. Drill or center-punch holes for mounting screws (or use
no.10 self-tapping sheet metal screws).
5. Turn damper blades to desired normal (closed) position.
6. Place actuator and mounting bracket back into position
and secure bracket to damper box with sheet metal
screws.
7. Tighten set screws securely into damper shaft using min-
imum 100 lb-in., maximum 130 lb-in. torque. Use

1/4 in. wrench (see Specifications for details) to tighten
set screws.

Wiring

See Fig. 3 through 5 for typical wiring diagrams.

WARNING Fig. 4. Typical 120 Vac wiring.

Electrical Power Hazard.
Line voltage can cause death or serious injury and
short equipment circuitry.

CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.

Low voltage can shock individuals or short

equipment circuitry.


Fig. 5. Typical 230 Vac wiring.
5 63-274003
OPERATION CHECKOUT
The MS4104, MS4109, MS4604, MS4609, MS8104 and
MS8109 DCA are designed for use in Smoke Control Systems. MS4104F, MS4109F (120 Vac model)
If power fails, the actuator spring returns to the 0 position. The 1. Check damper position.
actuator mounts flush with the damper box. The actuator drives 2. Connect 120 Vac to the black and white leadwires to
from 0 to 95 and spring returns back to 0. drive the damper to the open position. The actuator
should drive the damper.
The actuators are operated by an spst two-position controller.
3. If the actuator does not spring return, verify that the actu-
When using an spst two-position controller, the actuator drives
ator is properly installed. See Installation section.
to the damper fully open position when controller contact
4. If the actuator is correctly installed but neither runs nor
makes and spring returns to the damper fully closed position
spring returns, replace the actuator.
when controller contact breaks. The actuator drops to holding
power level on detection of stall, independent of hub position.
MS4604F, MS4609F (230 Vac model)
Cycling 1. Check damper position.
2. Connect 230 Vac to the blue and brown leadwires to
The actuator and the internal spring are designed so that no
drive the damper to the open position. The actuator
special cycling during long-term holding is required. Honeywell
should drive the damper.
recommends following all local, state, and national codes for
periodic testing of the entire smoke control system. Refer to
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Fire
Codes: NFPA90A, NFPA92A, and NFPA92B for your
application.
NOTE: The actuator is designed to operate for 30 min- MS8104F, MS8109F (24 Vac model)
utes during a one-time excursion to 350F (176C).
1. Check damper position.
2. Connect 24 Vac to the red and black leadwires to drive
the damper to the open position. The actuator should
drive the damper.
National Fire Codes is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
63-274003 6
7 63-274003
Automation and Control Solutions
Honeywell International Inc.
1985 Douglas Drive North
U.S. Registered Trademark
Golden Valley, MN 55422 2013 Honeywell International Inc.
63-274003 M.S. Rev. 08-13
customer.honeywell.com Printed in United States

63-25925

3-15/16 (100)
2 (50)

1-9/16
(40)

10-11/16
(271)

8-5/8
(220)
M20051 1/4 (6) 2-15/16 (75)

S2024-F-SW2, MS8120S

L2 ( ) BLUE

230 VAC BROWN
L1 ( )
GRAY/BLUE
85 AUXILIARY GRAY/RED
SWITCH
GRAY/YELLOW
BLACK/BLUE
BLACK/RED
7 AUXILIARY

SWITCH BLACK/YELLOW

M20678A

7 SWITCH 85 SWITCH
LESS 7 MORE 7 LESS 85 MORE 85
BLACK/BLUE BLACK/BLUE GRAY/BLUE GRAY/BLUE
BLACK/RED BLACK/RED GRAY/RED GRAY/RED

BLACK/YELLOW BLACK/YELLOW GRAY/YELLOW GRAY/YELLOW
M20679B

S20230-F-SW2, MS4620S

L2 ( ) BLUE

230 VAC
BROWN
L1 ( )

GRAY/BLUE
85 AUXILIARY GRAY/RED
SWITCH GRAY/YELLOW

BLACK/BLUE

7 AUXILIARY BLACK/RED
SWITCH BLACK/YELLOW
M20680A
LF24-SR(-S) US
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA Control Signal
Application
For proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems. Actuator sizing should be
done in accordance with the damper manufacturers specifications.
The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or with the addition of a 500W
resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to
10 VDC feedback signal is provided for position indication or master-slave applications.
Operation
application and positive close-off on air tight dampers. The spring return system
actuator.
The LF24-SR (-S) US uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an Application
Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a microprocessor. The microprocessor provides
Technical Data LF24-SR(-S) US the intelligence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know the
Power supply 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz actuators exact fail-safe position. The ASIC monitors and controls the brushless DC
24 VDC 10% motors rotation and provides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to
the actuator in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal
Power consumption
rotation without the need of mechanical end switches. Power consumption is reduced
running 2.5 W
in holding mode.
holding 1 W
Transformer sizing 5 VA (class 2 power source) The LF24-SR-S US version is provided with one built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT
Electrical connection switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The
LF24-SR US 3 ft, plenum rated cable switching function is adjustable between 0 and 95. The auxiliary switch in the
1/2 conduit connector LF24-SR-S US is double insulated so an electrical ground in not necessary.
LF24-SR-S US 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cables (2)
1/2 conduit connectors Dimensions (Inches [mm])
D010
Input impedance 100 k (0.1 mA), 500 7.67" [195]
6.10" [155]
Angle of rotation max. 95, adjust. with mechanical stop Standard: 0.98"

0.39" [10] 0.256" [6.5] [25]
3/8" to 1/2"
Torque 35 in-lb [4 Nm]
3/8" to 7/16"
Direction of rotation 3.15" [80]
spring reversible with cw/ccw mounting Optional 3.86"

[98]
1/2" to 3/4"
motor reversible with built-in switch w/K6-1
1.93"
[49]
0.79"
[20]
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 accessory

0.5"
(0 is spring return position) [12.7]
Running time motor 150 sec constant, independent of load 3.66" [93] 0.71" [18]
(nominal) spring < 25 sec @-4F to 122F [-20C to 50C] 4.92" [125]
< 60 sec @-22F [-30C] 0.74" [18.7]
Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing 3.23" [82]

2.24"
Housing NEMA type 2 /IP54

Housing material zinc coated metal 0.25" [6.3]

CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24-93
Weight LF24-SR US 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg)
LF24-SR-S US 3.2 lbs (1.45 kg)
LF24-SR-S US
adjustable 0 to 95 (double insulated)
103
LF24-SR (-S) US
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA Control Signal
Accessories WARNING
AV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required) During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
IND-LF Damper position indicator necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
KH-LF Crank arm for up to 1/2 round shaft nents could result in death or serious injury.
SGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housing
SGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mounting
W057
ZG-LF2 Crank arm adaptor kit for LF 24 VAC Transformer 4
ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415 type actuators,
and new installations Blk (1) Common
ZG-LF112 Crank arm adaptor kit for Honeywell Mod IV, Line
Volts Red (2) + Hot
3
M6415 type actuators, and new installations
ZG-R01 500 resistor for 4 to 20 mA control signal Wht (3) Y1 Input, 2 to 10V
ZS-100 Weather shield (metal) Control Signal ()
ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate) 2 to 10 VDC (+)
ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing Grn (5) U Output, 2 to 10V
NOTE: When using LF24-SR(-S) US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page. 7
For actuator wiring information and diagrams, refer to Belimo Wiring Guide. CW CCW
2
LF24-SR US
Spring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which require
2 to 10 VDC control of LF24-SR(-S) US
no crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4
diameter and center a 1/2 shaft. The actuator must provide proportional damper
W059_08
control in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a 500 resistor, a 4 to
20 mA control input from an electronic controller or positioner.The actuators must be
designed so that they may be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe
operation. Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor controlled by a microprocessor
and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant,
and independent of torque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided for position
feedback or master-slave applications. If required, one SPDT auxiliary switch shall be
provided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary switch
must be constructed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical
ground is not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be cULus listed, have
a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control
Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.
Wiring Diagrams
4 to 20 mA control of LF24-SR(-S) US
with 2 to 10 VDC feedback output
W058_08
Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With 4 actuators
2 wired to one 500 resistor. Power consumption must be observed.
3 Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.

Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers on wires;
4 use color codes instead.
5 Only connect common to neg. () leg of control circuits

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., LF24-SR-S Auxiliary switch of LF24-SR-S US
6 US incorporates one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 3A (0.5A) @250
VAC, UL Approved, adjustable 0 to 95.
7 The LF24-SR-S US wire 5 is white.

nection.
The ZG-R01 500 resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control signal to
2 to 10 VDC.
104
NFB24-SR, NFB24-SR-S, NFX24-SR, NFX24-SR-S
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, for 2 or 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA Control Signal
Application
The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or with the addition of a 500
10 VDC feedback signal is provided for position indication. Not to be used for a
master-slave application.
Operation
safe application and positive close-off on air tight dampers. The spring return system
Technical Data NFB24-SR, NFB24-SR-S,
actuator.
NFX24-SR, NFX24-SR-S
Power supply 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz The NFB and NFX series provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a graduated
24 VDC +20% / -10% position indicator showing 0 to 95.
Power consumption running 3.5 W The NFB24-SR and NFX24-SR uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an
holding 2.5 W Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a microprocessor. The
Transformer sizing 6 VA (class 2 power source) microprocessor provides the intelligence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate
Electrical connection and to know the actuators exact fail-safe position. The ASIC monitors and controls
NFB... 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable, 1/2" conduit the brushless DC motors rotation and provides a digital rotation sensing function to
connector prevent damage to the actuator in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled
-S models: two 3 ft, 18 gauge appliance cables anywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.
with 1/2 conduit connectors The NFB24-SR-S and NFX24-SR-S versions are provided with two built-in auxiliary
NFX... 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or 16 ft [5m] 18 GA switches. These SPDT switches provide safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for
appliance or plenum cables, with or without 1/2 fan start-up. The switching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +10, the other
conduit connector switch function is adjustable between +10 to +90. The NFB24-SR, NFB24-SR-S,
-S models: Two 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or NFX24-SR and NFX24-SR-S actuator is shipped at +5 (5 from full fail-safe) to
16 ft [5m] appliance cables, with or without 1/2" provide automatic compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off.
conduit connectors
Operating range Y 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20mA Dimensions (Inches [mm])
Input impedance 100 k for 2 to 10 VDC (0.1 mA)
WAFBNFBDim
500 for 4 to 20 mA K7-2 (supplied)
Feedback output U 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.5 mA)

1/2" Centered 3/4" Centered 1.05" Centered
(Default) (Field Selectable) (Field Selectable)
motor reversible with built-in switch
Mechanical angle of rotation 95 (adjustable with mechanical end stop, 35 to
95)
Running time spring < 20 seconds @ -4F to 122F [-20C to 50C];
< 60 seconds @ -22F [-30C]
motor 95 seconds
E60730-1:02, CE acc. to 2004/108/EC &
2006/95/EC
Noise level 40dB(A) motor @ 95 seconds
Weight 4.15 lbs (1.9 kg); 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) with switches
NFB24-SR-S, NFX24-SR-S
71
NFB24-SR, NFB24-SR-S, NFX24-SR, NFX24-SR-S
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, for 2 or 10 VDC to 4 to 20 mA Control Signal
Accessories WARNING
AV 8-25 Shaft extension During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
IND-AFB Damper position indicator necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
KH-AFB Crank arm
K7-2 Universal clamp for up to 1.05 dia jackshafts nents could result in death or serious injury.
W068_NFB(X)24-SR
1 24 VAC Transformer
Line 1 Common
ZG-118 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman MA 3../4.., Honeywell 3
Volts
Mod III or IV or Johnson Series 100 replacement or new crank 2 + Hot
arm type installations 3 Y1 Input, 2 to 10V
ZG-AFB Crank arm adaptor kit Control Signal ()
ZG-AFB118 Crank arm adaptor kit 2 to 10 VDC (+)
ZS-100 Weather shield (metal) 5 U Output 2 to 10V
NFB24-SR, NFB24-SR-S
ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing NFX24-SR, NFX24-SR-S
2
NOTE: When using NFB24-SR, NFB24-SR-S, NFX24-SR and NFX24-SR-S actuators, only use
2 to 10 VDC control of NFB24-SR and NFX24-SR
accessories listed on this page.
W069_NFB(X)24-SR
Spring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupled type which require no
diameter. The actuator must provide proportional damper control in response to a 2 to
10 VDC or, with the addition of a 500 resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from an
electronic controller or positioner. The actuators must be designed so that they may be
used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall use
a brushless DC motor controlled by a microprocessor and be protected from overload
at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant, and independent of torque. A 2 to
10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided for position feedback. Actuators shall be
cULus Approved and have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 NFB24-SR, NFB24-SR-S
NFX24-SR, NFX24-SR-S
4 to 20 mA control of NFB24-SR and NFX24-SR with

Wiring Diagrams 2 to 10 VDC feedback output
W064_NFB(X)24_SR_-S

Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With 4 actuators
2 wired to one 500 resistor. Power consumption must be observed.
3 Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., NFB24-SR-S
4 and NFX24-SR-S incorporates two built-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT, 3A
(0.5A) @250 VAC, UL Approved, one switch is fixed at +10, one is adjust- NFB24-SR-S
able 10 to 90. NFX24-SR-S
5 Only connect common to neg. () leg of control circuits Auxiliary switches for NFB24-SR-S, NFX24-SR-S
The ZG-R01 500 resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control signal to

2 to 10 VDC.
72
AF24-SR US
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA Control Signal
Application
The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, with the addition of a 500
10 VDC feedback signal is provided for position indication or master-slave applications.
Operation
application and positive close-off on air tight dampers. The spring return system
actuator.
The AF series provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a graduated position
indicator showing 0 to 95. The AF has a unique manual positioning mechanism which
allows the setting of any damper position within its 95 of rotation. The actuator is
shipped at +5 position (5 from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compression
against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power is applied, the manual
Technical Data AF24... US mechanism is released and the actuator drives toward the full fail-safe position. The
Power supply 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz actuator will memorize the angle where it stops rotating and use this point for its zero
24 VDC 10% position for its normal control operations. The manual override can also be released
Power consumption physically by the use of a crank supplied with the actuator.
running 6W The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an Application Specific
holding 2W Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the
Transformer sizing 10 VA (class 2 power source) intelligence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know the actuators
Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable exact zero position. The ASIC monitors and controls the brushless DC motors rotation
1/2 conduit connector and provides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in a
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotation without the
Operating range Y 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA need of mechanical end switches.
Input impedance 100 k (0.1 mA), 500
Feedback output U 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.5 mA) for 95
Angle of rotation mechanically limited to 95 Dimensions (Inches [mm])
D001
Torque 133 in-lb [15 Nm] constant 0.65" [16.5]
K4-2 US (supplied)
Direction of rotation

3.25" [82.7]
spring reversible with cw/ccw mounting 1/2" Centered

(Default)
2.24"
motor reversible with built-in switch

[57]
3/4" Centered
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 (Field Selectable)
(0 is spring return position) 1.05" Centered 0.19" [5]
Manual override 3mm hex crank (shipped w/actuator) (Field Selectable)
Running time 150 seconds constant, independent of load, 10.47" [266]

0.39" [10] 2.64"
spring return < 20 seconds K4-1 US (optional) [67]
5.85" [148.5]
0.35" [9] 0.26" [6.5]
Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing 3/4" to 1.05"
1.93"

[49]
Adjustable
3.86" [98]
3.15" [80]

Housing NEMA type 2 / IP54 K4 US (optional)
Housing material zinc coated metal
3/8" to 3/4" 1.97"
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL 873 and Adjustable [50]
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24-93
47
AF24-SR US
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA Control Signal

K4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8 to 5/8
KH-AF Crank arm for up to 3/4 round shaft (Series 2) Actuators may be connected in parallel.
KH-AF-1 Crank arm for up to 1.05 jackshaft (Series 2) Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1
SGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housing 5 Only connect common to neg. () leg of control circuits.
SGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mounting
ZG-R01 500 resistor for 4 to 20 mA control signal
ZG-HTR Thermostat/Heater Kit
ZDB-AF2 US Angle of rotation limiter The ZG-R01 500 resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control signal to
ZG-100 Universal mounting bracket 2 to 10 VDC, up to 2 actuators may be connected in parallel.
WARNING
ZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracket During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be
ZG-103 Universal mounting bracket necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
ZG-104 Universal mounting bracket individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
ZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV replacement or new tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical compo-
crank arm type installations
ZG-107 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod III or Johnson Series
W011
ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman MA 3../4.., Honeywell 24 VAC Transformer
Mod III or IV or Johnson Series 100 replacement or new crank 1
arm type installations 1 Common
Line
ZG-AF US Crank arm adaptor kit for AF/NF Volts 3
2 + Hot
ZG-AF108 Crank arm adaptor kit for AF/NF
ZS-100 Weather shield (metal) 3 Y Input, 2 to 10V
ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate) Control Signal ()
ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing 2 to 10 VDC (+) 5 U Output 2 to 10V
NOTE: When using AF24-SR US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page.
AF24-SR US 2
2 to 10 VDC control
W197_08
electronic controller or positioner. The actuators must be designed so that they may
have control direction of rotation switch accessible on its cover. Actuators shall use a
brushless DC motor controlled by a microprocessor and be protected from overload at
all angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant, and independent of torque. A 2 to 10
VDC feedback signal shall be provided for position feedback or master-slave
applications. Actuators shall be cULus listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be
manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall
be as manufactured by Belimo.
4 to 20 mA control
48
AFB24-MFT, AFB24-MFT-S, AFX24-MFT, AFX24-MFT-S
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, Multi-Function Technology
Torque min. 180 in-lb
Control 2 to 10 VDC (DEFAULT)
Feedback 2 to 10 VDC (DEFAULT)
Application
For proportional modulation of dampers and control valves in HVAC systems. The
AFB24-MFT, AFX24-MFT provides mechanical spring return operation for reliable fail-
safe application.
Technical Data AFB24-MFT, AFB24-MFT-S,

Default/Configuration
Default parameters for 2 to 10 VDC applications of the AFB24-MFT, AFX24-MFT
AFX24-MFT, AFX24-MFT-S actuator are assigned during manufacturing. If required, custom versions of the
Power supply 24 VAC, +/- 20%, 50/60 Hz actuator can be ordered. The parameters noted in the Technical Data table are
24 VDC, +20% / -10% variable.
Power running 7.5 W
consumption holding 3 W These parameters can be changed by three means:
Pre-set configurations from Belimo
Transformer sizing 10 VA (Class 2 power source)
Custom configurations from Belimo
Configurations set by the customer using the MFT PC tool (version 3.4 or higher)
AFB... 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable, 1/2" conduit connector software application.
-S models: two 3 ft, 18 gauge appliance cables with
1/2 conduit connectors Handheld ZTH-GEN
AFX... 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or 16 ft [5m] 18 GA appliance or Operation
plenum cables, with or without 1/2 conduit connector The AFB24-MFT, AFX24-MFT actuator provides 95 of rotation and is provided with a
-S models: two 3 ft [1m], 10 ft [3m] or graduated position indicator showing 0 to 95. The actuator will synchronize the 0
16 ft [5m] appliance cables with or without 1/2" conduit mechanical stop or the physical damper or valve mechanical stop and use this point
connectors
for its zero position during normal control operations. A unique manual override allows
Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95 rotation the setting of any actuator position within its 95 of rotation with no power applied.
Operating range Y* 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA (default) This mechanism can be released physically by the use of a crank supplied with the
variable (VDC, PWM, floating point, on/off) actuator. When power is applied the manual override is released and the actuator
Input impedance 100 k for 2 to 10 VDC (0.1 mA) drives toward the fail-safe position.
500 for 4 to 20 mA
1500 for PWM, floating point and on/off control The actuator uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an Application Specific
Feedback output U* 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the
Torque minimum 180 in-lb (20 Nm) intelligence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know the actuators
exact position. The ASIC monitors and controls the brushless DC motors rotation and
Direction of spring reversible with cw/ccw mounting
provides a Digital Rotation Sensing (DRS) function to prevent damage to the actuator
rotation* motor reversible with built-in switch
in a stall condition. The position feedback signal is generated without the need for
Mechanical 95 (adjustable with mechanical end stop, 35 to 95) mechanical feedback potentiometers using DRS. The actuator may be stalled
angle of rotation* anywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.
Running time spring <20 sec @ -4F to 122F [-20 C to 50 C];
<60 sec @ -22F [-30 C] The AFB24-MFT, AFX24-MFT is mounted directly to control shafts up to 1.05" diameter
motor* 150 seconds (default), variable (70 to 220 seconds) by means of its universal clamp and anti-rotation bracket. A crank arm and several
Angle of Rotation off (default) mounting brackets are available for damper applications where the actuator cannot be

adaptation direct coupled to the damper shaft. The spring return system provides minimum
specified torque to the application during a power interruption. The AFB24-MFT,
Override control* min position = 0%
AFX24-MFT actuator is shipped at +5 (5 from full fail-safe) to provide automatic
mid. position = 50%
compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off.
max. position = 100%
Position indication visual indicator, 0 to 95 NOTE: Please see documentation on Multi-Function Technology.
Manual override 5 mm hex crank (" Allen), supplied Dimensions (Inches [mm])
Humidity max. 95% RH, non-condensing
AFBNFBDim
K7-2 (supplied)
Ambient temperature -22 to 122 F (-30 to 50 C)
Storage temperature -40 to 176 F (-40 to 80 C) (Default) (Field Selectable) (Field Selectable)
Housing NEMA 2, IP54, Enclosure Type 2

Noise level 40dB(A) motor @ 150 seconds, run time dependent
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL60730-1A/-2-14, CAN/CSA E60730-
1:02, CE acc. to 2004/108/EC & 2006/95/EC
Weight 4.6 lbs. (1.9 kg), 4.9 lbs. (2 kg) with switch
* Variable when configured with MFT options
Programmed for 70 sec motor run time. At 150 sec motor run time, transformer sizing
iis 8.5 VA and power consumption is 6 W running / 3 W holding.
AFB24-MFT-S, AFX24-MFT-S
21
AFB24-MFT, AFB24-MFT-S, AFX24-MFT, AFX24-MFT-S
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, Multi-Function Technology
Accessories
W600_AFB_AFX
KH-AFB Crank arm
Mod III or IV or Johnson Series 100 replacement or new crank
arm type installations AFB24-MFT-S
AFX24-MFT-S
ZG-AFB Crank arm adaptor kit
ZG-AFB118 Crank arm adaptor kit
Auxiliary Switches for AFB24-MFT-S, AFX24-MFT-S
W399_08
NOTE: When using AFB24-MFT, AFB24-MFT-S, AFX24-MFT and AFX24-MFT-S actuators, only use
accessories listed on this page.
electronic controller or positioner. The actuators must be designed so that they may be VDC/4-20 mA
used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall use
W399_08
a brushless DC motor controlled by a microprocessor and be protected from overload
at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant, and independent of torque. A 2 to
10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided for position feedback. Actuators shall be
Wiring Diagrams
1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required. PWM

M
CAUTION Equipment Damage!
W399_08
2
Actuators may be connected in parallel if not mechanically mounted to the same
shaft. Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.

Position feedback cannot be used with Triac sink controller.
4 The actuator internal common reference is not compatible.
Control signal may be pulsed from either the Hot (source)
5 or the Common (sink) 24 VAC line.
Contact closures A & B also can be triacs.
8 A & B should both be closed for triac source and open for triac sink.
For triac sink the common connection from the actuator On/Off
Off controll
9 must be connected to the hot connection of the controller.
W399_08
Meets UL requirements without the need of an electrical ground

connection.
The ZG-R01 500 resistor may be used.
WARNING Live Electrical Components!

necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician
or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components
perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to
live electrical components could result in death or serious injury.
Floating Point control
22
AFB24-MFT95, AFX24-MFT95
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, for Use with Honeywell Electronic Series 90 or a 0 to 135 Input
Torque min. 180 in-lb

Control fixed, 0 to 135 input, or Honeywell series 90 (fixed)
Feedback 2 to 10 VDC (DEFAULT)
Application
For proportional modulation of dampers and control valves in HVAC systems. The
AFB24-MFT95, AFX24-MFT95 provides mechanical spring return operation for reliable
fail-safe application.
Default/Configuration
Default parameters for 0 to 135 Input applications of the AFB24-MFT95 and AFX24-
MFT95 actuator are assigned during manufacturing. If required, custom versions of the
actuator can be ordered. However the control input cannot be modified via MFT PC
tool software. The parameters noted in the Technical Data table are variable.
These parameters can be changed by three means:
Pre-set configurations from Belimo
Custom configurations from Belimo
Configurations set by the customer using the MFT PC tool (version 3.4 or higher)
software application.
Operation
The AFB24-MFT95, AFX24-MFT95 actuator provides 95 of rotation and is provided
with a graduated position indicator showing 0 to 95. The actuator will synchronize
Technical Data AFB24-MFT95, AFX24-MFT95 the 0 mechanical stop or the physical damper or valve mechanical stop and use this
point for its zero position during normal control operations. A unique manual override
Power supply 24 VAC, +/- 20%, 50/60 Hz
allows the setting of any actuator position within its 95 of rotation with no power
24 VDC, +20% / -10%
applied.This mechanism can be released physically by the use of a crank supplied
Power running 7.5 W
with the actuator. When power is applied the manual override is released and the
consumption holding 3 W actuator drives toward the fail-safe position.
Transformer sizing 10 VA (Class 2 power source)
Electrical connection The actuator uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an Application Specific
AFB24-MFT95 3 ft, 18 GA plenum cable, Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the
with 1/2 conduit connector intelligence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know the actuators
AFX24-MFT95 3 ft [1m], 18 GA plenum cable, exact position. The ASIC monitors and controls the brushless DC motors rotation and
with or without 1/2 conduit connector provides a Digital Rotation Sensing (DRS) function to prevent damage to the actuator
in a stall condition. The position feedback signal is generated without the need for
mechanical feedback potentiometers using DRS. The actuator may be stalled
Operating range Y 0 to 135 Honeywell Electronic Series 90,
anywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.
0 to 135 input
Feedback output U* 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max The AFB24-MFT95, AFX24-MFT95 is mounted directly to control shafts up to 1.05"
Torque minimum 180 in-lb (20 Nm) diameter by means of its universal clamp and anti-rotation bracket. A crank arm and

Direction spring reversible with cw/ccw mounting several mounting brackets are available for damper applications where the actuator
of rotation* motor reversible with built-in switch cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft. The spring return system provides
minimum specified torque to the application during a power interruption. The AFB24-
Mechanical 95 (adjustable with mechanical end stop, 35 to 95)
MFT95, AFX24-MFT95 actuator is shipped at +5 (5 from full fail-safe) to provide
angle of rotation*
automatic compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off.
Running time spring <20 seconds @ -4F to 122F [-20 C to 50 C];
<60 seconds @ -22F [-30 C]
motor* 150 seconds (default), variable (70 to 220 seconds)
Angle of Rotation off (default)
adaptation Dimensions (Inches [mm])
K7-2 (supplied)
AFBNFBDim

(0 is spring return position) (Default) (Field Selectable) (Field Selectable)

Humidity max. 95% RH, non-condensing
Ambient temperature -22 to 122 F (-30 to 50 C)
Storage temperature -40 to 176 F (-40 to 80 C)
Housing NEMA 2, IP54, Enclosure Type 2
Noise level 40dB(A) motor @ 150 seconds, run time dependent
Agency listings cULus acc. to UL60730-1A/-2-14, CAN/CSA E60730-
1:02, CE acc. to 2004/108/EC & 2006/95/EC
Weight 4.6 lbs. (1.9 kg)
* Variable when configured with MFT options
Programmed for 70 seconds motor run time. At 150 sec motor run time, transformer sizing is 8.5 VA
and power consumption is 6 W running / 3 W holding.
23
AFB24-MFT95, AFX24-MFT95
Proportional, Spring Return, 24 V, for Use with Honeywell Electronic Series 90 or a 0 to 135 Input
Proportional Potentiometric Control - Wiring Diagrams WARNING

Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers on wires; use individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
5 color codes instead. Actuators with appliance cables are numbered. tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical compo-
22 Actuators and controller must have separate transformers. Typical wiring diagrams for multiple actuators
used with the W973, W7100 and T775 controllers
23 Consult controller instruction data for more detailed information. Q209A
W020
Minimum Position
Resistor value depends on the type of controller and the number of actuators. 21 24 VAC Transformer Potentiometer 5
24 No resistor is used for one actuator. Honeywell resistor kits may also be
Line Blk (1) Common
used.
Volts Red (2) + Hot
23
25 To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch.
22 B R Pnk (4) W
W 25
Wire Colors H205 Wht (3) R
Changeover W R B
1 = Black 3 = White 5 = Gray Controller Gry (5) B
2 = Red 4 = Pink 6 = Orange Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC
Override Wiring Multiple Actuators to a Series 90 Controller -MFT95
22
Switch A Switch B Damper Position W
W018
Shunting
24 VAC Transformer 5 Resistor
Damper Open 21 B Occupied
Line Blk (1) Common Contact
Damper Closed Y
Volts Red (2) + Hot Honeywell T675A
The direction of rotation switch is set so that the fail safe position and the 23 Morning Warmup
position of the damper is closed with no signal at wire R. R R W
W Pnk (4) W 25 24
5 Shunting W973, W7100
21 24 VAC Transformer Resistor R Wht (3) R Controller
W015
B Gry (5) B
Line Blk (1) Common
24 Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC
Volts Red (2) + Hot Series 90
23
Controller 21
-MFT95
A Line
21 Blk (1) Common
Pnk (4) W 24
Line Volts Red (2) + Hot
135 Wht (3) R Blk (1) Common
B 23
Gry (5) B Volts Red (2) + Hot
23 Pnk (4) W
Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC
No. of
25
-MFT95 No. of Pnk (4) W 25 actuators Resistance Wht (3) R
24 VAC Transformer actuators Resistance 2 1300
21 Wht (3) R Gry (5) B
2 140 3 910
Line Blk (1) Common 3 71.5 Gry (5) B 4 768 Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC
4 47.5
Volts Red (2) + Hot 5 37.5 Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC Resistor Kit No. ZG-R06 To other
23 6 28 To other actuators -MFT95
A Resistor Kit No. ZG-R03 actuators -MFT95
W Pnk (4) W 24
Line Used with the W973 and W7100 controllers
R Wht (3) R
Volts B
B Gry (5) B Wiring Multiple Actuators to a Series 90 Controller
22 Controller Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC using a Minimum Position Potentiometer
Honeywell Q209A
-MFT95 S963A Minimum Position
W019
Potentiometer
24 VAC Transformer Minimum Position
Potentiometer 5 21 24 VAC Transformer
21
Low Limit Control
Line Blk (1) Common Line Blk (1) Common
Volts
W016
Volts Red (2) + Hot Red (2) + Hot

21
24 VAC Transformer 5 Series 90 25 23
Controller 23 22
B R B W Pnk (4) W R B W 25
Line Blk (1) Common W Pnk (4) W
Wht (3) R 24
Volts Red (2) + Hot R
22 R R W Wht (3) R
23 W Gry (5) B
Shunting
Resistor B Gry (5) B
22 Pnk (4) W Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC Shunting
W W R B 24 23 Resistor
Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC
24
Series 90
R Wht (3) R -MFT95 W973, W7100
T775
Honeywell
T675A Morning
Controller B R W Warmup -MFT95
B Gry (5) B
H205 Change- Occupied
Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC over Controller Contact
Series 90 low limit control
135 for 0 to 50% control
280 for 0 to 100% control -MFT95
High Limit Control 21

Line Blk (1) Common
W017
24 VAC Transformer 5 Volts Red (2) + Hot 21

21 23
Line Blk (1) Common
Line
22
Blk (1) Common Pnk (4) W 25 Volts Red (2) + Hot
Volts Red (2) + Hot 23
Wht (3) R
23 22
Gry (5) B Pnk (4) W 25
22 W Pnk (4) W 24 Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC
Series 90 Wht (3) R
R Wht (3) R To other
Controller actuators -MFT95
Gry (5) B
Gry (5) B
B R W B
Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC Org (6) U5 Output 2 to 10 VDC
To other
Series 90 high limit control - 280 -MFT95 actuators -MFT95
24
Technical Instructions
Document No. 155-746
EA GND-1
March 17, 2005
OpenAir GND Series Electronic Damper Actuator

UL Listed Fire/Smoke and Smoke Control Dampers
2-Position, 15-second Run Time,
15-second Spring Return Time
N474
Description The OpenAir direct coupled, fast-acting, two-position, spring return electronic actuators
are available as 24 Vac/dc, 120 Vac, and 230 Vac models. They are intended for use on
UL listed smoke control dampers and combination fire/smoke rated dampers.
Features Optional built-in auxiliary switches: Fixed switch points at 5 and 85 rotation.
Optional built-in Electronic Fusible Link (EFL) capability with four temperature
ratings: 165F (74C), 212F (100C), 250F (121C), 350F (177C).
Reversible fail-safe spring return.
All metal housing.
Pre-cabled Teflon insulated lead wires.
Fifteen-second operation at rated torque, temperature and voltage.
Application This actuator is used for the control of dampers requiring up to 53 lb-in (6Nm) driving
torque. It is intended for control of UL listed smoke control dampers and combination
fire/smoke HVAC dampers. This actuator is designed to meet the 2002 revisions to the
UL 555/555S and the AMCA Standard 520 specifications.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

Technical Instructions OpenAir GND Series Electronic Damper Actuator UL Listed Fire/Smoke Control Dampers
March 17, 2005
Product Numbers
G Direct-coupled Electronic Fire and Smoke Damper Actuator

N Spring Return 53 lb-in (6 Nm)
D 15 second run time
1 24 Vac/dc
2 120 Vac
3 230 Vac
2 2-position
1 Standard version
6 Two auxiliary switches
.1 Fire and smoke shaft adapter
U Assembled in USA
/B Bulk pack 10
/F Electronic Fusible Link (EFL) connection
/F/B EFL connection and bulk pack 10
Warning/Caution Notations
WARNING
Personal injury/loss of life may occur if you do
not perform a procedure as specified.
CAUTION:
Equipment damage may occur if you do not
perform a procedure as specified.
Service WARNING:
Do not open the actuator. Personal injury may occur if opened. Opening the
actuator voids the warranty.
If the actuator is inoperative, replace the unit.
Page 2 of 7 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

OpenAir GND Series Electronic Damper Actuator UL Listed Fire/Smoke Control Dampers Technical Instructions
March 17, 2005
Specifications Operating voltage 24 Vac 20%

24 Vdc +20%, -10%
Power supply 120 Vac 10%
230 Vac 10%
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 24 Vac/dc
running 20 VA/12W
holding 8 VA/6W
Power Consumption 120 Vac/230 Vac
running 20 VA
holding 9 VA
Function Running torque 53 lb-in (6 Nm) (minimum)
Stall torque (minimum) 160 lb-in (18 Nm)
Torque reduction at elevated temperature Less than 10%
Runtime for 90 15 seconds nominal
closing (on power loss) with spring return 15 seconds maximum
Nominal angle of rotation 95
Life Expectancy Minimum 35,000 full stroke cycles
Mounting Damper shaft size .5-inch (12,7 mm) round

Damper shaft length, minimum 1.4-inch (36 mm)
Housing Enclosure NEMA 1
Material Die cast aluminum alloy
Ambient conditions Operation 0F to 140F (-18C to 60C)
one time 350F (177C)
Storage and transport 40F to 158F (40C to 70C)
Ambient humidity (non-condensing) Maximum 95% rh non-condensing
Teflon cable 400F (200C)
Agency certification UL873
cUL C22.2 No. 24-93
AS/NZS 2064 1/2:1997
Conforms to CE requirements for the
EMC and low voltage directives
Australian Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) per AS/NZS
4251.1/2:1999 (C-tick)
Miscellaneous Pre-cabled connection 18 AWG, 3 feet (.9 meter)

3/8-in (.5mm) flexible conduit connector
Dimensions 9-in. 3.25-in. 3-in. D
(229 mm 83 mm 76 mm)
Weight 4 lb (1.8 kg)
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Page 3 of 7

March 17, 2005
Accessories Electronic Fusible Link (EFL)

ASK79.165 (165F (74C) operation)
EA1127R1
NOTE: Determine and order
appropriate actuator before
selecting EFL.
Figure 1.
Operation When power is applied, the actuator coupling moves toward the open position, "90".
The actuator opens in 15 seconds nominal, 90 at 60 Hz. In the event of a power failure
or when operating voltage is turned off, the actuator returns to the "0" position. The
return time is 15 seconds nominal for 90.
The National Fire Protection Association NFPA 92A Standard for Recommended
Practice for Smoke-Control System and UL 864 Standard for Control Units and
Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, require weekly self-tests for dedicated smoke
control equipment used in a smoke control system. The National Fire Protection
Association NFPA 72 Standard for National Fire Alarm Codes states that all life-safety
systems are to be functionally checked at least annually.
The GND actuator does not require any periodic cycling to function properly as an
integral part of an active smoke control damper system. Check the smoke control
damper/actuator every time you functionally check your smoke detectors, emergency
lights, and/or power generators for operation.
Installation Refer to the installation instructions for detailed guidelines. (See 129-402)
CAUTION:
Read and carefully follow the Installation Instructions to avoid equipment
damage.

March 17, 2005
Wiring All wiring must conform to NEC and local codes and regulations.
Wire Designations
RED Function Color
(SUPPLY)
Supply Red
24 Vac/dc Neutral Black
M
Ground Green
EA0941R1
BLACK GREEN
(NEUTRAL) (GROUND)
Figure 2.
BLACK (Line)
Function Color
Line Black
M Neutral White
120 Vac
Ground Green
EA1167R2
WHITE GREEN
(Neutral) (Ground)
Figure 3.
BROWN (Line) Function Color CAUTION:

Line Brown The actuator must be wired
with a 230 Vac line with respect
M
Neutral Blue to neutral and the ground lead
230 Vac Ground Green must be connected for proper
protection of the actuator. Any
other connection, such as
EA0609R2
BLUE GREEN phase-to-phase, can damage

(Neutral) (Ground)
the actuator.
Figure 4.
Wire Switch Switch

85 5 Switch
Color Makes Breaks
5 Gray < 5 > 5
85 Yellow > 85 < 85
Auxiliary Switches
EA1163R2
YELLOW GRAY
NOTE:
Both sets of contacts are open when actuator is
between 5 and 85.
Figure 5.

March 17, 2005
Wiring, Continued
NOTE:
When ordered, GND
Electronic Fusible Link
models come pre-wired Molex connector
EA1165R1
for coupling with EFL for use with
sensor. Siemens EFL 7.
Figure
EA1166R1
Figure 6.

March 17, 2005
Dimensions
MANUAL
.8
OVERRIDE
(200,1)
1.2 1.2
(30) (30)
3.2
(81)
EA1148R1
.99
(25.1)
.8
(19,2) .8
(19,2)
Figure 8. Dimensions in Inches (mm).
Information in this publication is based on current specifications. The company reserves the right to make changes in specifications and models as
design improvements are introduced. Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont. OpenAir is a registered trademark of Siemens Building
Technologies. Other product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
2005 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Your feedback is important to us. If you have Document No. 155-746
1000 Deerfield Parkway comments about this document, please send Country of Origin: US
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089-4513 them to sbt_technical.editor@siemens.com Page 7 of 7
U.S.A.
Document No. 152-046P25
EA GGD-1
January, 9 2008
OpenAir GGD Electronic Damper Actuator

Designed for UL Listed Fire/Smoke and
Smoke Control Dampers
2-Position, 15-second Runtime
15-second Spring Return Time
N474
Description The OpenAir direct coupled, fast acting, two-position, spring return electronic actuators
are available as 24 Vac, 115 Vac, and 230 Vac models. They are intended for use on UL
listed smoke control dampers or combination fire/smoke rated dampers.
Features High temperature rated drive system.

Reversible fail-safe spring return.
All metal housing.
Teflon insulated lead wires.
Mechanical range adjustment.
Multiple shaft couplings available; will accommodate up to 1.05-inch shafts.
Fifteen second nominal open time; 15-second nominal spring return time.
Application This actuator is used for the control of dampers requiring up to 142 lb-in (16Nm) driving
torque. It is intended for control of UL listed smoke control dampers or combination
fire/smoke HVAC dampers. This actuator is designed to meet the 1999 revisions to the
UL 555S and AMCA 500-D specifications. Minimum stall torque 350 lb-in.
Product Numbers Table 1.
Type Rotation Shaft Adapter 24 Vac 115 Vac 230 Vac

Standard 95 Self-centering GGD121.1U GGD221.1U GGD321.1U
Eight pack of standard 95 Self-centering GGD121.1U/B GGD221.1U/B GGD321.1U/B
With oversize shaft adapter 95 Oversized GGD121.3U GGD221.3U GGD321.3U

Technical Instructions GGD Electronic Damper Actuator Designed for UL Listed Fire/Smoke Control Dampers
January 9, 2008
Specifications Operating voltage 24 Vac 20%

115 Vac 15%
Power supply 230 Vac 10%
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
running 150 VA
holding 10 VA
Function Running torque 142 lb-in (16 Nm)
Spring return torque 108 lb-in (12 Nm)
Minimum stall torque 350 lb-in (39 Nm)
Torque reduction at elevated temperature Less than 10%
Runtime for 90
operating with motor at 60 Hz 15 seconds nominal
closing (on power loss) with spring return 15 seconds maximum
Nominal angle of rotation 95
Life Expectancy Minimum 35,000 full stroke cycles.
Mounting Damper shaft size

Standard 3/8 to 1 inch (8 to 25.6 mm)
Oversize 1.05 inch maximum (26.6 mm)
Minimum shaft length 3/4-inch (20 mm)
Housing Enclosure NEMA 1
Material Die cast aluminum alloy
Ambient conditions Ambient temperature
operation 0 to 130F (-18 to 55C)
One time 350F (177 C)
for 1/2 hour (per UL555S)
storage and transport -25 to 158F (-32 to 70C)
Ambient humidity (non-condensing) Maximum 95% R.H.
Agency certification UL listed to UL873
cUL certified to Canadian standard
C22.2 No. 24-93
Australian EMC Framework (C-tick)
with the limits per
AS/NZS 2064 1/2:1997
Miscellaneous Pre-cabled connection 18 AWG
Dimensions See Figure 1.
Weight 7 lbs. (3.2 kg)
Eight pack 56 lbs. (25.4 kg)
WARNING
Personal injury/loss of life may occur if you do
not perform a procedure as specified.
CAUTION:
Equipment damage may occur if you do not
follow a procedure as specified.

GGD Electronic Damper Actuator Designed for UL Listed Fire/Smoke Control Dampers Technical Instructions
January 9, 2008
Accessories 985-006 Anti-rotation (mounting) bracket.
EA0500R1
EA0653R1
EA1059R1
985-004 ASK74.1 Oversized shaft 985-035P25 Conduit 985-008P20 Conduit
Self-centering shaft adapter will accommodate adapter for accom- adapter for a 1/2-inch
adapter. up to a 1.05-inch (26.6 mm) modating a conduit (12 mm) NPT
diameter shaft. Use for box (pk of 25). connector (pk of 20).
coupling to 1-inch
jackshafts that are slightly
oversized.
Operation When power is applied, the actuator coupling moves toward the open position, 90.
The actuator opens in fifteen seconds nominal, 90 at 60 Hz. In the event of a power
failure or when operating voltage is turned off, the actuator returns to the 0 position.
The return time is fifteen seconds maximum for 90.
The GGD actuator does not require any periodic cycling to function properly as an
integral part of an active smoke control damper system.
NOTE: Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. however, strongly suggests that all
life safety systems are functionally checked periodically. Check the
smoke control damper/actuator every time you functionally check your smoke
detectors, emergency lights, and/or power generators for operation.
Installation Refer to the installation instructions for detailed guidelines.
CAUTION:
Read and carefully follow the Installation Instructions (129-255) to avoid
equipment damage.
Wiring All wiring must conform to NEC and local codes and regulations.
RED (G)
Wire Designations
Function Color
24 Vac M Supply (SP) Red
Neutral (SN) Black
Ground Green
EA0550R1
BLACK (G0) GREEN (GND)

BLACK (Line)
Function Color
115 Vac M
Line Black
Neutral White
Ground Green
EA0549R2
WHITE GREEN
(Neutral) (Ground)

Technical Instructions GGD Electronic Damper Actuator Designed for UL Listed Fire/Smoke Control Dampers
January 9, 2008
BROWN (L)
Wire Designations,
continued Function Color CAUTION:
The actuator must be wired
230 Vac M
Line Brown with a 230 Vac line with respect
Neutral Blue to neutral and the ground lead
EA0609R1
Ground Green must be connected for proper
protection of the actuator. Any
BLUE (N) GREEN (GND) other connection, such as
phase to phase, can damage
the actuator.
Service WARNING:
Do not open the actuator. Personal injury may occur if opened. Opening
the actuator voids the warranty.
If the actuator is inoperative, replace the unit.
Dimensions 105 OP
TIO
NA
L
95
min. 4 in.
100 mm
1-1/8 in.
28 mm
11 in. 3-3/8 in.

279 mm 86 mm
min. 8 in.
min. 1/4 in. 200 mm
7 mm
7-3/4 in.
197 mm
1-11/32 1-19/32
3-15/16 in.
34 mm 37 mm 100 mm
min. 2-1/2 in.
60 mm
OPENING
FOR 3/8"
FLEX CONDUIT
EA0548R2
1-23/32 in.
30 mm
Figure 1. Dimensions of the Actuator.
design improvements are introduced. Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont. OpenAir is a trademark of Siemens Building Technologies.
Product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. 2008 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Your feedback is important to us. If you have Document No. 152-046P25
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089-4513 them to technical.editor.us.sbt@siemens.com Page 4 of 4
U.S.A.
AP 331-1
September 18, 2008
POWERS Controls
No. 3 Pneumatic Damper Actuator
331-4312 Pivot Mounting 331-4313 Fixed Mounting 331-4311 Extended Shaft Mounting
Description The POWERS Controls No. 3 Pneumatic Damper Actuator is a compact, totally
enclosed, rolling diaphragm-type actuator designed for modulating or two-position
actuation of dampers or air valves.
Features All metal body construction

Totally enclosed to protect internal parts
Variety of spring ranges for sequencing
Fixed or pivot mounting models
Pivot mounting for extended shaft
Positioning relay (optional)
Variety of mounting/linkage kits for special applications
Threaded shaft for easy mounting to accessory thread
Product Numbers See Table 1.
Application Typical applications are for control of mixing box dampers or air valves, and damper
control for unit ventilators, unit conditioners and other HVAC applications.
These compact, totally enclosed actuators are easily installed either directly within the
mixing box or unit enclosure, or externally, as required for each application.

Technical Instructions POWERS Controls No. 3 Pneumatic Damper Actuator
Document Number 155-146P25
September 18, 2008
Table 1. Product Numbers for No. 3 Pneumatic Damper Actuators.
Part No.
Nominal Spring Range
Description Mounting Style 3-7 psi 5-10 psi 8-13 psi
(21-48 kPa) (35-69 kPa) (55-90 kPa)
Actuator Front 331-4310 331-4510 331-4810
Actuator, bracket Fixed 331-4313 331-4513 331-4813
Actuator, bracket, clevis Fixed 331-4314 331-4514 331-4814
Actuator, integral pivot Pivot 331-4312 331-4512 331-4812
Actuator, integral pivot with pivot post * Extended shaft 331-4311 331-4511 331-4811
Actuator, integral pivot with pivot post * Extended shaft kit with positioning 332-4811
relay
Actuator, bracket, ball joint connector Fixed 331-4331 331-4531 331-4831
Actuator, bracket, ball joint connector Fixed 332-4831
and positioning relay
Extended shaft with 90 barb fitting (for Extended shaft 546-00020
fume hood controller applications)
* Mounted on plate for extended shaft with clevis and crank for 3/8-inch (10-mm), 7/16-inch (11-mm), or 1/2-inch
(13-mm) diameter shaft.
NOTE: When the actuator is ordered with extended shaft mounting, the mounting plate, pivot post and hardware,
clevis, damper crank, rocker arm, and all screws/nuts are included. Order other frame mounting
accessories as required if not supplied by damper manufacturer.
Specifications Effective diaphragm area 8 inches2 (51.6 cm2)

Stroke 2-3/8 inches (6 mm) *
Housing (totally enclosed) Aluminum
Stem Plated steel
Diaphragm Ozone resistant rubber
Spring Steel
Cup Zytel
Maximum air pressure 30 psig (210 kPa)
Type of mounting Fixed or pivot
Thrust and torque rating See Table 3
Agency Approvals Complies with UL555 and UL555S
* For special applications, an actuator stroke of 2-3/4 inch is available in 3 to 7, 5 to 10,

or 8 to 13 psi (21 to 58, 35 to 69, or 55 to 90 kPa) spring ranges. Some models are UL
Recognized Components under ULs Damper Actuator category (EMKU2), which
covers pneumatic damper actuators intended to be employed on fire dampers and
leakage rated dampers. Contact Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. National OEM
Sales and Marketing for information.
Page 2 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

POWERS Controls No. 3 Pneumatic Damper Actuator Technical Instructions
September 18, 2008
Specifications, Nominal spring ranges 3 to 7 psi (21 to 50 kPa)

Continued 5 to 10 psi (35 to 69 kPa)
8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa)
Operating Operating temperature -20F to 160F (-29C to 71C)
Air connection Straight barb fitting for 1/4-inch OD
plastic tubing installed in 1/8-inch NPT
opening
Miscellaneous Shipping Weight:
Basic actuator 1.3 lb (0.58 kg)
Actuator with extended shaft mounting 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
Actuator with fixed bracket 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)
Actuator with fixed bracket and clevis 2.7 lb (1.2 kg)
Actuator with extended shaft mounting
and Positioning Relay 4.8 lb (2.2 kg)
Dimensions See Figures 4 through 8
Accessories
Linkage kit, 4-inch link and crank 331-958
Linkage kit, 4-inch rod, ball joint and crank 331-947
Damper shaft crank, selectable radius, 45, 60, and 90, angular 331-941
rotation for 3/8 to 1/2-inch (10 to 13-mm) diameter damper shafts
Damper shaft crank, adjustable radius 3/4 to 2-7/8 inch (19 to 73 mm) 331-795
for 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter damper shafts
Damper shaft crank, adjustable radius 3/4 to 4-5/8 inch (19 to 177 mm) 331-805
for 3/8-inch (9 mm) diameter damper shafts
Damper shaft extension, 1/2 9 inches long 333-042
Damper shaft extension, 1/2 inch shaft 331-631
Damper shaft extension Adapter, for 3/8 inch shaft 331-632
Pivot mounting kit (bracket and three mounting screws) 333-148
Pivot post 333-139
Fixed mounting bracket 331-916
Extended shaft mounting plate 331-033
Clevis, steel 333-207
Clevis, forged 331-292
Clevis pin 331-293
Clevis, frame mounting 331-653
Hitch pin 331-807
12-inch Damper actuator push rod 338-041
Damper blade rocker arm 333-034
Positioning relay 147-2000
Relay mounting kit 147-104
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Page 3

September 18, 2008
Table 3. Thrust Torque Ratings.

Maximum Thrust lb. (N) Torque Rating* lb-in (Nm)
Nominal Full Stroke Forward Spring Gradual 2-Position Operation
Spring Return Operation
Range 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi (No Stroke) 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi
(103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) 0 psig (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa)
(0 kPa)
3 to 7 psi 64 (285) 88 (391) 144 (641) 24 (107) 10 (1.1) 20.2 (2.3) 20.2 (2.3) 20.2 (2.3)
(21 to 48 kPa)
5 to 10 psi 40 (178) 64 (285) 120 (534) 40 (178) 10 (1.1) 33.6 (3.8) 33.6 (3.8) 33.6 (3.8)
(35 to 69 kPa)
8 to 13 psi 16 (71) 40 (178) 96 (427) 64 (285) 10 (1.1) 53.8 (6.1) 53.8 (6.1) 53.8 (6.1)
(55 to 90 kPa)
* With maximum hysteresis of 2.5 psi (17.2 kPa) @ 90 rotation.
Sizing The size and quantity of actuators required depends on several damper torque factors:
Damper type (standard or low leakage)

Quality of damper installation
Number of damper sections
Air velocity
Static pressure
Age of damper
To determine the correct actuator required for the installation:
Obtain the damper torque ratings (lb-in/sq-ft) from the damper manufacturer.
Determine the area of the damper.
Calculate the total torque required to move the damper.
Select the appropriate actuator(s).
Installation For Actuators 331-4311, 331-4511, 331-4811, or 332-4811. These assemblies are
designed for 90 damper rotation.
Extended Shaft
Mounting, Pivot NOTE: Clevis mounts in Crank Radius Hole No. 6 for 90 damper rotation.
Mounting
1. Slip the 9/16-inch (14 mm) diameter hole in the mounting plate over the damper
shaft (Figure 1).
2. Slip the crank over the 3/8 through 1/2-inch (10 through 13-mm) diameter damper
shaft (Figure 2).
3. Position the mounting plate (Table 3).
4. Attach the mounting plate to the duct with four screws.

September 18, 2008
Installation, Continued
Table 3. Damper Blade Rotation.
Actuator Position in Crank Position in Rotation of Damper
Relation to Damper Relation to Damper Blade on Increase of
Shaft Shaft Pressure
Left Above Clockwise
Below Counterclockwise
Right Above Counterclockwise
Below Clockwise
Figure 1. Mounting Plate and Extended Shaft Mounting.
Item Description Item Description

1 Nut(s) 6 Clevis
2 Lock Washers (2) 7 Hitch Pin
3 E-ring 8 Clevis Pin
4 Pivot Post 9 Crank Assembly Kit No. 331-941
5 Nut 10 Actuator Mounting Plate
Figure 2. Extended Shaft Mounting with Pivot.

September 18, 2008
Installation, For Actuators 331-4314, 331-4514, 331-4814 order Linkage Kit 331-958.
Continued
For Actuators 331-4313, 331-4513, 331-4813, order Clevis 333-207 and Linkage Kit
Extended Shaft 331-958.
Mounting, Fixed
Actuator 1. Determine the direction of the damper shaft rotation (clockwise or
counterclockwise) on an increase in pressure to the actuator.
2. Determine the angle of rotation required for the damper to move from closed to full
open.
NOTE: Since the actuator stroke is 2-3/8 inch (6 cm) and the angle of rotation is
known, the crank radius can be determined from the graph in TB181
Maximum Thrust Ratings of Pneumatic Damper Actuators Technical Bulletin
(155-219P25) or use Table 4.
3. Attach the link to the crank at the radius value determined in Step 2.
4. Attach the clevis and other end of the linkage to the actuator shaft (Figure 3).
5. The normal position of the damper (open or closed) and its direction of rotation
(CW or CCW) will determine the location of the actuator and linkage assembly
(Table 3).
6. Attach an air line or Baumanometer (squeeze bulb) to the actuator and increase
pressure until the actuator shaft moves one half of its stroke, 1-3/16 inch (3 cm).
Select the correct location for the actuator assembly as determined in Step 5.
7. Slip the crank over the damper shaft and position the assembly so that the actuator
shaft and link are straight and perpendicular to the crank.
8. Mark and attach the actuator bracket to the duct at this location. If this installation
procedure is followed, there will be no problem with linkage scissoring or locking
up.
The installation is complete.
Item Description Item Description

1 Clevis Pin 4 Crank with Set Screw
2 Spring Washer 5 Hitch Pin
3 Washer, Nylon 6 Link, 4 inches (102 mm) long
Figure 3. Fixed Mounted Actuator Assembly with Linkage Kit 331-958.

September 18, 2008
Installation, Continued
Table 4. Crank Radius Connection.
Dimensions Application Crank Radius Crank Hole
Connection Number
X Y
7-7/8 inch 1-3/16 inch 2-3/8 inch 1-11/16 inch 6
(200 mm) (30 mm) (60 mm) stroke (43 mm)
90 Rotation
7-7/8 inch 2-1/16 inch 2-3/8 inch 2-3/8 inch 5
(200 mm) (52 mm) (60 mm) stroke (60 mm)
60 Rotation
NOTE: Crank Radius Holes No. 1 through 4 are used for No. 4 and No. 6
Pneumatic Damper Actuators only.
Dimensions
Figure 4. No. 3 Pneumatic Damper Actuator Dimensions.

Dimensions are in Inches (Millimeters).
Figure 5. No. 3 Actuator with Fixed Mounting Bracket Dimensions.


September 18, 2008
Dimensions, Continued
Figure 6. Extended Shaft Mounting Bracket Dimensions.

Figure 7. No. 3 Actuator with Pivot Mounting Bracket Dimensions.

Figure 8. No. 3 Actuator with the RL 147 Positioning Relay Mounted Dimensions.
Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters).
design improvements are introduced. POWERS is a trademark of Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Other product or company names
mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. 2008 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
1000 Deerfield Parkway comments about this document, please send them Country of Origin: US
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089-4513 to SBT_technical.editor.us.sbt@siemens.com Page 8
U.S.A.
AP 331-2
October 10, 2005
POWERS Controls
No. 4 Pneumatic Damper Actuator
Actuator Assembly Actuator Assembly Actuator Assembly

331-2929 Typical 331-2904 Typical 331-3000 Typical
Description The Powers Controls No. 4 Pneumatic Damper Actuator is a totally enclosed pneumatic
piston type actuator designed to operate dampers for ventilating systems, mixing box
control, and other applications requiring a large effective diaphragm area and long
stroke.
Features All metal body construction
Replaceable, ozone-resistant, EPDM rubber, rolling diaphragm
Pivot mounting for extended shaft or frame mounting
Fixed bracket mounting
Direct front mounting
Positioning relay (optional)
Forward travel stops (optional)
Adjustable hesitation point (hesitation actuator only)
Product Numbers See Table 1.
Application The No. 4 Pneumatic Damper Actuator is recommended for control of outdoor, return
air, exhaust, face and bypass, fan discharge, and static pressure control dampers, as
well as specialized dampers and air valves found in terminal units such as unit
ventilators and mixing boxes.
Certain actuators in Table 1 are UL Recognized Components for fire/smoke
applications under category EMKU2. This category covers pneumatic
damper actuators used on fire dampers and leakage rated dampers.
The No. 4 Pneumatic Damper Actuator hesitation model is frequently used to operate
the outdoor air damper on unit ventilators. The hesitation feature enables the outdoor air
damper to be synchronized with the unit valve to maintain a predetermined outdoor air
requirement when the controlled zone is at the desired temperature.
Page 1
October 10, 2005
WARNING: Personal injury, or loss of life may occur if you do not

follow a procedure as specified.
CAUTION: Equipment damage, or loss of data may occur if you do

not follow a procedure as specified.
Table 1. Product Numbers for No. 4 Pneumatic Damper Actuator.
Product Numbers
Nominal Spring Range
Description Mounting Style 3-7 psi 3-13 psi 5-10 psi 8-13 psi 2-3, 8-13 psi
(21-48 kPa) (21-90 kPa) (35-69 kPa) (55-90 kPa) (14-21, 55-90 kPa)
Hesitation Model
Actuator, mounting screws Front 331-2910 331-2917 331-2963
(non-pivot)
Actuator, bracket Fixed 331-2911 331-2934 331-2966 331-2927
(non-pivot) 3-inch stroke
for unit ventilator
Actuator, bracket Fixed 331-2974
(non-pivot) 2-3/8 inch
stroke for unit ventilator
Actuator, mounting plate, Fixed 331-3015 331-3018 331-3016 331-3017 331-3019
ball joint connector
Actuator, mounting plate, Fixed 332-3017
ball joint connector with
positioning relay
Actuator, integral pivot Pivot 331-2904 1 331-2905 1 331-2906 1 331-2961 1 331-2909 1
Actuator, integral pivot, Pivot 331-2929 331-2930 331-2931 331-2968
clevis and clevis pin for
use with frame mounting
accessory
Actuator, integral pivot with Universal Kit 331-3000 331-3001 331-3002 331-2973 1 331-3004
pivot post 2
Actuator, integral pivot with Universal Kit with 332-2973
pivot post and positioning Positioning Relay
relay 2
1 UL Recognized Components for Fire/Smoke Applications.
2 Mounted on plate for extended shaft with clevis and crank for 3/8-inch (10-mm), 7/16-inch (11-mm), or 1/2-inch
(13-mm) diameter shaft. Parts for frame mounting (blade drive) included with kit.
NOTE: When the actuator is ordered with universal mounting, the mounting plate, pivot post and hardware, clevis,
damper crank, and all screws/nuts are included. Order other frame mounting accessories as required, if not
supplied by damper manufacturer.

October 10, 2005
Specifications Effective diaphragm area 11 inches2 (71 cm2)

Stroke 4 inches (102 mm)
Stroke (Hesitation model) 3 inches (76 mm)
Stem Stainless steel
Housing Steel with cathodic epoxy electrocoat
Diaphragm Ozone-resistant, EPDM rubber
Bearing Oilite sintered bronze bushing in
aluminum die casting
Maximum air pressure 30 psig (210 kPa)
Nominal spring ranges 3 to 7 psi (21 to 50 kPa)
3 to 13 psi (21 to 90 kPa)
5 to 10 psi (35 to 70 kPa)
8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa)
Nominal spring range (Hesitation model) 2 to 3; 8 to 13 psi
(14 to 21; 55 to 90 kPa)
Ambient temperature range
Operating -20F to 200F (-29C to 93C)
Storage -20F to 200F (-29C to 93C)
Air connection elbow barb fitting for
1/4-inch OD plastic tubing Installed in 1/8-inch NPT opening
Type of mounting Front, bracket, pivot
Thrust and torque rating See Table 2
Dimensions See Figure 14
Agency Approvals Complies with UL555 and UL555S
Table 2. Thrust and Torque Rating.

Maximum Thrust lb (N) Torque Rating* lb-in (Nm)
Nominal Full Stroke Forward Spring Return Gradual 2-position Operation or
Spring (No stroke) Operation with Positioner
Range 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi 0 psig (0 kPa) 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi
(103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa)
3-7 psi 88 (391) 121 (538) 198 (881) 33 (147) 30 (3.4) 46 (5.2) 46 (5.2) 46 (5.2)
(21-50 kPa)
3-13 psi 22 (98) 55 (245) 132 (587) 33 (147) 30 (3.4) 30 (3.4) 46 (5.2) 46 (5.2)
(21-90 kPa)
5-10 psi 55 (245) 88 (391) 165 (734) 55 (245) 30 (3.4) 77 (8.7) 77 (8.7) 77 (8.7)
(35-70 kPa)
8-13 psi 22 (98) 55 (245) 132 (587) 88 (391) 30 (3.4) 123 (14) 123 (14) 123 (14)
(55- 90 kPa)
2-3, 8-13 psi 22 (98) 55 (245) 132 (587) 22 (98) 23 (2.6)
(14-21, 55-90 kPa)
Hesitation model
* With maximum hysteresis of 2.5 psi (17.2 kPa) @ 90 rotation.

October 10, 2005
Linkage kits:
Accessories
Crank and link (Figure 9) 331-958
Rod, ball joint, and crank 331-947
Pivot post, ball joint, and crank 331-954
Cranks - damper shaft:
5/8-inch (16 mm) diameter 333-182
3/4-inch (19 mm) diameter 333-183
1-inch (25 mm) diameter 333-181
Adjustable radius, 3/4 to 2-7/8 inch (20 to 73 mm) for
1/2-inch (13 mm) diameter damper shaft 331-795
Selectable radius (45, 60, or 90 rotation) for
3/8 to 1/2-inch (10 to 13 mm) diameter damper shaft 331-941
Clevis:
Forged 331-653
Steel plated 333-207
Damper shaft extension kits:
1/2-inch (13 mm) 2-1/4 inch (54 mm) long (See TB 128) 331-631
1/2-inch (13 mm) 9-inch (229 mm) long 333-184
Damper shaft extension kit adapter, 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) 331-632
Actuator shaft adapter, uses 1/2-inch NPT Pipe 333-030
Actuator shaft extensions:
10-1/8-inches (257 mm) long 331-434A
Ball joint type, 12 inches (305 mm) long 331-674
Damper blade rocker arm 333-034
Damper push rods, 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter:
12 inches (30 cm) long 338-041
48 inches (122 cm) long 338-046
Spring clamp (secures 1/4-inch OD poly tubing to barb-fitting
at higher control pressures or elevated temperatures) 531-833
Forward stroke stop kit
Adjustable 2-3/8 to 4 inches (60 to 102 mm) 331-939
Positioning relay 147-2000
Positioning relay mounting kit 147-314
Universal mounting plate
3/4-inch hole in plate for damper shaft 331-623
1-inch hole in plate for damper shaft (use with 333-194) 331-623A
Frame mounting lug 331-569
Offset mounting bracket 333-176

October 10, 2005
Service Kit EPDM diaphragms (package of 5) 333-071
Figure 1. Actuator Jam Nut Location.

WARNING:
Do not remove the jam nut (Figure 1). Spring is under heavy load.
Repair by trained personnel only.
Actuator Selection For specific unit ventilators, see Application Bulletins found in Section 36 of the
for Unit Ventilator POWERS Controls Installed Applications Manual (144-004).
Actuator Sizing The quantity of actuators required depends on several torque factors. To determine the
quantity of actuators required for the installation:
1. Obtain damper torque ratings (ft-lb/ft2) from the damper manufacturer.
2. Determine the area of the damper.
3. Calculate the total torque required to move the damper:
Total Torque = Torque Rating Damper Area
4. Calculate the total quantity of actuators required:
Number of Total Damper Torque Required

=
Actuators SF1 Actuator Torque (Table 2)
1
Safety Factor: When calculating the number of actuators required, a safety factor
should be included for unaccountable variables such as slight misalignments, aging of
the damper, etc. A suggested safety factor is 0.80 (or 80% of the rated torque).
See AB-300 Damper Actuator Sizing and Selection Application Bulletin in the HVAC
Systems/Controls Reference Data (125-1853) for additional sizing information. See
TB-181 POWERS Controls Maximum Thrust Ratings of Pneumatic Damper Actuators
Technical Bulletin (155-219P25) for additional torque requirements.
Figure 2. Hesitation Actuator Adjustment.

October 10, 2005
Operation The air tubing from a controlling instrument connects to the actuator's upper housing.
With no control pressure to the actuator, the compression spring forces the diaphragm
Standard Actuator and actuator shaft toward the upper housing, but is limited by the jam nut on the
(Figure 3) actuator shaft. As the control pressure on the diaphragm increases, the spring
compression is overcome and the actuator shaft gradually moves outward. Conversely,
as control pressure decreases, the spring returns the shaft to the position at which the
air pressure on the diaphragm balances the spring tension. For each value of control
pressure there is a corresponding position of the shaft.
Hesitation Actuator The branch or return pressure from the controlling instrument connects to the upper
(Figure 4) housing of the actuator. With no branch pressure to the motor, the main spring forces
the actuator shaft toward the upper housing, but is limited by the jam nut on the actuator
shaft. As the branch pressure on the diaphragm increases from 0 to 2 psi (0 to 14 kPa),
the compressive force in the main spring prevents the actuator shaft from moving. As
the branch pressure increases from 2 to 3 psi (14 to 21 kPa), the force in the main
spring is overcome and the actuator shaft moves to its hesitation point. At the hesitation
point, the main spring seat is in contact with the retard spring seat. The compressive
force in the retard spring prevents further actuator shaft travel between 3 and 8 psi (21
and 55 kPa). Above 8 psi (55 kPa), the resisting force in the retard spring is overcome
and the actuator shaft moves to its maximum stroke between 8 and 13 psi (55 and 90
kPa).
Table 3. Construction Components (Figures 3 and 4).

Item Part No. Material Description Item Part No. Material Description
1 333-099 Aluminum Upper housing with pivot ears 7 331-915 Music wire Retainer clip
2 333-071 EPDM Diaphragm (Package of 5) 8 Stl. tubing Spring guide
3 Steel Lower housing 9 Music wire Hesitation spring
4 Oil-tempered steel Spring 10 Steel Cycle adjusting rod
5 Zytel Bearing plate 11 041-100 Brass 10-32 Hex nut
6 Piston cup/stem
Figure 3. Standard Actuator. Figure 4. Hesitation Actuator.

October 10, 2005
Hesitation Actuator Example:

Adjustment To obtain an initial hesitation point after one inch (25 mm) of shaft travel.
1. Add air pressure to the actuator until shaft travel is one inch (25 mm).
2. Turn locknuts on cycle adjustment rods until they contact lower housing, then lock
together (Figure 4, Items 10 and 11). For initial hesitation point settings other than
one inch (25 mm), follow this same procedure.
CAUTION:
Make certain cycle adjustment nuts are even to ensure smooth operation.
Extended Shaft 1. Order one of the following for extended shaft mounting. These assemblies are
Mounting - Pivot designed for 90 damper rotation.
Actuator
Actuator: 331-3000, 331-3001, 331-3002, 331-2973, or 331-3004
NOTE: Clevis mounts in Crank Radius Hole No. 1 for 90 damper rotation.
2. Slip the 3/4-inch (19 mm) diameter hole in the mounting plate over the damper shaft
(Figure 5).
Table 4. Mounting Plate Hole Identification.

Hole Used For
1 No. 6 Actuator extended shaft mounting

2 Not used
3 No. 4 Actuator extended shaft
No. 6 Actuator frame mounting NC
4 No. 6 Actuator frame mounting NO
5 No. 4 Actuator frame mounting NC
6 No. 4 Actuator frame mounting NO

Figure 5. Actuator Mounting Plate 331-623.

October 10, 2005
Extended Shaft
3. Slip the crank over the 3/8 through 1/2-inch (10 through 13-mm) diameter damper
Mounting - Pivot shaft (Figure 6).
Actuator,
Continued With the actuator assembly to the left of the damper shaft, an increase in actuator
pressure rotates the damper blade clockwise (CW) when the crank is above the
damper shaft (Figure 6), or counterclockwise (CCW) when the crank is below the
damper shaft.
Figure 6. Actuator 331-3000 (Typical).
With the actuator assembly to the right of the damper shaft, an increase in actuator
pressure rotates the damper blade CCW when the crank is above the damper shaft,
or CW when the crank is below the damper shaft.
4. Position the mounting plate and attach it to the duct with four screws.
Table 5. Actuator Accessories Shown in Figure 6.

Item Part No. Description Qty. Material
1 331-565 Pivot shaft 1 Steel
2 047-061J E-ring 2 Steel
3 146-020K Lock washer 1 Steel
4 041-162J Nut 1 Steel
5 041-142 Nut 1 Steel
6 333-207 Clevis 1 Zinc plated steel
7 331-807 Hitch pin 1 Zinc plated steel
8 331-293 Clevis pin 1 Zinc plated steel
9 331-923 Crank assembly 1 Galvanized steel
10 331-623 Actuator mounting plate 1 Steel
034-283 Mounting screws 4 Steel
F 333-034 Rocker Zinc plated steel
F 331-801 Clevis 1 Steel-reinforced plastic
F 034-123K Mounting screws 3 Steel
F 041-230J Nut 2 Steel
F 030-510J Screws 2 Steel
"F" Parts for Frame Mounting.

October 10, 2005
Extended Shaft 1. Order one of the following damper actuators, the clevis, and linkage kit (Figure 8):
Mounting - Fixed Actuator with mounting bracket: 331-2911, 331-2966, 331-2927, or 331-2974
Actuator Clevis: 331-801
Linkage Kit: 331-958
2. Determine the application, and select appropriate "X" and "Y" dimensions from
Table 7. Select a rigid section of the duct, if possible, and then draw these lines on
the duct.
NOTE: If the "X" dimension is 8-1/2 inches (216 mm), place the rear of the
actuator against the damper shaft and draw a line along the front of the
bracket for the "X" dimension. Measure the Y dimension.
3. If the actuator assembly mounts to the right of the damper shaft (Figure 8):
Draw the "Y" dimension line above the damper shaft if the damper blade is to
rotate CCW as actuator pressure increases.
Draw the "Y" line below the damper shaft if the damper blade is to rotate CW as
actuator pressure increases.
If the actuator assembly mounts to the left of the damper shaft:
Draw the "Y" dimension line above the shaft if the damper blade is to rotate CW
as actuator pressure increases.
Draw the "Y" line below the damper shaft if the damper blade is to rotate CCW
as actuator pressure increases.
CAUTION:
It is important to use the "X" and "Y" dimensions in Table 7 to position the
actuator. They were selected to ensure that the crank is approximately
perpendicular to the actuator shaft at half its stroke. This will prevent the
linkage from scissoring or locking up (see Figure 7).
PIVOT POST AND CRANK SHAFT

MUST REMAIN PERPENDICULAR
TO MOUNTING PLATE
MOUNTING
PLATE
PIVOT
POST
CRANK
SHAFT
AP0254R1
Figure 7. Perpendicular Mounting.

October 10, 2005
Extended Shaft 4. Place the front of the actuator on the "X" dimension line so the actuator shaft faces
Mounting - Fixed the damper shaft. Place the centerline of the actuator over the "Y" dimension line
Actuator, (Figure 8).
Continued 5. Thread Clevis 331-801 onto the actuator shaft and tighten it against the lock nut.
Assemble Linkage Kit 331-958 (Table 6, Items 1 through 6) to the actuator assembly
per Figure 8. The linkage is assembled so the damper shaft will rotate CCW as
actuator pressure increases. This is a typical normally closed damper installation.
Figure 8. Fixed Mounted Actuator Assembly.

Table 6. Linkage Kit 331-958 Parts Table 7. Linkage Kit 331-958 Crank Connections
(Figure 8). (Figure 8).
Item Part No. Description Qty. Material Crank Dimensions Application
1 331-918 Clevis pin 2 Zinc plated Hole Inches (Millimeters)
steel Number X Y
2 331-930 Spring washer 1 1 8-1/2 2 4-inch (102) stroke -
(216) (51) 90 rotation
3 331-929 Washer 1 Nylon
2 8-1/2 3 4-inch (102) stroke -
4 331-941 Crank assembly 1 (216) (76) 70 rotation
5 331-807 Hitch pin 2 Zinc plated 3 8 1-1/2 3-inch (76) stroke -
steel (203) (38) 90 rotation
6 331-922 4-inch link 1 Steel 4 8 2-1/2 3-inch (76) stroke -
(203) (64) 60 rotation

October 10, 2005
Frame Mounting 1. Order one each of the following:

Actuator assembly: 331-3000, 331-3001, 331-3002, 331-2973, or 331-3004
Mounting Lug: 331-569
2. Weld the mounting lug to the damper frame (Figure 10) so that it is parallel and
5/16-inch (8 mm) from the inside edge of the damper frame and perpendicular to it.
Weld the mounting lug along both sides. The mounting lug should be as close as
possible to the corner of the damper frame to minimize deflection. The damper
manufacturer should weld the lug.
3. If the damper frame is aluminum, light gauge sheet metal, or an unusual shape, bolt
a 3/16-inch (5-mm) thick, flat piece of steel to the frame. Then, weld the mounting
lug to the piece of steel.
4. Attach the rocker to the blade in the proper position for a normally open or normally
closed damper (Figure 10).
5. Attach the mounting plate to the mounting lug.
Normally open damper: Attach the plate to the lug (Figure 12). Place the pivot
post in Hole 6.
Normally closed damper: Attach the plate to the lug (Figure 13). Place the pivot
post in Hole 5.
6. Fasten the clevis to the rocker. Discard the crank and other parts not used.
7. The actuator mounting plate has a tendency to pivot at the point where the lug is
welded to the damper frame when the actuator strokes. It is recommended that
some means be devised in the field to prevent this from happening. A threaded rod
attached to mounting plate and duct wall will normally work.
Offset Mounting This bracket is designed to offset the Universal Mounting Plate 331-623 from ductwork
Bracket and insulation.
NOTE: Depending on the application, two brackets may be required to support the
actuator and universal mounting plate.
Figure 9. Offset Mounting Bracket 333-176.


October 10, 2005
Dimensions
Figure 10. Frame Mounting Dimensions.


October 10, 2005
Figure 11. Actuator Mounting Plate 331-623,

1/4-Inch (6 mm) Thick. Figure 12. Frame Mounting
Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters). Normally Open Damper.
Table 8. Mounting Plate Hole

Designations (Figure 11).
Hole Description
1 No. 6 actuator extended shaft mounting
2 Not used
3 No. 4 actuator extended shaft
No. 6 actuator frame mounting NC
4 No. 6 actuator frame mounting NO
5 No. 4 actuator frame mounting NC
Figure 13. Frame Mounting
6 No. 4 actuator frame mounting NO
Normally Closed Damper.
Figure 14. Dimensions with the RL 147 Positioning Relay Mounted.


October 10, 2005
HOLES FOR 8-1/4

1-1/8 9/16
POSITIONING RELAY #10-16 X 1/2 (207)
(29) (14)
MOUNTING BRACKET SHEET METAL
SCREWS
(3 PLS.)
4-5/8
3-1/4 (118)
(83) DIA.
2-5/8 1-1/2
(67) (38)
2-3/8 4-3/16
(60) (106)
DIA.
3/8-24
THD
OPTIONAL
STOP SCREWS
2 OUTSIDE
AP0021R4
HOLES
(SEE TABLE)
Figure 15. Bracket Mounted Actuator 331-2911 (Typical).

Table 9. Stop Screw Adjustment and

Stroke Length (Figure 15).
Stop Screw Stroke Length
Adjustment Inches (Millimeters)
Dimension "A" Kit 331-938 Kit 331-939
Inches (Millimeters)
IN 0 3.0 (76) 2-3/8 (60)
0.5 (13) 3.5 (89) 2-7/8 (73)
1.0 (25) 4.0 (102) 3-3/8 (85)
1.5 (38) 4.0 (102) 3-7/8 (98)
2.0 (51) 4.0 (102)
OUT 2-1/4 (57) 4.0 (102)
Figure 16. Mounting Bracket Dimensions.
design improvements are introduced. POWERS is a trademark of Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Oilite is a registered trademark of Beemer
Precision, Inc. Other product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. 2005 Siemens Building
Technologies, Inc.
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089-4513 them to SBT_technical.editor@siemens.com Page 14
U.S.A.
Dampers
VANCOUVER SALES OFFICE EDMONTON SALES OFFICE TORONTO SALES OFFICE

100-17717 65A Avenue 12944 - 148 Street 571 Chrislea Road, Unit 3
Surrey, BC V3S 1Z8 Edmonton, AB T5L 2H8 Woodbridge, ON N5V 0A8
Ph: 604.777.1712 Fax: 604.777.1713 Ph: 780.477.9231 Fax: 780.477.3701 Ph: 905.669.8988 Fax: 905.669.8023
Email: vancouver@ehpricesales.com Email: edmonton@ehpricesales.com Email: toronto@ehpricesales.com
Website: www.ehpricevancouver.com Website: www.ehpriceedmonton.com Website: www.ehpricetoronto.com
LOCAL DELIVERY AVAILABLE | CONTACT YOUR E.H. PRICE SALES REPRESENTATIVE FOR MORE INFORMATION
CANADIAN HEAD OFFICE
638 Raleigh Street Canadian Head Office, Laboratory, & Manufacturing Facilities in Winnipeg, Manitoba
Winnipeg, Manitoba Canada R2K 3Z9 Sales Offices or Representation in all major Canadian cities
Ph: 204.669.4220 Fax: 204.663.2715
The founding principles of our company have never changed - business integrity, first class service and a commitment to people. Price manufacturing
endeavours arose from our belief that we could supply superior products and services at a reasonable price. Our mission is to become the world-
wide supplier of preference for air distribution products and services. You can rely on Price our products and services with confidence.
Product Improvement is a continuing endeavour at Price. Therefore, specifications are subject to change without notice. Consult your Price sales representative
for current specifications or more detailed information.
Warranty: The Company warrants and guarantees that all goods within this brochure that have been manufactured by the Company have been manufactured in accordance with
the specifications published herein and will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the Bill of Lading issued by the Company.
The Company will replace defective product at its option, but will not be responsible for labor or material charges in replacing product or consequential damages. Any installa-
tion not conforming with the Companys specifications, manuals, bulletins or instructions or any misuse or any modification not authorized by the Company voids this warranty. This
warranty is in lieu of all Provincial, State, and Federal statutory warranties and the conditions herein are in substitution and replacement of which warranties, statutory or otherwise.
E.H. Price, a division of Price Industries Limited. In British Columbia & Alberta, E.H. Price Sales is a division of E.H. Price Limited. Lithographed in Canada 2012
A I R D I S T R I B U T I O N
Price is a registered trademark of Price Industries Limited. 2012.

P R O D U C T S F O R W O R L D - C L A S S C I T I E S
A I R D I S T R I B U T I O N P R O D U C T S F O R W O R L D C L A S S C I T I E S
www.ehpricesales.com

Dampers Catalog

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Dampers Catalog

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Dampers

Description Submittal No. Date

Control Damper Installation and Accessories

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Model Standard Construction:

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Model Standard Construction:

Specifications are correct at time of printing.

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Model Standard Construction:

Commercial Control Damper Steel

Commercial Control Damper - Steel Frame

Model Standard Construction:

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Model Standard Construction:

Commercial Control Damper - Steel

Commercial Control Damper - Aluminum

Commercial Control Damper - Aluminum

Commercial Control Damper - Aluminum

Commercial Control Damper - Aluminum

Commercial Control Damper - Aluminum

Commercial Control Damper - Aluminum

Commercial Control Damper Aluminum

Manual Balancing Damper

Model Standard Construction:

Manual Balancing Damper - Round

Face & By-Pass Mixing Damper

Actuator and Jackshaft Dimensions

NOTE: Dampers are intended to be self-

MINIMUM SLEEVE / ENCLOSURE LENGTH Standard Construction:

Both electric and pneumatic damper actua- Typical Installations:

CCD-AE4-4X CCD-GV5-3V CCD-RD

Fire Damper Static

Description Submittal No. Date

Fire Damper Static

Fire Damper Static Installation and Accessories

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical

Static Fire Damper c/w Sleeve, Horizontal and Vertical

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical

Model Typical 3 sides for vertical

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical

All Metric dimensions ( ) are soft conversion.

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical

For dampers one section high:

For VERTICAL dampers two sections

Note: See maximum section size for

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical

For dampers one section high:

For VERTICAL dampers two sections

Note: See maximum section size for

Static Fire Damper c/w sleeve, Horizontal and Vertical

Model Notes: Dampers are fur-

Static Fire Damper c/w sleeve, Horizontal and Vertical

For dampers one section high:

For VERTICAL dampers two sections

Note: See maximum section size for

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical

Single Section Max: 59"w x 54"h (1499mm

Max. Size: 119"w x 114"h (3023mm x

Static Fire Damper, Horizontal and Vertical